EntraPass Special Edition Administration

Guide

Building Technologies & Solutions D29011093R001

www.kantech.com
2021-06-21 8.40

D29011093R001
D29011093R001
2 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide
 Contents
Privacy notice................................................................................................................................................ 17
Contents
Copyright............................................................................................................................................ 17
Release Notes 8.40....................................................................................................................................... 18
Product security advisory................................................................................................................. 18
Cybersecurity improvements........................................................................................................... 18
Video server connections use HTTPS protocol..................................................................................... 18
KT-2 Two-Door Controller................................................................................................................. 18
Technical support......................................................................................................................................... 19
How to........................................................................................................................................................... 21
How to create a backup.................................................................................................................... 21
How to create a badge...................................................................................................................... 21
How to create a card......................................................................................................................... 21
How to create a schedule................................................................................................................. 22
How to create a simple report......................................................................................................... 22
How to create an access level.......................................................................................................... 22
How to print a list of cards............................................................................................................... 22
How to print a list of access levels.................................................................................................. 23
How to print a list of doors.............................................................................................................. 23
How to set up desktops.................................................................................................................... 23
How to use shortcut keys................................................................................................................. 23
How to set up the ioSmart............................................................................................................... 24
How to configure an ioSmart reader on the operation tab................................................................ 24
FAQ................................................................................................................................................................. 26
Introduction.................................................................................................................................................. 27
What is EntraPass?............................................................................................................................ 27
Kantech Advantage Program (KAP)....................................................................................................... 27
Kantech IP Link......................................................................................................................................... 27
KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-1, KT-2, and KT-400 controllers................................................................ 27
KT-400 controller...................................................................................................................................... 28
Expansion modules for the KT-400........................................................................................................ 28
Kantech ioSmart card reader................................................................................................................. 28
Kantech Telephone Entry System.......................................................................................................... 28
Express setup........................................................................................................................................... 28
Elevator control capability...................................................................................................................... 29
Integrated badging.................................................................................................................................. 29
Interactive floor plans............................................................................................................................. 29
Configurable desktops by operator....................................................................................................... 29
Interfacing with external alarm panels................................................................................................. 29
In/Out feature.......................................................................................................................................... 29
Visual diagnostics..................................................................................................................................... 29
Enhanced video integration.................................................................................................................... 29

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 3

 Vocabulary editor..................................................................................................................................... 29
Installation.................................................................................................................................................... 30
Minimum system requirements...................................................................................................... 30
Operating system compatibility............................................................................................................. 30
Additional requirements......................................................................................................................... 30
Security hardening guide................................................................................................................. 30
System installation............................................................................................................................ 31
Getting started............................................................................................................................................. 33
Basic functions................................................................................................................................... 33
Finding components................................................................................................................................ 33
Using the extended selection box......................................................................................................... 34
Selecting components............................................................................................................................. 35
Printing a list or report............................................................................................................................ 35
Viewing component links........................................................................................................................ 36
Floating windows..................................................................................................................................... 36
Deleting an item................................................................................................................................ 36
Viewing component links................................................................................................................. 37
EntraPass toolbar.............................................................................................................................. 37
Express setup..................................................................................................................................... 38
Session Start and End....................................................................................................................... 39
Starting the EntraPass workstation....................................................................................................... 39
Accessing Information on the Server Workstation Connection Status............................................. 39
Modifying your Work Area Properties................................................................................................... 39
Desktops........................................................................................................................................................ 41
Alarms Desktop................................................................................................................................. 41
Defining an Alarms Desktop................................................................................................................... 41
Viewing System Alarm Messages.......................................................................................................... 42
Displaying Alarm Desktops Automatically............................................................................................ 43
Acknowledging Alarms/Events.............................................................................................................. 44
Automatic Acknowledgement................................................................................................................ 44
To Acknowledge an Alarm Message...................................................................................................... 44
To Acknowledge Alarms from the Alarms Desktop............................................................................. 45
Mandatory Alarm Comment................................................................................................................... 45
Changing desktop events....................................................................................................................... 45
Changing the Display Properties..................................................................................................... 45
Custom Report Desktop................................................................................................................... 46
Configuring a Custom Reports Desktop............................................................................................... 46
Comment Entry and Display................................................................................................................... 47
Playing archived video recordings from a Desktop Message list...................................................... 47
Customizing Event Display in the Message Desktops.................................................................. 47
Filtered Messages Desktop.............................................................................................................. 48
Configuring a Filtered Messages Desktop............................................................................................ 49
Graphic desktop................................................................................................................................ 49

4 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Viewing Graphics in the Graphic Desktop............................................................................................ 49
Message List Desktop....................................................................................................................... 50
Viewing and Sorting System Events...................................................................................................... 51
Customizing Event Display in the Message Desktops......................................................................... 51
Performing Tasks on System Messages............................................................................................... 53
Add, Modify or Delete Tagged Events................................................................................................... 54
Picture Desktop................................................................................................................................. 55
Modifying Pictures Display Options...................................................................................................... 55
Specific Desktop Customizing.......................................................................................................... 56
Customizing a Desktop for a “Full Access” Operator.......................................................................... 56
Customizing a Desktop for a “Read-Only” Operator.......................................................................... 57
Transferring a Customized Desktop...................................................................................................... 57
Desktops Colors....................................................................................................................................... 57
Status............................................................................................................................................................. 58
Database status................................................................................................................................. 58
Graphic Status.................................................................................................................................... 59
Viewing a Controller Status.................................................................................................................... 59
Numerical Status............................................................................................................................... 60
Text Status.......................................................................................................................................... 60
Displaying a Component Status............................................................................................................. 61
Video server status............................................................................................................................ 61
Viewing the video server's full status................................................................................................... 62
Operations.................................................................................................................................................... 64
Manual operations on controllers................................................................................................... 64
Selecting a Controller.............................................................................................................................. 65
Performing a Controller Soft Reset....................................................................................................... 65
Performing a Controller Hard Reset...................................................................................................... 65
Reloading a Controller Manually........................................................................................................... 66
Manually clearing buffered events........................................................................................................ 66
Resetting Cards In Counters or all Controller local areas................................................................... 66
Calculating Number of Cards In............................................................................................................ 66
Card Location........................................................................................................................................... 66
Resetting Cards In Counters or all Controller local areas................................................................... 67
Requesting unassigned modules.......................................................................................................... 67
Full status.................................................................................................................................................. 67
Module status........................................................................................................................................... 67
Edit............................................................................................................................................................. 67
Manual operations on doors........................................................................................................... 67
Selecting a Door or a Door Group......................................................................................................... 68
Locking a Door Manually........................................................................................................................ 69
Unlocking a Door Manually.................................................................................................................... 69
Unlocking a Door Temporarily............................................................................................................... 69
Resetting a Door Schedule..................................................................................................................... 69

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 5

 Enabling a Door Reader.......................................................................................................................... 69
Disabling a Door Reader......................................................................................................................... 69
Modifying access level schedule............................................................................................................ 70
Manual operations on elevator doors............................................................................................ 70
Selecting an Elevator Door..................................................................................................................... 71
Locking Floors from Elevator Doors...................................................................................................... 71
Unlocking Floors from Elevator Doors.................................................................................................. 71
Unlocking Floors from Elevator Doors Temporarily............................................................................ 72
Resetting an Elevator Door Schedule.................................................................................................... 72
Enabling an Elevator Floor...................................................................................................................... 72
Disabling an Elevator Floor..................................................................................................................... 72
Manual operations on gateway....................................................................................................... 72
Redundant gateway operations............................................................................................................. 73
Manual operations on inputs........................................................................................................... 73
Performing Manual Operations on Inputs........................................................................................... 73
Returning an Input to Its Normal State Manually............................................................................... 74
Stopping Monitoring an Input............................................................................................................... 74
Stopping Input Supervision (Shunt) Temporarily................................................................................ 74
Manual operations on integrated panels....................................................................................... 74
Manual operations on action scheduler......................................................................................... 75
Programming the Action scheduler...................................................................................................... 75
Programming the Action scheduler from the Door or Relay windows............................................. 76
Printing the Action scheduler calendar................................................................................................. 76
Manual operations on relays........................................................................................................... 77
Selecting Relays........................................................................................................................................ 77
Deactivating a Relay Manually............................................................................................................... 78
Activating a Relay Manually.................................................................................................................... 78
Activating a Relay Temporarily............................................................................................................... 78
Resetting a Relay Schedule..................................................................................................................... 78
Manual operations on sites.............................................................................................................. 78
Performing Manual Operations on a Site/connection........................................................................ 79
Manual operations on view roll call................................................................................................ 79
Users.............................................................................................................................................................. 81
Access Levels Definition.................................................................................................................... 81
Badge Designing............................................................................................................................... 81
Creating a Badge Template.................................................................................................................... 81
Printing Badges........................................................................................................................................ 87
Card access groups definition......................................................................................................... 88
Card Printing...................................................................................................................................... 88
Adding Comments to a Card........................................................................................................... 90
Cards definition................................................................................................................................. 90
Issuing a new card................................................................................................................................... 90
Card audit trail......................................................................................................................................... 91

6 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Quick Access to Door List per Card....................................................................................................... 92
Creating New Cards Using the “Save As” Feature............................................................................... 93
Issuing Cards Using the “Batch Load” Feature................................................................................... 93
Viewing and Verifying PINs.................................................................................................................... 93
Card handling.................................................................................................................................... 94
Finding a card using the toolbar search............................................................................................... 94
Finding a card using the card search window..................................................................................... 94
Editing a card............................................................................................................................................ 95
Deleting a card......................................................................................................................................... 95
Customizing Card Information Fields................................................................................................... 95
Cardholder Access Levels Assignation.................................................................................................. 96
Access exception...................................................................................................................................... 97
Card options definition........................................................................................................................... 97
Adding Comments to a Card.................................................................................................................. 98
Assigning Pictures and Signatures........................................................................................................ 98
Assigning a Picture from a File............................................................................................................... 98
Assigning a Picture Using a Video Camera........................................................................................... 98
Importing a signature from a file.......................................................................................................... 99
Adding a Signature from a Signature Capture Device........................................................................ 99
Working with Photos and Signatures.................................................................................................... 99
CSV Files Import and Export.......................................................................................................... 100
Using a Predefined Pattern.................................................................................................................. 101
Creating a New Import/Export Pattern.............................................................................................. 101
Exporting Cards...................................................................................................................................... 102
Importing Cards..................................................................................................................................... 103
Correcting Import/Export Errors......................................................................................................... 103
Customizing Card Information Fields........................................................................................... 103
Issuing a new card in enhanced user management environment........................................... 104
Issuing Cards Using the Batch Load Feature............................................................................... 105
Last Transactions Display............................................................................................................... 105
Viewing the Last Transaction............................................................................................................... 106
Quick Access to Door List per Card............................................................................................... 107
Tenants List...................................................................................................................................... 107
Creating a New Tenants List................................................................................................................. 107
Adding new tenants to the list............................................................................................................. 107
Importing a tenant list.......................................................................................................................... 109
Exporting a tenant list........................................................................................................................... 110
Validating card access..................................................................................................................... 110
Definition..................................................................................................................................................... 112
Floors Definition.............................................................................................................................. 112
Graphics Definition......................................................................................................................... 112
Defining Components of a Graphic..................................................................................................... 112
Designing the Background for the Graphic Window........................................................................ 113

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 7

 Assigning System Components to Graphic Icons.............................................................................. 114
Printing System Components and Graphics...................................................................................... 114
Holiday Definition............................................................................................................................ 114
Schedules Definition....................................................................................................................... 115
Defining a Schedule............................................................................................................................... 116
Groups......................................................................................................................................................... 117
Access level groups grouping........................................................................................................ 117
Trigger group creation................................................................................................................... 117
Controller group creation............................................................................................................... 117
Door group creation....................................................................................................................... 118
Floor group creation....................................................................................................................... 118
Input group creation....................................................................................................................... 119
Relay group creation....................................................................................................................... 119
Devices........................................................................................................................................................ 120
Application Configuration.............................................................................................................. 120
Configuring an Application................................................................................................................... 121
Defining the host modem and keypad delays................................................................................... 123
Change site labels........................................................................................................................... 123
Connection configuration............................................................................................................... 123
Setting up communication timing....................................................................................................... 124
Configuring a Direct RS-232 Connection Type................................................................................... 124
Configuring an IP device connection type.......................................................................................... 125
Configuring an Ethernet Polling Connection Type............................................................................ 127
Configuring a Dial-Up (RS-232) Modem Connection Type............................................................... 127
Migrating KT-Standalone backup data to an EntraPass server....................................................... 128
Controllers configuration............................................................................................................... 130
Unassigned modules............................................................................................................................. 130
Configuring general parameters for Kantech controllers................................................................ 130
Changing controller type...................................................................................................................... 133
Configuring Specific Controller Parameters....................................................................................... 134
Configuring the status relay activations............................................................................................. 135
Configuring licensed wireless doors................................................................................................... 135
Defining Controller Options................................................................................................................. 137
Supervision Schedule............................................................................................................................ 139
KT-200...................................................................................................................................................... 139
KT-300...................................................................................................................................................... 140
KT-400...................................................................................................................................................... 142
KT-1/KT-2................................................................................................................................................. 146
Video gateway or video vault enrollment........................................................................................... 147
Adding an ioSmart reader.................................................................................................................... 148
Controller event buffer overflow message......................................................................................... 148
Expansion modules setup..................................................................................................................... 149
Doors configuration........................................................................................................................ 150

8 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Defining general parameters for a door............................................................................................ 150
Defining Door Keypad Options............................................................................................................ 152
Defining Door Contact Options............................................................................................................ 153
Defining REX (Request to Exit) Options.............................................................................................. 154
Defining Interlock Options (Mantrap)................................................................................................. 155
Defining elevator doors........................................................................................................................ 156
Configuring Door Events...................................................................................................................... 157
Defining Door Options for Controllers and the KTES........................................................................ 157
Configuring external alarm system interfaces................................................................................... 158
Managing door access levels............................................................................................................... 159
Reader Templates.................................................................................................................................. 160
Input configuration......................................................................................................................... 160
Defining Input........................................................................................................................................ 161
Defining Relays and Inputs.................................................................................................................. 162
Defining Tamper and Trouble.............................................................................................................. 163
Defining an Input for an Elevator Door.............................................................................................. 163
Enabling Remote Event Reporting....................................................................................................... 163
Integrated component configuration........................................................................................... 164
Integrated panel configuration..................................................................................................... 166
General tab............................................................................................................................................. 166
Panel component tab (Bentel, DSC Maxsys, PowerSeries Neo and Pro)........................................ 169
RS-232 tab............................................................................................................................................... 171
Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) Configuration............................................................ 171
Defining general parameters for the KTES......................................................................................... 171
Defining the Kantech Telephone Entry System parameters............................................................ 172
Defining the Language and Welcome Message Parameters........................................................... 174
Defining the Options Parameters........................................................................................................ 175
Defining the status relay parameters................................................................................................. 176
Defining the Pager Options.................................................................................................................. 176
Configuring Tenant Administration Level Parameters..................................................................... 178
Output device configuration.......................................................................................................... 178
Defining General Options for an Output............................................................................................ 178
Associating Events with Auxiliary Outputs......................................................................................... 179
Relay configuration......................................................................................................................... 179
Defining relays....................................................................................................................................... 179
Setting up Communication Timing............................................................................................... 180
Site configuration............................................................................................................................ 180
Video............................................................................................................................................................ 181
Camera definition............................................................................................................................ 181
Defining a Camera................................................................................................................................. 181
Associating a Camera with an Icon..................................................................................................... 182
Defining Presets and Patterns............................................................................................................. 182
Defining Events Recorded by a Camera.............................................................................................. 182

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 9

 Current recording............................................................................................................................ 183
Viewing the current recordings........................................................................................................... 184
Viewing exported videos................................................................................................................ 184
Exporting Video Files...................................................................................................................... 184
Finding video events....................................................................................................................... 185
Recording parameters.................................................................................................................... 186
Setting Up Recording Parameters....................................................................................................... 186
Setting Up Stop Recording Trigger Parameters................................................................................ 187
Video desktop.................................................................................................................................. 188
Displaying a video view......................................................................................................................... 188
Video event list................................................................................................................................ 188
Using the Video Event List.................................................................................................................... 189
Finding video events.............................................................................................................................. 189
Playing Video Segments....................................................................................................................... 189
Linking Video Clips with Key Frames................................................................................................... 190
Exporting Video Files............................................................................................................................. 190
Protecting a Video with a Password.................................................................................................... 191
Video playback................................................................................................................................. 191
Viewing a Video Playback..................................................................................................................... 191
Video server configuration............................................................................................................. 192
Defining the video server communication settings.......................................................................... 192
Enhancing the Security of Video Servers............................................................................................ 194
Remote Video Connection.................................................................................................................... 195
Defining the EntraPass Video Vault..................................................................................................... 195
Video triggers.................................................................................................................................. 195
Defining Video Triggers........................................................................................................................ 195
Video Views Creation and Modification........................................................................................ 196
Modifying a Video View......................................................................................................................... 196
Video views definition..................................................................................................................... 197
Defining video view general parameters............................................................................................ 197
System......................................................................................................................................................... 200
Database Structure Definition....................................................................................................... 200
Viewing the Database Components.................................................................................................... 200
Event Parameters Definition.......................................................................................................... 201
Defining events parameters................................................................................................................. 201
Viewing Default Parameters................................................................................................................. 202
Deleting and Restoring Associations................................................................................................... 202
Printing Event Parameters.................................................................................................................... 203
Instructions definition.................................................................................................................... 203
Defining an Instruction......................................................................................................................... 203
Message Filters Definition.............................................................................................................. 203
Defining Event for a Message Filter.................................................................................................... 204
Operators definition........................................................................................................................ 205

10 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Creating or editing an operator........................................................................................................... 205
Security level definition.................................................................................................................. 206
Creating and modifying operator security levels.............................................................................. 207
Defining Login Options for an Operator............................................................................................ 207
Hiding Card Information....................................................................................................................... 208
Assigning Video Custom Buttons........................................................................................................ 209
Workspace Definition...................................................................................................................... 209
Workspace Filtering............................................................................................................................... 210
Defining Gateways and Sites................................................................................................................ 210
Defining Schedules................................................................................................................................ 210
Defining Controllers.............................................................................................................................. 210
Defining Doors....................................................................................................................................... 211
Defining Relays...................................................................................................................................... 211
Defining Inputs...................................................................................................................................... 211
Defining Access Levels.......................................................................................................................... 211
Defining Alarm Systems........................................................................................................................ 211
Defining Card Filters.............................................................................................................................. 212
Defining Reports.................................................................................................................................... 212
Defining Graphics.................................................................................................................................. 212
Defining Operators................................................................................................................................ 213
Defining Badge Layouts........................................................................................................................ 213
Defining Workspaces............................................................................................................................. 213
Specifying Security Level....................................................................................................................... 213
Defining Video Servers.......................................................................................................................... 214
Defining Cameras.................................................................................................................................. 214
Defining Video Views............................................................................................................................. 214
Defining Panels...................................................................................................................................... 214
Defining Panel Components................................................................................................................ 215
Defining events...................................................................................................................................... 215
Operators in Workspace....................................................................................................................... 215
Audit.................................................................................................................................................. 215
Reports........................................................................................................................................................ 218
Archive viewing................................................................................................................................ 218
Displaying a Report............................................................................................................................... 218
Previewing Reports................................................................................................................................ 218
Previewing In/Out Reports................................................................................................................... 219
Card Use Report.............................................................................................................................. 220
Automatic Report Schedule.................................................................................................................. 220
Automatic Report Output..................................................................................................................... 220
Custom reports definition.............................................................................................................. 221
Using the Default “All Events” Report................................................................................................. 221
Defining a Custom Report.................................................................................................................... 221
Defining a Report Output Format................................................................................................. 224

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 11

 Historical and Card use reports........................................................................................................... 224
In/Out Reports....................................................................................................................................... 225
Defining Automatic Report Schedules.......................................................................................... 226
Specifying additional options for automatic reports........................................................................ 227
In/Out reports definition................................................................................................................ 227
Defining In/Out Reports....................................................................................................................... 227
In/Out reports request................................................................................................................... 228
Requesting a In/Out Report Manually................................................................................................ 228
Operations on In/Out..................................................................................................................... 229
Adding a Transaction in the In/Out Database................................................................................... 229
Previewing In/Out Reports............................................................................................................ 230
Previewing Reports......................................................................................................................... 231
Quick Report Definition.................................................................................................................. 232
Defining a Quick Report........................................................................................................................ 232
Report Log........................................................................................................................................ 233
Report state...................................................................................................................................... 234
Report state fields.................................................................................................................................. 234
Contextual menu of in process reports.............................................................................................. 234
Requesting Reports......................................................................................................................... 235
Roll Call Reports............................................................................................................................... 236
Functionalities........................................................................................................................................ 236
Roll Call Report generation................................................................................................................... 236
Specifying additional options for automatic reports.................................................................. 237
Options........................................................................................................................................................ 238
Backup Scheduler............................................................................................................................ 239
Scheduling Automatic Backups of the System Database................................................................. 239
Dealer Information.......................................................................................................................... 241
About box details................................................................................................................................... 241
KAP reminder......................................................................................................................................... 241
Defining a card display format...................................................................................................... 242
Changing from a 24-bit to 32-bit Global Card Format...................................................................... 243
Auto conversion..................................................................................................................................... 244
Integration....................................................................................................................................... 244
Multimedia devices configuration................................................................................................. 244
Selecting an Alarm Sound..................................................................................................................... 244
Defining Video Options......................................................................................................................... 245
Setting Up the Signature Capture Device........................................................................................... 245
Printers selection and configuration............................................................................................ 246
Selecting and Setting Up a Log Printer............................................................................................... 246
Selecting and Setting Up a Report Printer.......................................................................................... 246
Selecting and Setting Up a Badge Printer.......................................................................................... 247
Registration...................................................................................................................................... 247
Selecting and Setting Up a Badge Printer.................................................................................... 247

12 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 System date and time modification.............................................................................................. 247
System language selection............................................................................................................ 248
Changing the System Language.......................................................................................................... 248
System parameters configuration................................................................................................ 248
Server Parameters................................................................................................................................. 248
Firmware Parameters............................................................................................................................ 250
Image Parameters................................................................................................................................. 252
Report Parameters................................................................................................................................ 253
Video Parameters.................................................................................................................................. 254
Time Parameters.................................................................................................................................... 256
Workstation and Server........................................................................................................................ 256
Integration.............................................................................................................................................. 257
Web Interface......................................................................................................................................... 257
User Name Format.......................................................................................................................... 258
Backups....................................................................................................................................................... 259
Creating Backups of Type D, A, T and V....................................................................................... 259
Restores............................................................................................................................................ 260
Log..................................................................................................................................................... 260
Error Log........................................................................................................................................... 261
Utilities......................................................................................................................................................... 262
Database utility................................................................................................................................ 262
Running the Database Utility............................................................................................................... 262
Express setup program.................................................................................................................. 264
Configuring a multi-site gateway connection using express setup................................................ 264
Configuring a Controller Using Express Setup.................................................................................. 267
Configuring a KTES Using Express Setup........................................................................................... 268
Defining Relays...................................................................................................................................... 269
Defining Inputs...................................................................................................................................... 269
Defining auxiliary outputs (LED and buzzer)..................................................................................... 269
Quick report viewer......................................................................................................................... 270
Vocabulary editor............................................................................................................................ 270
Installing the Vocabulary Editor........................................................................................................... 271
Translating the system language........................................................................................................ 271
Integrating the custom language in EntraPass................................................................................. 272
Distributing the New System Vocabulary........................................................................................... 273
Updating the system vocabulary......................................................................................................... 273
Upgrading the System Vocabulary...................................................................................................... 273
EntraPass icons.......................................................................................................................................... 274
Alarm Systems................................................................................................................................. 274
Alarm system is in alarm...................................................................................................................... 274
Alarm system is armed......................................................................................................................... 274
Alarm system is armed with input in alarm (forced arming)........................................................... 274
Alarm system is in arming request delay........................................................................................... 274

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 13

 Alarm system is disarmed.................................................................................................................... 275
Alarm system is in entry delay............................................................................................................. 275
Alarm system is in “Exit” delay............................................................................................................ 275
Alarm system status is not yet known................................................................................................ 275
Alarm system is in “Postpone” mode................................................................................................. 275
Controllers........................................................................................................................................ 276
Status unknown..................................................................................................................................... 276
Controller AC failure.............................................................................................................................. 276
Controller Polling Malfunction............................................................................................................. 276
Controller AC failure and Tamper Switch in “alarm”........................................................................ 276
Controller is not communicating......................................................................................................... 277
Controller communication is regular (no problem).......................................................................... 277
Controller is in “Reset” and AC failure................................................................................................ 277
Controller is in “Reset”, “AC failure” and “Tamper in alarm”.......................................................... 277
Controller is in reset and tamper in alarm......................................................................................... 278
Controller tamper in alarm................................................................................................................... 278
Controller reloading firmware............................................................................................................. 278
KT-400 controller trouble...................................................................................................................... 278
Doors....................................................................................................................................................... 278
Relays................................................................................................................................................ 283
Relay activated by alarm system in alarm.......................................................................................... 283
Relay activated by alarm system function.......................................................................................... 283
Relay activated by alarm system delay............................................................................................... 284
Relay activated by an event.................................................................................................................. 284
Relay temporarily activated by an event............................................................................................. 284
Relay activated by an input.................................................................................................................. 284
Relay temporarily activated by an input............................................................................................. 284
Relay activated by an operator............................................................................................................ 285
Relay temporarily activated by an operator....................................................................................... 285
Relay temporarily activated by a schedule......................................................................................... 285
Relay deactivated................................................................................................................................... 285
Inputs................................................................................................................................................ 285
Input activated—Not supervised......................................................................................................... 285
Input activated—Supervised................................................................................................................ 286
Input activated—Not supervised manual operation......................................................................... 286
Input activated—Supervised manual operation................................................................................ 286
Input activated—Supervised temporarily manual operation.......................................................... 286
Input in alarm—Not supervised.......................................................................................................... 287
Input in alarm—Shunted by operator................................................................................................. 287
Input in alarm—Supervised.................................................................................................................. 287
Input in alarm—Supervised by operator............................................................................................ 287
Input OK—Not supervised.................................................................................................................... 288
Input OK—Shunted by operator.......................................................................................................... 288
Input OK—Supervised........................................................................................................................... 288

14 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Input OK—Supervised by operator..................................................................................................... 288
Controller connection..................................................................................................................... 288
Connection status is not yet known.................................................................................................... 289
Controller connection connected........................................................................................................ 289
Controller connection connected and in “Reload Data”.................................................................. 289
Controller connection—Communication Failure............................................................................... 289
Gateways.......................................................................................................................................... 289
Gateway—Communication Failure...................................................................................................... 289
Gateway in “Reload Data”.................................................................................................................... 290
Gateway—Communication Failure during Reload Data................................................................... 290
Gateway communication is regular (no problem)............................................................................. 290
Gateway Trouble.................................................................................................................................... 290
Gateway Trouble when Reloading....................................................................................................... 291
Gateway OK—communicating............................................................................................................. 291
Gateway in “Reload Data”.................................................................................................................... 291
Gateway—Communication Failure...................................................................................................... 291
Gateway—Reload KT-NCC Firmware................................................................................................... 291
EntraPass Application..................................................................................................................... 292
Application status is not yet known.................................................................................................... 292
Application attempts communication................................................................................................. 292
Application—Communication Failure.................................................................................................. 292
Others............................................................................................................................................... 292
Database Initialization........................................................................................................................... 292
Data not available.................................................................................................................................. 292
No status available................................................................................................................................ 293
Output status is not yet known............................................................................................................ 293
Status unknown..................................................................................................................................... 293
Error in process...................................................................................................................................... 293
Undefined Component.......................................................................................................................... 293
EULA............................................................................................................................................................. 295
TYCO INTERNATIONAL LTD............................................................................................................ 295

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 15

16 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide
Privacy notice
The personal data processed by this application by Johnson Controls as controller will be processed
in accordance with the Johnson Controls Privacy Notice at https://www.johnsoncontrols.com/
legal/privacy. By installing this software, you acknowledge that you have read and understood the
Johnson Controls Privacy Notice. If your consent is required under applicable law for the processing
and/or transfer (including international transfer) of such personal data, and strictly to the extent
that consent is required under applicable law, your above actions are your consent.

Copyright
© 2021 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. JOHNSON CONTROLS, TYCO, and KANTECH are
trademarks of Johnson Controls.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 17

Release Notes 8.40
See the following list of new features for this release.

Product security advisory

Under certain conditions, the KT-1 door controller is susceptible to a replay or man-in-the-middle
attack.
To mitigate against security attacks, complete the following steps:

• Upgrade the KT-1 controller to version 3.04

• Upgrade EntraPass to version 8.40

Cybersecurity improvements
To improve the security of EntraPass, the following updates are available with version 8.40.

Video server connections use HTTPS protocol

All new video server connections now use HTTPS protocol by default. For more information, see
Defining the video server communication settings.

KT-2 Two-Door Controller

Kantech is launching the new KT-2 Two-Door Controller. See the following list of features.

• You can use the KT-2 to control the entry of two doors or to control the entry and exit of one
door. It replaces the KT-300 which is due to reach its end-of-sale date.
• When used with EntraPass, the KT-2 has Wi-Fi compatibility.
• The KT-2 is compatible with all of Kantech's existing controllers, including the KT-1 and the
KT-400, and the KT-MOD-IO16 expansion module.
• The KT-2 integrates with the following devices:

- DSC PowerSeries Neo and Pro panels over IP

- DSC PowerSeries panels over RS232

18 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Technical support
If you cannot find the answer to your question in this manual, contact your system installer. Your
installer is familiar with your system configuration and may be able to answer your questions.
If you require additional information, email access-support@jci.com during business hours, or go
to: https://www.kantech.com/Support/Contact_Technical_Support_Advanced.aspx.
See the following table for the technical support phone numbers and opening hours in your region.
Table 1: Technical support contact details
North America GMT - 05:00 08:00 to 20:00
USA and Canada Toll free +1 888 222 1560
Direct +1 450 444 2030

Latin America GMT - 03:00 08:00 to 20:00

Argentina, Buenos Aires Direct +54 11 5199 3104
Brazil, Sao Paolo Direct +55 11 3181 7377
Chile, Santiago Direct +56 2 3210 9662
Colombia, Bogota Direct +57 1 344 1422
Colombia, Cali Direct +57 2 891 2476
Colombia, Medellin Direct +57 4 204 0519
Costa Rica, National Direct +506 4 000 1655
Dominican Republic, Santo Direct +1 829 235 3047
Domingo
El Salvador, San Salvador Direct +503 2 136 8703
Guatemala, Guatemala City Direct +502 2 268 1206
Mexico, Mexico City Direct +52 55 8526 1801
Panama, Panama City Direct +507 836 6265
Peru, Lima Direct +51 1 642 9707
Venezuela, Caracas Direct +58 212 720 2340

Asia GMT + 08:00 09:00 to 17:00

Toll free +800 2255 8926
China Direct +86 21 6163 8644
India Direct +91 80 4199 0994
Australia Direct +1 800 580 946
Oceania and New Zealand Direct +64 9942 4004

EMEA GMT + 01:00 08:00 to 18:00

Toll free +800 2255 8926
Direct +31 475 352 722
United Kingdom Direct +44 330 777 1300
Israel Direct +972 77 220 1350

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 19

EMEA GMT + 01:00 08:00 to 18:00
Spain Direct +900 99 31 61
Denmark Direct +45 4494 9001
France Direct +0800 90 79 72
Germany Direct +0800 1806 757
Italy Direct +39 02 3051 0112
Belgium Direct +0800 76 452
Ireland Direct +1800 94 3570
Nordic Countries Direct 04494 9001
Greece Direct 00800 3122 9453
South Africa Direct +27 10 100 3292
Russia Direct +81 0800 2052 1031
Turkey Direct +00800 3192 3007
United Arab Emirates Direct (0)800 0310 7123
Bahrain Direct (0)800 04127
Kuwait Direct (0)22062915
Qatar Direct (00) 800100841
Egypt Direct (0) 8000009697
Lebanon Direct +96 1855 2343 677
Oman Direct (00) 8007 4364
Lebanon Direct 01 426 801, new dial tone and then
dial 8552343677
KSA Direct +96 6800 8500 509

20 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

How to
Use this section to find quick solutions to common tasks in EntraPass.

How to create a backup

1. On the EntraPass server, click the Options tab.
2. Click Backup Scheduler.
3. To choose the type of data that you want to back up, click one of the following tabs: Data,
Archive, In/Out or Video Event.
4. Select the Automatic backup check box.
5. In the Backup folder pane, choose where to save the backup.
6. In the Backup frequency pane, choose how often you want to back up the system.
7. To start a backup immediately, select the Now check box.

Result
For more information about configuring backups, see Backups.

How to create a badge

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click the Users tab.
2. Click Badge.
3. In the Badge window, click the New icon.
4. In the Badge properties window, choose the badge properties and click OK.
5. In the English and French fields, enter a name for the badge.
6. In the lower center of the window, click Click here to modify the badge layout.
7. In the Badge design window, choose the elements that you want to include in the badge.
8. To save your badge design choices, from the menu, click Layout and click Exit.
9. Click Save .
Result
For more information about configuring badges, see Badge Designing.

How to create a card

About this task:
Important: A connection must exist prior to creating a new card in EntraPass.
An access level must exist prior to creating a new card in EntraPass. For more information, see
How to create an access level.

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click the Users tab.

2. Click Card.
3. In the Card window, click the New icon.
4. On the Card number tab, in the Card # 1 field, enter the card number and press Enter.
5. In the Card user name field, enter the card user name.
6. Click the Access level tab.
7. From the Access level list, select an access level.
8. Click Save.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 21

Result
For more information about creating cards, see Cards Definition.

Note: If you activated enhanced user management, see Issuing a new card in enhanced user
management environment.

How to create a schedule

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click the Definition tab.
2. Click Schedule.
3. In the Schedule window, click the New icon.
4. In the English and French fields, enter a name for the new schedule.
5. Click Save.
6. In the Start timeand End time columns, enter start and end times for the schedule.
7. Select the days of the week to apply to the schedule.
8. Select up to a maximum of four holidays to apply to the schedule.

Result
For more information about defining holiday, see Holiday Definition.

How to create a simple report

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click the Report tab.
2. Click Quick Report.
3. In the Quick report window, from the Event list, select which events to include in the report.
4. In the right pane of the window, in Report name field, enter a name for the report.
5. Click Execute.
For more information about creating reports, see Quick Report Definition.

How to create an access level

About this task:
Important: A Connection must exist prior to creating a new access level in EntraPass.

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click the Users tab.

2. Click Access level.
3. In the Access level window, from the Connection list, select a gateway or connection.
4. Click the New icon. The Card number field is enabled.
5. In the English and French fields, enter a name for the access level.
6. Click Save.
For more information about creating cards, see Access Level Definition.

How to print a list of cards

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click the Users tab.
2. Click Card.
3. In the Card window, click the Print icon.
4. From the Card index list, select the card type.

22 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 5. Optional: You can specify a card number range and filters, and select the card fields to be
printed. For more information, see Card Printing.
6. Click Print.
7. From the list, select a printer, and click OK.

How to print a list of access levels

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click the Users tab.
2. Click Access level.
3. In the Access level window, click the Print icon.
4. From the Select Site/Connection/Gateway list, select a site, connection, or gateway.
5. In the Access level pane, select the access levels to print.
6. Click Print.
7. From the list, select a printer, and click OK.

How to print a list of doors

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click the Devices tab and click Door.
2. In the Door window, click the Print icon.
3. From the Site/Connection/Gateway list, select a site, connection, or gateway.
4. In the Door pane, select the doors to print.
5. Click Print.
6. From the list, select a printer, and click OK.

How to set up desktops

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click the Desktops tab.
2. Right click on one of the desktop buttons and click Properties.
3. In the Desktop name field, enter a name for the desktop.
4. Select the desktops to display.
5. To save your changes, click OK and GO.
For more information about configuring desktops, see Desktops.

How to use shortcut keys

About this task:
Use shortcut keys for faster operation. The following table lists the EntraPass shortcut keys.
Table 2: EntraPass shortcut keys
Key Active from location Function
F1 Any menu Help
F2 Any list Extended selection
F3 Any menu Display all open windows
F4 Any menu with a drop-down list Open list
F5 Where available Refresh
F8 Anywhere Global search

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 23

Table 2: EntraPass shortcut keys
Key Active from location Function
F10 Anywhere Log on/Log off
F11 Anywhere Workspace
F12 Anywhere Switch account

How to set up the ioSmart

About this task:
Connect the Kantech ioSmart card reader to a supporting KT-400, KT-1, or KT-2 controller. The
ioSmart supports both Wiegand and RS-485 connections to the controller.
If you connect the ioSmart using a Wiegand connection, use the Express Setup Program to
configure the reader. For more information, see Express setup.
If you connect the ioSmart using an RS-485 connection, complete the following steps:

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click the Devices tab, and click Controller.
2. From the Controller list, select a controller, and click on the ioSmart tab.
3. Click +Add to add an ioSmart reader to the controller.
4. In the Serial number field, enter the ioSmart reader's serial number.
5. From the Door list, select the associated door.
6. If the ioSmart reader includes a keypad, select the Keypad check box.
7. Click Terminals to configure the ioSmart reader's inputs and outputs.
8. In the Setup terminals window, in the I1 and I20 panes, select the terminal functions.

- Disabled
- Single input
- Dual input
- Lock output
- Relay

Note: You can configure I1 and I2O for a maximum of four inputs, using both I1 and I2O
in dual inputs mode, or for two inputs and one output, a lock output or a relay.
9. Click the KT-1/KT-2 or the KT-400 tab, and, from the RS-485 baud rate list, select the
appropriate baud rate for your system.
10. In the Reader template field, click the Three dot icon, and select a reader template.
11. To configure the reader template, on the EntraPass workstation, click the Devices tab, and
click Reader template.

How to configure an ioSmart reader on the operation tab

You can also configure the ioSmart reader on the operation tab.
1. On the EntraPass workstation, click Operation.
2. Click Controller.
3. In the Connection pane, select the appropriate device.
4. In the Controller pane, right-click the controller, and click Request unassigned modules.
5. Right-click a controller and click Unassigned Module. This creates a Controller unassigned
module requested by operator event on the desktop.

24 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 6. Right-click the event to assign the ioSmart reader. The serial number of the ioSmart reader is
automatically filled on the Configuration tab.
7. Optional: To view the status of the configured ioSmart reader, on the EntraPass workstation,
click Operation, and click Door. In the Door pane, right-click the appropriate door.
8. Optional: To view the status of all configured ioSmart readers that are connected to a
controller, on the EntraPass workstation, click Operation, and click Controller.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 25

FAQ
Use this section for quick answers to frequently asked questions about the EntraPass system.

Can I use an input to unlock an elevator floor or a group, and

how long will it remain unlocked?
Yes, an input can be used to unlock a single floor or group. The floor or the group will follow the
unlocked time for the door. The default is 10 seconds, which can be modified.

Is it possible to import access levels?

Access levels cannot be imported.

What happens when we save card pictures on a hard drive

instead of the server database?
A parameter allows you to save cards and visitor card pictures, signatures and background
graphics, to a file instead of directly to the database. We are offering this option for sites that have
large banks of pictures and graphics. The picture, signature and graphic database can currently
contain up to 2 GB of data each. The parameter can be used in instances where a connection may
need more space to save pictures, signatures and graphics.

What is the difference between one time access and

temporary unlock door for the KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-1,
KT-2, and KT-400?
One time access on the KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-1, KT-2, and KT-400
Perform this command using the operation door menu and it will follow the unlock time of the
door. If the door stays open longer than the unlock time, it will generate an event pre alarm door
open too long, and if it is not closed at the end of the open time it will generate door open too long.
Temporary unlock on the KT-100, KT-200, KT-300
Perform this command using the operation door menu and it will follow the unlock time of the
door. If the door stays open longer than the unlock time, it will generate an event pre alarm door
open too long, and if it is not closed at the end of the open time it will generate door open too long.
Temporary unlock on the KT-1, KT-2, and KT-400
Perform this command using the operation door menu. After the door is open, if it goes beyond the
set time for the temporary unlock, it will generate a different event door alarm on relock.

Why do we use card access groups?

Pre-programmed card access groups allow quick selection of access levels for various sites of the
system. A card access group can be recalled during card programming, instead of re-entering the
access levels for each connection. It is only card access group information that is associated with
the card; therefore, you can modify the card access group information without modifying card
access.
Card access groups can be imported from a CSV file.

26 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Introduction
Use this section for an overview of what EntraPass does, its main features, and the applications
associated with it. For global contact details, see Technical support. The main features include the
following:

• Kantech Advantage Program (KAP)

• Kantech IP Link

• KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-1, KT-2, and KT-400 controllers

• Kantech ioSmart card reader

• Kantech Telephone Entry System

• Express setup

• Elevator control capability

• Integrated badging

• Interactive floor plans

• Configurable desktops by operator

• Interfacing with external alarm panels

• In/Out feature

• Visual diagnostics

• Enhanced video integration

• Vocabulary editor

What is EntraPass?
EntraPass is a comprehensive menu-driven access control software package. The access control
system includes components such as door readers, exit detectors, and motion detectors that
are professionally installed and electronically controlled. Use system workstations to perform
operations such as acknowledging alarms, modifying the system database, and receiving event
messages. A supporting advantage of access control is that all system events are carefully archived
and can be retrieved easily for inspection purposes.

Kantech Advantage Program (KAP)

KAP provides 12 months of free upgrades and online training for end users. For more information,
refer to the Application Note, New Optional Kantech Advantage Program, DN1874.

Kantech IP Link
EntraPass is compatible with the Kantech IP Link which provides an Ethernet connection that serves
as a polling device that controls the excess bandwidth by communicating to the system only when
necessary. The Kantech IP Link’s main function is to relay information between the controllers and
the gateway.

KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-1, KT-2, and KT-400 controllers

EntraPass is compatible with Kantech KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-1, KT-2, and KT-400 controllers.
This has an added benefit when upgrading existing sites that require more flexibility and improved

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 27

user interfaces. It also allows installers to select the controller that best suits their customer's
needs and budget.

KT-400 controller
The KT-400 is a four-door Ethernet encrypted controller that you can use as a door controller and as
an IP communication device for a remote site loop.

Expansion modules for the KT-400

Connect expansion modules to the KT-400 controller to add outputs such as relays and open drain
outputs, and inputs. Mixing up input and output expansion modules gives the ability to connect up
to 256 inputs and 256 outputs for each KT-400 controller.

• KT-MOD-REL8: This is an 8-relay expansion module used as general relays or elevator control
outputs. The module supports daisy chaining which can add up to 32 KT-MOD-REL8 modules
for a total of 256 external relays for each KT-400 controller.
• KT-MOD-INP16: This is an input module that adds up to 16 zones to the KT-400 controller.
The module supports daisy chaining; you can interconnect up to 15 KT-MOD-INP16 modules
for a total of 240 external inputs for each KT-400. Adding the 16 onboard inputs of the KT-400
gives a total of 256 inputs for each KT-400.
• KT-MOD-OUT16: This is an open drain to 12 VDC 16-output module. You can use it for
elevator access control (which may require additional hardware). The module supports daisy
chaining; you can interconnect up to 16 KT-MOD-OUT16 modules for a total of 256 external
outputs for each KT-400.

Kantech ioSmart card reader

The Kantech ioSmart card reader provides card access for users through a KT-400, KT-1, or KT-2
door controller. The ioSmart supports the transmission of card numbers using Wiegand protocol.
Supported formats include the standard 32-bit format, the standard 26-bit format, and other
Kantech proprietary formats like eXtended Security Format (XSF) and Smartcard Security Format
(SSF). To provide an easy upgrade path to customers, some imodels support both the smart card
technology and the Kantech ioProx proximity technology.

Kantech Telephone Entry System

Using the Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES), users can grant visitors access to a building
using their own land telephone or cellular telephone. Using an integrated modem, this telephone
line can also serve as a programming link or a monitoring link. The KTES functions as a stand-
alone unit or as a part of a complete access control system such as EntraPass or any access control
system. It can communicate with EntraPass through a multi-site gateway for programming and
monitoring. The KTES installation can also include Kantech KT-100, KT-300, KT-1, KT-2, and KT-400
controllers, and any controller that supports a Wiegand interface port. To simplify the process of
importing and exporting tenant lists, an automated procedure has been implemented to guide you
through the various steps. For information about the installation and the local programming of the
KTES, refer to the KTES Installation Manual, DN1769, and the KTES Programming Manual, DN1770.

Express setup
Installers can use the express setup program to automatically define and configure standard
system components. This saves installation time and prevents setup errors. With express setup, the
system is fully functional and ready to test the hardware and wiring before the installer makes the
customized changes necessary for a particular site.

28 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Elevator control capability
In EntraPass, installers can program up to 64 floors for each elevator cab using expansion devices
such as KT-PC4216, or KT-PC4204 (16 floors maximum) with the KT-300, or using expansion devices
such as KT-MOD-OUT16, KT-MOD-INP16 or KT-MOD-REL8 with the KT-400. In a multi-tenant
building, facility managers can restrict specific floor access to authorized cardholders.

Integrated badging
The integrated badging feature in EntraPass allows users to design and print badges. Pictures and
signatures can be imported or, with the necessary devices, captured and incorporated into cards
for printing badges.

Interactive floor plans

In EntraPass, you can import and display high-resolution graphics that have been created on
CAD-type systems and converted to .jpg or .bmp file types. Using this feature, you can design
a graphic-based system that operators can use with minimal training. You can add interactive
buttons to floor plans to display component status and allow full manual operation of the
component in real-time.

Configurable desktops by operator

In EntraPass, you can assign each operator up to 4 configurable desktops. These desktops display
selected windows featuring message events, user photos, filtered events, high-resolution graphics
and videos, and alarm instructions. Desktops can contain any combination of windows.

Interfacing with external alarm panels

KT-100, KT-300, KT-1, KT-2, and KT-400 controllers allow users to arm, disarm, and postpone the
arming of an external alarm panel . This allows EntraPass to easily integrate with an external alarm
system.

In/Out feature
Operators can use the In/Out feature to print or download time sheets in a CSV format to a payroll
system.

Visual diagnostics
In EntraPass, you can see a visual representation of the system devices, with conditions updated
in real-time, including high resolution floor plans that you can import and display. You can add
interactive system buttons to the graphic to display component statuses in real-time. You can
perform manual operations from the real-time system graphic.

Enhanced video integration

EntraPass integrates with American Dynamics’ Intellex® digital video management system
through the powerful Intellex Application Programming Interface (API) to provide real-time video
monitoring as well as video playback. You can link video to real-time video monitoring as well as
video playback. You can link video to access events and you can record video from one to sixteen
cameras from different Intellex units simultaneously. Presets, sequences, dome control and 1x1,
2x2, 3x3, and 4x4 views are available through the EntraPass software. To view a camera directly
from a floor plan, double-click the camera or dome button. Operators can configure viewing
parameters for digital video applications in EntraPass.

Vocabulary editor
Use the vocabulary editor to translate the EntraPass software into up to 99 languages. By default,
EntraPass is available in English, French, Spanish, German, and Italian.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 29

Installation
Use this section to find out what the minimum software and hardware system requirements are for
optimum EntraPass performance. Follow the recommendations in the Security hardening guide for
best security practices. For instructions on how to install the system, see System installation.

Minimum system requirements

Operating system compatibility
EntraPass is compatible with the following operating systems:

• Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard/Enterprise

• Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard/Datacenter x64
• Windows Server 2016 Standard and Windows Server 2016 Datacenter
• Windows Server 2019 Standard/Datacenter x64
• Windows 7 Pro/Enterprise/Ultimate, all in 32-bit and 64-bit versions
• Windows 10 Enterprise x86/Windows 10 Enterprise x64

Note: Ensure that all operating systems have their latest service packs and updates.
Note: Perform software installations with administrator rights.
Ensure that you install the EntraPass software on a computer that meets the following minimum
requirements:

• Dual Core processor

• 4GB RAM
• PCI Express 8X graphics card with 64 MB memory and DirectX 9.0 support
• 10/100 Base-T network adaptor EntraPass

Additional requirements
For several applications, you can use the following devices:

• Video capture card: to capture user images for card identification

• Sound card: to use warning sounds when an alarm is reported
• Badge printer: to print badges (Badging)
• Signature capture device: to capture signatures (Badging)
• Log printer: (dot-matrix or laser) to print events (messages and alarms)
• Report printer: (laser) to print reports

Security hardening guide

To ensure the highest level of security for EntraPass, use the following setup, configuration, and
installation measures.
CAUTION: Failure to comply with the following security configuration may result in a
weakened operational state with related security vulnerabilities.
To comply with security standards, complete the following steps:
1. Deploy EntraPass on a Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN).

30 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 2. For an encrypted layer of security during data transit, use Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
(HTTPS) instead of HTTP. You must obtain a Secure Socket Layer (SSL) certificate from a
certificate authority (CA), and generate it for the EntraPass web website. For information
about how to implement SSL in internet information services (IIS), refer to the Microsoft
website: https://support.microsoft.com/en-nz/help/299875/how-to-implement-ssl-in-iis
Note: This link is only for reference; contact Microsoft for support on how to implement
SSL.
3. Change default passwords during installation.
4. To isolate EntraPass servers, use a firewall. In the firewall, only open ports that you require to
use EntraPass. Block all other internet traffic.
5. To protect your information, store data backups in a secure location.

System installation
1. Before you begin the installation, close all EntraPass applications.
2. Insert the software USB flash drive into a USB port, or the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If
your computer is configured to autorun, the installation program starts automatically. If the
installation program does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and, in the field, enter
D:\Setup.exe (D: is the CD-ROM drive).
3. From the Choose setup language list, select a language. English is selected by default.
Note: You cannot change the setup (InstallShield) language if you need to perform an
EntraPass update or install system components with a different language. To change the
setup language, you must remove and re-install the software.
The system and database language depends on the language you select when installing
the software. For example, if you select English, it is the system default language at start
up. You can change the system and database language in the EntraPass Workstation.
4. Click OK. The Welcome window displays.

- See the software version you are about to install in the upper left of the window.
- To verify or modify parameters you have set up, navigate between the installation
windows by clicking Back or Next.
- You can cancel the installation at any time.

5. Click Next to continue the installation.

6. In the Setup Start window, select the operations you want to perform. The first set of options
are for new installs and the last option is for updates. During the first installation, you can
select only one of the install options. We suggest that you select the first install option on the
list.

- Install Server, Database and Workstation : Select this option to install the EntraPass
Special Edition system. It is greyed out if the application is already installed on the
machine.
- Update Installed Applications: This option is greyed out if the system has not been
installed previously. To update your EntraPass system, see Updating EntraPass.

7. Click Next.
8. In the Serial Number window, enter the serial number for the EntraPass Special Server or
Software. The information is located in the CD-ROM pocket. Make sure to enter the correct
digits. The Next button activates only if the serial number is valid.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 31

 9. Click Next.
10. Review the End-User License Agreement (EULA). If you understand and agree with the
conditions that are described in the EULA, click I accept, or, to cancel the installation, click I
do not accept.
Note: You cannot complete the installation if you do not accept the EULA.
11. Click Next.
12. In the Customer Information window, enter the user name and the company name.
13. From the User Type list, select one of the following options:

- Anyone who will use this computer

- Only the person currently logged in and registered in the system

14. Click Next.

15. In the Choose Destination Location window, you can keep the selected directory and click
Next, or select another directory.

- To change the directory, click Change. In the Choose Folder window, select the new
installation directory.
- Type the destination directory or double-click the directory structure to find the
destination directory, and click OK. In the Choose Destination Location window, the
path to the directory updates.

16. Click Next.

17. In the Ready to Install the Program window, review the parameters that you set up. If
everything is ready for the installation, click Next, or if you want to change a parameter, click
Back.
18. In the Installation setup window, select the primary and secondary languages, and click OK.
This defines the language that is used to build the database and the languages that are used
to run EntraPass, and click OK.
19. You can select to restart your computer at this time or do it later.
20. Remove the USB flash drive or the CD-ROM.
21. Click Finish to complete the installation.
Note: You must restart the computer and change all default passwords and user names
after the installation.

32 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Getting started
Use this section to learn how to perform Basic functions, including how to start the system and
how to find and manage components. The EntraPass toolbar section provides a table with an
image and description of all the toolbar icons. If you want to minimize the time for defining system
components, go to the Express setup section.

Basic functions
Use this section to find information about the following basic system operations:

• Finding components
• Using the extended selection box
• Selecting components, a specific folder, a connection or a gateway
• Printing lists or reports
• Viewing links between components
• Calling the system tree view

Finding components
About this task:
To search for a component or a card in the system database, use the find a component search
function.
There are two types of find a component window: access one type on any EntraPass window
toolbar, and access the other type on the toolbars on any of the windows that relate to users,
including card, visitor card and daypass.

Figure 1: Find a component windows

The following table lists the find a component search icons and their functions.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 33

Table 3: Search icons
Icon Description
Click the Find icon to search for components or cards.

Click the Details icon to search for the picture that corresponds to the card you
search for.
Click the Index icon to select which criteria you want to search, for example, card
number, email or card information fields.

To search for a component or a card, complete the following steps:

1. On the window toolbar, click the Find icon.

2. In the Find a component window, in the Search field, enter a keyword.
3. To narrow the search results, click one of the following buttons:

- Start with: the list of results includes all of the components that start with the
keyword you enter, in alphabetical order, and includes all other components in the
database.
- Begin with: the list of results includes only components that start with the keyword
you enter.
- Contains: the list of results includes all of the components that contain the keyword
you enter.

4. Optional: When you search for cards, the default search criteria is card user name. To change
the search criteria, on the left of the Search field, click the Index icon and select which criteria
you want to search, for example, card number or email.
5. Optional: When you search for cards, to search for the picture that corresponds to the card
you select, click the Details icon.
6. Click the Find icon.
7. From the list of search results, select the component that you want to display.
8. Click OK. The component that you select displays in the window where you initiate the search.

Using the extended selection box

Use the extended selection box to view and search all of the components of a drop-down list. This
option is available for components such as applications, controllers, and doors. If the option is
available, when you place the cursor over the list, a tooltip displays the following message: Right-
click to load the extended selection box.

1. To view the Extended selection box window, right-click the list.

2. To filter the list, in the Text filter field, enter a search term. In the Filters type area, select
from the following filter options:

- Contains
- Starts with
- Ends with
- Exact words
- Selected

3. Select the Filter on enter or Suppress address check boxes, as required.

34 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 4. In the Columns field, select the number of columns you want the list to display.

Selecting components
About this task: Operators can use the component selection function to select one or more
system components.

1. In the active window, click the Select Components button.

2. Select the options that are displayed or click Select All to select all of the displayed options.
To view components that are not grouped, click Single, or to view existing groups, click
Group.
3. From the list, select the component or group that you want to display.
4. To display the components associated with the selected component, click View.
5. Click Select all to select all of the components, if available, or click Clear all to remove the
check marks from the selected components.
6. Click Cancel to return to the previous window without making any selections or changes.
7. In the Extended selection box window, in the Columns field, select the number of columns
that you require to display all of the components. For more information, see Using the
extended selection box.
8. To apply your changes and return to the previous window, click OK.

Selecting a specific folder

About this task: To locate a specific folder on your hard drive for a backup or other functions,
complete the following steps:

1. In the active window, click the Select button. It is identified by “...”.

2. In the lower part of the window, browse through the Drives list. To ensure that the displayed
list is up-to-date, click Refresh drive.
3. When you locate the folder you require, select it, and click OK.

Selecting a specific connection

About this task: You can associate a specific component with a specific connection. For example,
you can define a specific holiday for a specific connection .

1. In an active window, click the New icon.

2. In the selected connection window, double-click a connection from the displayed list, and click
OK.
3. Enter a meaningful name for the component that you are defining.
4. Follow the steps to complete the task.

Printing a list or report

About this task: Operators can use the print function to complete the following tasks:

• Print a list of cards

• Print event-relay association
• Set up a report for printing

1. In any EntraPass window, click the Print icon.

2. Select the components that you want to include in the list or report. If available, click Select
all to include all the displayed components in the list or report.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 35

 3. Select Print empty fields and Print component reference, if available, to include the titles
of the fields even if they are empty.
4. Click Font, and in the Font window, select the font type, style, size, and color for your list or
report. Click OK.
5. Click Preview to preview the list or report and access the following options:

- Define the printer setup.

- Print a hard copy of the list or report.
- Save the list or report for later use using the Quick Viewer program, or load an
existing report. For more information, see Quick Report Viewer.

6. Click Print.
Note: If there is no printer configured for the computer, an error message appears.

Viewing component links

About this task: Use the view component links feature to view all instances of an item within other
menus. You can view all links an item has with other items. Before you delete a component from
the database, click the View links icon to find out which menus are affected by the deletion.

1. In any EntraPass window, select a component and click the View links icon. All the
components that are associated with the selected component display. For example, on the
EntraPass workstation, click Definition and click Schedule. From the Schedule list, select
Always valid, and click the View links icon. The system displays a list of all the menus in
which this schedule is used.
Note: In the highlighted example, the always valid schedule is used as the REX schedule
in the door definition menu. You can right-click an item to select a category. For
example, if you right-click and select Access levels, only the access levels in which this
schedule is defined are displayed.
2. To view the links of the selected door with other components of the system, select the door
and click the View links icon again. All system components that are associated with the
selected door appear. In this example, the door is used in the administrator access level;
users that are granted this access level are allowed to access the selected door.
3. To print the list of links for the selected component, click Print.

Floating windows
Use the Floating window button to move a window outside of the workstation. The Floating
window button is located to the left of the Minimize button on windows that support the floating
window function. To return the window to the workstation, close it and reopen it. No information
about the window’s position is kept by the system.
Figure 2: Floating window button

Deleting an item
To delete the currently selected record, click the Delete icon. To protect against accidental deletion,
a warning displays and you must confirm that you want to delete the item.

36 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

In the Delete details window, view the estimated server processing time for the deletion operation,
and the number of:

• Deleted components
• Component links deleted
• Child component links deleted

When a component is deleted, all links with other items are deleted. However, the archived records
are kept in the database after an item is deleted.

Viewing component links

• For information about how to view links between components, see Viewing component links.

EntraPass toolbar
EntraPass windows display a selection of the following toolbar icons to provide quick access to
system functions.
Table 4: EntraPass toolbar icons
Icon Description
Click the New icon to add new items, such as connections, schedules and
controllers, to the system database.
Click the Save icon to save all of the information you have entered since the last
save. Information saves directly in the system.
Click the Save As icon to save all of the information of an existing component
under a new name without affecting the original component. If you use this
option while issuing a card, you can create a new card or save under a new card
number without having to modify the information of the original card.
Click the Delete icon to delete the currently selected record. To protect against
accidental deletion, a warning displays and you must confirm that you want
to delete the item. When a component is deleted, all links with other items are
deleted. However, the archived records are kept in the database after an item is
deleted.
Click the Print icon to print information. Depending on which window you are
working in, you can print items such as reports or card lists.
Click the Parent icon to display your search in a hierarchy or, according to the
menu you are in, to divide searches by gateways, connection, and controller.
This icon is useful when the system database increases in size as you can find a
specific item by selecting its parent items.
Click the View links icon to view all instances of an item in other menus. For
more information, see Viewing component links.
Click the Find icon to search for a specific item or component in the system
database. For more information, see Finding components.
Installers and system administrators can click the Express Setup icon to
configure system devices by assigning default settings.
Click the System tree view icon to display the components list in a hierarchy.
You can select or deselect the components displayed in this window.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 37

Table 4: EntraPass toolbar icons
Icon Description
Click the Close button to close a window. If you forget to save information
before closing a window, the system prompts you to confirm the save
operation.
Click the Cancel button to cancel all modifications that were made since the
last time a valid save was performed. The system prompts you to confirm the
operation.
Click the Help icon to view the help content about the EntraPass window you
are in.
Click the OK button to save and accept the modifications, additions or deletions
made to a record in the system database.
Click the Select all icon is to select all of the items or components that are
displayed in a list.
Click the Remove all icon to deselect all of the items or components that were
previously selected in a list.
In several system windows, operators can access graphic and animation icons.
Use these icons to display the status of a component before performing an
operation on that component. In the Status and Operations windows, click the
Enable graphic icon to display the image related to the selected component,
for example, a door, and to display the associated components, for example,
a reader. To display components in real time, use this icon with the Enable
animation icon.
If you click the Enable animation icon to activate it, the Enable graphic icon
is also activated. If you click this icon, the status of the selected component
displays in real time. For example, when you lock a door which was previously
unlocked, the image of the reader is modified; the green dot changes to red.
Click the Audit trail button to open the Audit trail window. View the date and
time of changes, and the operator who made the changes to a component or
a card. This feature is available in any window where you can edit a card or a
component. For more information, see Card audit trail.

Right-click Right-click to access a shortcut menu and select specific commands depending
on which window is open.

Note: Toolbar icons for features that are not activated are automatically hidden from view.

Express setup
Use the express setup to configure system components, such as sites and controllers, and devices
associated with these components, such as doors and inputs. This utility reduces programming to a
minimum, allowing the installer to test the installation and system components.
Use the express setup to configure a connection or to define controllers associated with a
connection. When used to configure a connection, installers can associate the connection with
a gateway. Installers can configure the connection rapidly, giving minimum configuration
information about the controllers connected to it.

38 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

When used to configure a controller, operators can assign default values to a controller and to
its associated devices, such as input, relays, and output. In this case, it is launched from a system
message window or from a controller definition menu.

To start Express Setup, go to: Start > All Programs > EntraPass Special Edition > Express Setup or,
in any appropriate EntraPass window, click the Express Setup icon.
Note: You must log on to the workstation when you start Express Setup. As the program
allows you to modify the system devices configuration, you must authenticate yourself before
proceeding with any modification.

Session Start and End

Starting the EntraPass workstation
An EntraPass workstation is a computer where the EntraPass monitoring application is installed.
Operators use the workstation to access and program the system database and components.
1. From the Start menu or by clicking the desktop icon, start the EntraPass workstation.

2. Click the Login/logout icon.

3. Enter your User name and Password. The default user name is kantech. It is not case
sensitive. If you have not already done so, create a new password. For information about
creating passwords, see Password rules.
Note: If you cannot log on, check if the Caps Lock key on your keyboard is activated.
When you log on successfully, the system menu, toolbar, and status bar are enabled.
By default, operators are not allowed to log on to more than one EntraPass workstation
at a time. If required, an operator can have concurrent logons. For more information,
see Creating or editing an operator. An operator can log on to the EntraPass server and
the EntraPass workstation at the same time.

Accessing Information on the Server Workstation Connection Status

1. Click any tab to access the system toolbar or select a menu item to access the system menu.
In the lower part of the window, colour-coded flags indicate the communication status:
Green, communication is OK; Red: communication problems; Blue: a report is pending.
2. Move the cursor over the coloured rectangles to show details about the network status, the
network database status and the workstation application report status.
3. Move the cursor over the displayed numeric values to show details. It will indicate, in order,
the system date and time, the operator’s name, items in the Alarms desktop, alarms to be
acknowledged, etc.
4. Double-click (or single click, depending on your system settings) any number in the status
bar to display the Status information window.
Note: It is recommended to use the Login/logout button when you exit EntraPass
programs. This ensures that the system databases are shutdown properly.

Modifying your Work Area Properties

1. Right click anywhere in the main window to display the Properties window. It allows you to
customize the window buttons as well as the background colour.
2. To modify the size of the toolbar buttons, select one of the following:

- Small buttons : small buttons are displayed below menu items

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 39

 - Large buttons with images : components buttons are displayed on large buttons
- Large buttons without images : no buttons are displayed

3. In the Miscellaneous section, make the appropriate choice:

- Display menu : only the menu bar appears. No buttons are displayed. Right-click the
work area to modify the properties.
- Display toolbar : the menu bar and the toolbar are displayed.

4. Select a background colour for the work space.

40 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Desktops
Use this section to view the Custom Report Desktopto view pre-defined reports, their generation
status, and when available video recordings.
Use the Graphic desktop to view the exact location of a component on a connection, and obtain
a status update. The Picture Desktop displays the cardholder’s picture with access events
notifications. An operator with the correct permissions can use the Specific Desktop Customizing
feature to transfer or customize a desktop for an operator with read-only permissions.
Follow the steps in the Changing the Display Properties procedure to change the appearance of
your desktop, and follow the steps in Customizing Event Display in the Message Desktops to define
how you want organise the events view.

Alarms Desktop
The Alarms desktop is used to view and to acknowledge alarm events. Alarm events are defined
in the Event Parameter menu (System > Event Parameters). Any event can be defined as an alarm
event. Alarm events require operator acknowledgement and are displayed in the Alarms desktop.
A schedule must be defined for all alarms (System > Event parameters, Alarm settings). When an
alarm is generated during a valid schedule, operators have to acknowledge the alarm. Alarms are
displayed with date and time, alarm description, details, instructions (if defined) and associated
graphic or video clip. New events are added at the bottom of the Alarm desktop unless you have
setup the list to display in descending order (in the Alarm Desktop Properties dialog).

Defining an Alarms Desktop

1. From the Desktop main window, select the desktop in which you want to display alarm
messages, then define the window type. Floating or Desktop.
2. Specify the secondary windows that will be associated with the Alarms desktop:

- Display on new alarm: When you select this check box, the following actions can
occur:

- The Alarms desktop opens automatically, when an alarm occurs.

- An area alarm window opens automatically, when a muster report alarm
occurs, and you select Area Screen.

- Message screen: This window allows operators to view and acknowledge alarms
that have an “acknowledgement schedule” selected in the Event Parameters
definition menu (System > Event Parameters > Alarm settings) or to display the
auto-acknowledge button configured in the Operator dialog (System > Operator >
Privileges).
- Instructions screen: This window displays the instruction that is linked to the event
to be acknowledged (i.e. call the police, send a message to a client application,
etc.). Instructions are defined in the System > Instructions. Then after, they may be
associated with events.
- Graphic screen: This window will display the location of the alarm being reported (if
graphics are defined in the system). For more information on assigning graphic, see
Graphics Definition.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 41

 Note: An Alarm desktop may be defined as a Message window, a graphic window
and an Instruction window. These features may apply to a single desktop. When
you select a desktop defined with these three features, three windows are
displayed simultaneously. For a better display, you may need to re-size and to
position the windows.
- Area Screen: Select this check box to populate an area alarm window when a muster
report alarm occurs. All the cards in the area of the muster report populate the alarm
card list.

Viewing System Alarm Messages

1. Select the Alarm desktop. Alarm events are displayed according to the criteria selected in the
Sorted by field.
Note: Alarm messages are archived and can be retrieved at all times.
2. You can double-click the log area (middle of the window) to add a comment. The Add a
comment window opens and enables you to enter text data. Once you have finished and
clicked the OK button to close the window, the alarm event will be preceded by a + sign,
indicating that an annotation has been added to the alarm event.
Note: Acknowledgements and flags will not be identified by a “ + ” sign.
3. You may change/define the sorting order (Sorted by drop-down list):

- Trigger destination: Alarms are sorted by their order of arrival. This the default
sequence. The window scrolls to the end each time a new alarm is displayed.
- State: Alarms are sorted according to their status (acknowledged, to be
acknowledged or flagged). When you use this option, you interrupt the normal
scrolling of events. Select “sequence” to go back to the default display.
- Date and time: Alarms are sorted according to the date and time of their arrival.
- Event: The Event messages column is sorted in alphabetical order, grouping identical
events. For example, all Input in alarm events are grouped.
- Priority: Events are sorted by priority (as defined in Event parameter).

4. You may right-click anywhere in the window to enable the Properties window from which
you can enable alarm status buttons:

- Red: To be acknowledged or suspended. If suspended, the suspension delay is

displayed. When the delay expires, the operator is required to acknowledge again. If
the delay is not expired but the operator wishes to acknowledge a suspended alarm,
he/she has to click on the delay. The delay will be reset to zero.
- Green: Acknowledged.
- Yellow: Flagged.
- Black: Deleted. To view alarms that have been manually deleted, select the View
deleted logs from the Properties .
- Blue: Manual log.

5. Select the Manual / Automatic buttons to toggle the acknowledgement method (automatic or
manual). Only operators who are assigned this feature in the Operator Definition menu can
use this option. For more information, see Operators Definition.
Note: The Manual / Automatic acknowledgement option is only available through the
Alarms Desktop. When the operator logs out, it will return to “manual” by default.

42 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 6. Right click an alarm message to perform additional tasks on alarm events:

- Acknowledge: When selected, a green point is inserted beside an alarm event to

indicate that the event was acknowledged.
- Re-visit: When selected, the system flags the selected event. A yellow indicator is
inserted beside flagged events.
- Clear re-visit: Remove the flag for the selected event.
- Add comment: Allows operators to enter comments concerning the selected event.
The added comments are displayed in the bottom part of the alarm window. A blue
+ sign beside an alarm event indicates that a comment was added to the alarm event
(visible when buttons are enabled: right-click an alarm event > Properties > Show
buttons).
- Print event and comment: When selected, the system prints the alarm event and the
associated comment.
- Delete event: When selected, the selected alarm event is marked for deletion (the
indicator becomes “black” to indicate that the event has been marked for deletion).
To view the events marked for deletion, before you actually purge them, right click
anywhere in the window and select Properties then select View deleted logs.

Displaying Alarm Desktops Automatically

About this task:
EntraPass enables users to display graphics automatically - from any desktop - as soon as an alarm
occurs. This feature enables operators on duty to automatically view new alarms without having
to open the alarm desktop and secondary windows associated with it. If Display on new alarm
is checked the alarm desktop (and its secondary windows) will be displayed as soon as an alarm
occurs regardless of the active window.

1. Define a desktop and customize it as an alarm desktop: For this, you have to check the
items of the Alarms desktop section.
2. Check the Display on new alarm option so that operators can automatically view new alarms
without having to open the alarm desktop and secondary windows associated with it.
Note: If this option is selected when defining a Filtered message desktop for instance
and if the desktop button is selected, the filtered message desktop will be displayed (the
background colour of its button turns blue), but the windows below the Display on new
alarm section will not be displayed; they are only displayed when a new alarm occurs.
If those windows are displayed (on new alarm), clicking the “X” in the top right hand
corner of one of them will close all the open windows. If Display on new alarm is not
checked, the alarm desktop and all its secondary windows will be displayed on call (that
is, when the alarm desktop is selected).
3. Click OK and Go for your configuration to take effect immediately.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 43

 Note: When you define a desktop as an alarm desktop to be displayed on new alarm,
it is recommended to reopen the Automatic Alarm Display desktop, to position its
windows the way you want them to appear, then to click OK and GO again. This way, it
will appear exactly as you have defined it.

Acknowledging Alarms/Events
Usually, operators have to acknowledge receipt of an alarm condition (event—such as intrusion,
input in alarm, etc.) by responding in ways such as clicking the acknowledgement button. In
EntraPass, operators acknowledge alarm messages from an alarm warning box or from the Alarms
desktop window.
Acknowledgement options are setup in the EntraPass application definition (Devices > EntraPass
application > Alarm tab, Acknowledgement parameters). Events that require operator
acknowledgement are defined in the System > Event Parameters.
Note: If the component that is in alarm is assigned to a video view, the video view or video
recording is automatically displayed when an alarm occurs.

Automatic Acknowledgement
Alarms can be automatically acknowledged without operator intervention. This option is enabled in
the Operator definition menu (System > Operators > Privileges, Auto acknowledge).
Note: In order for the Manual button to display on the Alarm Desktop window, it is important
to close the EntraPass session and reopen it after you have selected the Auto acknowledge
option.
Only operators granted the appropriate access privilege should be using this option. If the
Automatic acknowledge feature is used, the alarm message box is not displayed; therefore,
it will not be possible to suspend alarms. If this option is enabled in the Operator definition
menu, the Manual button is added to the Alarms desktop. This button toggles between
Manual and Automatic acknowledgement.

To Acknowledge an Alarm Message

1. When the Acknowledgement required message box appears, take one of the following
actions:

- Click the Acknowledge button to acknowledge the displayed alarm event. The red
status button turns green once an alarm is acknowledged.
- Click the Suspend button to suspend alarms while doing other operations in the
system. The alarm will be suspended for the delay time specified in the EntraPass
application definition menu. Once the suspended alarm delay time expires, the
system prompts the operator to acknowledge the alarm.
- Click the Re-visit button if you want to acknowledge an alarm message, and if you
want to identify it for future reference. A flagged alarm is identified by a yellow
button.
- Click theMutebutton (speaker button) if you want to stop the alarm sound.
Note: The Acknowledgement required message box will be presented in a
format without the Instructions window if there are no instructions associated
with the alarm message.
If the component that is in alarm is assigned to a video view, the video view or
video recording is automatically displayed when an alarm occurs.

44 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

To Acknowledge Alarms from the Alarms Desktop
About this task:
Each workstation has its own alarm desktop which displays alarm events received from the server.
When a workstation starts up, alarms displayed on the desktop will have a “to be updated” status
(a blue button in the second column). Once communication is established with the server, all
events will be updated on the alarm desktop. The blue button will then be replaced by a red button
(alarm), a yellow button (flag) or a green button (acknowledged).

Note: This process will occur each time a workstation have a communication failure with the
server.

1. Select the alarm event you want to acknowledge (one that has been flagged, for instance),
right-click to enable a shortcut menu.
2. Select Acknowledge from the sub-menu. The status indicator becomes green.
Note: To tag an alarm message for specific purposes, select the alarm event you want
to identify; right-click and select Flag from the sub-menu. You can also click an alarm
message until the colour of its status indicator changes to the desired colour.

Mandatory Alarm Comment

If an instruction with the Mandatory alarm comment checkbox selected in System / Instruction
is assigned to an alarm, the operator will have to add a comment in order to mark the alarm as
“acknowledged” (see Instructions Definition for more details).
Note: The alarm sound will stop while a comment is entered by the user.

Changing desktop events

To change which events are displayed in the alarm message list, right-click on the alarm message
list and select Desktop Events. Select an event group to display the events from that group. Select
none to block all messages.
See the following list of options available on this menu:

• Select Use message desktop selection to display the same events defined for the selected
desktop.
• Select View Operator to view the desktop event selection for the logged on operator read-
only mode.
• Select Edit Operator to modify the desktop event selection for the logged on operator.
• Select Assign Operator to assign one or more desktop events to another operator.
Note: Changes made to desktop events only affect new events. Existing events on the
list will remain unchanged.

Changing the Display Properties

1. From the Desktop window, right-click anywhere in the window.
2. Select Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. From the Properties window that appears, select the display options: you may change the
default size of buttons, the default background colour, etc.

- Small buttons : If this option is selected, small components’ buttons are displayed
with no descriptive text. This option can be appropriate for operators who are familiar
with EntraPass buttons and do not need an additional description.
- Large buttons with images : Icons are displayed with their description.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 45

 - Large buttons without images : Large buttons are displayed with no description.
- Display menu : check this option to view the system menu.
- Display toolbar : check this option to view the toolbar for system menus.
- Change system font : click this button to change the font for all the user interface.

Custom Report Desktop

The Custom Report desktop allows operators to display events that come from pre-defined
reports and view the report generation state. Security levels will determine which custom reports
are available to each operator. The Custom Report message list operates the same way as all
message lists in EntraPass except that it has an extra combo box that allows operators to select a
pre-defined custom report.
Note: Custom reports are defined under Report > Custom Report.
Security levels for reports are defined under System > Security Level under the Report tab.

Configuring a Custom Reports Desktop

1. From the Desktop main window, click the desktop button you want to configure as a Custom
Reports Desktop.
2. Assign a meaningful name to the Custom Reports Desktop, then define the desktop type
(Message window, Picture window or both).
3. Select the sort criteria you want to use to display historical data from the drop-down list (
Date and Time , Event , or Message Type ).

4. You can enter a text string that will be used for searching specific archived messages (when
applicable).
5. In the combo-box, select the custom report you want to generate. The list of available
reports corresponds to your security level.
6. After selecting the report, a Date and Time window will pop up requesting a reporting date
and time period.
7. Enter Start and End date and time or click the calendar button to open the calendar and
select the start and end dates, and then type in the start and end times.
8. Check the Clear Screen Before Process Request box in order to clear the Custom Report
message list of the previous search results.
9. Click OK . The status indicator light located at the bottom left of the screen will change from
green to blue to indicate a custom report is being generated. It will turn green again when
the data transfer will be completed and the data will be displayed according to the criteria
you have selected.

To Create and Edit Custom Reports from a Desktop

• When your security level allows you to create new reports, you can access the Custom
Report dialog from the New Report command in the Custom Report Desktop pop up menu.
For more information on Custom Reports, see Custom Reports Definition.
• When your security level allows you to edit existing reports, you can access the Custom
Report dialog from the Edit Report command in the Custom Report Desktop pop up menu.
For more information on Custom Reports, see Custom Reports Definition.

To Display Custom Report State in Real-time

About this task:

46 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

This feature allows you to view the progress of report generation for a specific report in the
Custom Report Desktop List.

1. Right-click an entry in the Custom Report Desktop window. A contextual menu will pop up.
2. Select Report State . The Report State dialog will open displaying report generation
information.
3. When the report is finally generated in the Desktop window, the information in the Report
State dialog will disappear. Click Close .

Comment Entry and Display

Also, a comment can be added to any type of event. In the fifth column from the left, a ‘-‘ sign will
indicate that a comment has been added by the system while a ‘+’ sign will indicate a manually
added comment. From the Custom Report Desktop, you can display the comments associated to
each event.
To view associated comments, select the event and use a right-click to display the contextual menu,
then select View Comment. A comment can also be added using Add a New Comment.

Playing archived video recordings from a Desktop Message list

1. Select the video you would like to play and right-click to access the contextual menu.
2. Once you click on it, the Video Playback window will open and start playing the selected
recording.

Customizing Event Display in the Message Desktops

1. From the displayed shortcut menu (Message desktop > Right-click a message), select
Properties.
2. From the Properties window, select the appropriate display options.

- Multi-line: Usually, events are displayed on a single line. You can increase the line
spacing between events by checking the appropriate option (1, 2, 3 or 4 lines).
- Show columns: You can choose to display different types of buttons beside each
event.

- Message type: When you select this option, the system inserts an button
next to events indicating the type of event. For example, if the event is a
“door forced open” an button representing a door is displayed (a hand
represents a manual operation, a diskette represents the operation that
modified the database, etc.). Access events are represented by the login /
logout buttons.
- Picture: When you select this option, the system inserts a card button next to
events containing cardholder pictures.
- Fail-soft messages: When you select this option, the system displays a plus
(+) sign next to the events that occurred when controllers were off-line.
- Video: Check this option if you want the selected desktop to display video
data from the video server connected to your system.
- Display account: On the bottom left, check Display account. The desktops
window now displays the Account column with the corresponding event for
each account.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 47

 - The Miscellaneous section allows you to enable additional options:

- Keep card picture: When selected, the system keeps the latest card picture (if
the Picture window option is selected) until another event containing a card
occurs.
- Display toolbar: Displays / hides the toolbar on the top of the Message
desktop.
- Manual properties save only: When you select this option, you have to click
the Save button (once selected, the button is disabled). The system saves all
the settings defined in the Properties window as well as the position of the
window within the Messages Desktop.
- Display selected messages (full): When you select this option, a smaller
window is added at the bottom portion of the Message window. It displays
the selected event with its full description. This feature is very useful when
your Message window is too small to display the entire description of an
event.
- Display events in bold: Select this option to increase the legibility of text
event messages displayed in EntraPass desktops (Message list, Filtered
messages and Alarm desktops). Moreover, if the colour selected for an event
message is the same colour as the background colour, the event message will
be displayed in black bold so that it can always stand out (this option is not
available for Archived Messages list).
- Last Message on Top: By default, event messages are displayed in ascending
order of occurrence, with the area at the bottom of the screen reserved for
the highlighted event. You can select to display the events in descending
order, with the highlighted event showing above the list of event messages.
- Auto-scroll delay (mm:ss): Will automatically start scrolling the message list
after a pre-set delay when the operator selects an item in the list. By default,
this option is turned on with a preset delay. You can select to turn this option
off which means that the operator will have to click the Restart Scroll button
in the Messages list (this option is not available for Archived Messages list).

- Message background colour: Allows the operator to modify the background colour
of the message window.
- Display event colour in separate column: Event colours can now be displayed in a
separate column. Text and message background colours can also be selected.
Note: To change the font colour of system messages: System > Event
parameters.

Filtered Messages Desktop

The Filtered Messages desktop allows operators to display specific events. For example, you can
create filters to display events that are related to a specific controller and from a particular gateway
of the system. If this is the case, those events will be displayed in the Filtered Message desktop.
Filtered messages are defined in the Message filters menu: System > Message filters.
Note: When you use filters, the system retrieves events that are already displayed in the
Messages desktop and filters these events according to the selected filters.

48 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Configuring a Filtered Messages Desktop
1. From the Desktop main window, select the desktop you want to configure as a Filtered
messages desktop .
2. Assign a meaningful name to the Filtered message desktop ; then define the desktop type
(Message window, Picture window or both).
3. You can change the Text filter, to display specific events. For information about the Filtered
messages desktop, see Message List Desktop.

Graphic desktop
Use the Graphic desktop to display the graphical location of an alarm occurrence. To enable this
function, you must define the graphic in the system. For more information, see Graphics Definition.
A graphic corresponds to a secured area on the system where the following components are
located on a connection: EntraPass application, controllers, inputs, and relays. With a graphic,
operators can view the exact location of a component installed on a connection, or the status of
components and devices. For example, area groups, areas, doors, contacts, motion detectors,
and controllers, assigned to the graphic. If you have defined muster reporting, and an emergency
occurs, graphic icons indicate when all employees have vacated the area. Operators can perform
manual operations directly from the displayed component, for example, to lock or unlock a door. To
define interactive floor plans, see Graphics Definition.
The following table describes the icons that display on the graphic.

Viewing Graphics in the Graphic Desktop

1. Select the desktop button you want to assign to graphic, name the desktop (Graphics, for
example), then define the window type ( Floating or Desktop ).
2. Click OK and Go to display the Graphics desktop.
3. Right-click anywhere in the Graphic desktop then, from the shortcut menu, select the graphic
you want to display.
Note: If the window is smaller than the graphic size, you can click-hold-and-drag the
graphic to move it around within the Graphic window.
4. To use additional functions, right-click anywhere in the graphic for the shortcut menu:

- To adjust the display size of the selected graphic, click Fit to screen, Design size or
Picture size.
- For the system to display a message indicating the cause of the communication loss
in case of communication failure, select Auto result. If Auto result is not selected,
operators will have to manually request the results for the component by using Show
result .

5. Right-click a component in abnormal condition to enable a sub menu.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 49

 Note: Components in alarms are represented by their animated buttons. If you select an
animated button and view its parent components you can learn more about the “alarm
condition”.
6. Select Full status from the shortcut menu to display the error list related to one or all the
components in alarm.
7. Select Comment to display comments already assigned to the device, for more information
see the Comment Field.
8. Select the Double click menu item to allow operators to modify the status of a component in
alarm from the Graphic desktop. For example, if the displayed component is a door and if the
Double-click menu item was set to Unlock, an operator can manually open the door from
the Graphic desktop.
Note: When you modify the Double-click feature using the Graphic desktop, the system
does not save the modifications. Modify the default Double-click feature using the
graphic definition (Definition > Graphics, Design window, right-click a component >
Default double-click menu item). For more information on how to create graphics, and
on how to assign components to graphics, see Graphics Definition.

Message List Desktop

By default, the first desktop is defined as the Messages List desktop. It displays all system events.
Events are displayed with their button, date and time, description, system components involved in

50 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

the event such as controllers, cardholder pictures (if defined), etc. When a new event is displayed,
the window scrolls up. The newest events are added at the bottom of the window.

Viewing and Sorting System Events

About this task:
By default, the first desktop is dedicated to displaying system events. When you select an event
from the list, you interrupt the incoming sequence (the green status indicator located at the bottom
left part of the desktop turns red when scrolling is interrupted). By default, the scrolling will restart
automatically after a pre-set period of time, unless the auto-scroll parameter was disabled, In that
case, to restore the normal scrolling, click the Restart Scroll button.

Note: If you configure a desktop as a message screen and a picture screen, two windows are
displayed simultaneously when you select the desktop.

1. Select the first desktop. By default, all system events are displayed in ascending order with an
area at the bottom of the screen that displays the selected event in the list.
Note: You may change the message colour: System > Events parameters. You may
also change the events display order; see Customizing Event Display in the Message
Desktops.
2. From the Message list screen, you may change the sorting criterion by clicking on the
Sequence drop-down list. You may choose to sort by:

- Sequence : Events are sorted according to the normal sequence (default). New events
are added at the bottom of the window (This option is not available for Archived
Messages list).
- Date and time : This sort order interrupts the normal scrolling of events. This feature
is useful when you want to know when an event was generated. This time may be
different from the “normal sequence” for dial-up sites for instance or after a power
failure.
- Event : When selected, the system sorts the Event message column in alphabetical
order, grouping identical events. For example, all Input in alarm events are grouped
together in alphabetical order.
- Message type : When selected, the system sorts the Event message column in
alphabetical order, grouping similar events. For example, all Connections events are
grouped together in alphabetical order.
Note: To go back to the default display, select Sequence from the Sequence
drop-down list.

3. Clicking the Text filter button (top left of the window ) will open the Text filter dialog that
allows to enter a key word to display all the events that contain that keyword in the Message
list. In order to avoid delays, select the Suspend Refresh checkbox. This way, the Desktop
Message List will not use the Text Filter field while events are displayed live. To close the
Text filter dialog box, click Cancel or the Windows closing button (X).
4. To return to the normal display of events in the Messages list screen, click the Text filter
button.

Customizing Event Display in the Message Desktops

1. From the displayed shortcut menu (Message desktop > Right-click a message), select
Properties.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 51

 2. From the Properties window, select the appropriate display options.

- Multi-line: Usually, events are displayed on a single line. You can increase the line
spacing between events by checking the appropriate option (1, 2, 3 or 4 lines).
- Show buttons: You can choose to display different types of buttons beside each
event.

- Message type: When you select this option, the system inserts an button
next to events indicating the type of event. For example, if the event is a
“door forced open” an button representing a door is displayed (a hand
represents a manual operation, a diskette represents the operation that
modified the database, etc.). Access events are represented by the login /
logout buttons.
- Picture: When you select this option, the system inserts a card button next to
events containing cardholder pictures.
- Fail-soft messages: When you select this option, the system displays a plus
(+) sign next to the events that occurred when controllers were off-line.
- Video: Check this option if you want the selected desktop to display video
data from the video server connected to your system.

- The Miscellaneous section allows you to enable additional options:

- Keep card picture: When selected, the system keeps the latest card picture (if
the Picture window option is selected) until another event containing a card
occurs.
- Display toolbar: Displays / hides the toolbar on the top of the Message
desktop.
- Manual properties save only: When you select this option, you have to click
the Save button (once selected, the button is disabled). The system saves all
the settings defined in the Properties window as well as the position of the
window within the Messages desktop.
- Display selected messages (full): When you select this option, a smaller
window is added at the bottom portion of the Message window. It displays
the selected event with its full description. This feature is very useful when
your Message window is too small to display the entire description of an
event.
- Display events in bold: Select this option to increase the legibility of text
event messages displayed in EntraPass desktops (Message list, Filtered
messages and Alarm desktops). Moreover, if the colour selected for an event
message is the same colour as the background colour, the event message will
be displayed in black bold so that it can always stand out (this option is not
available for Archived Messages list).
- Last Message on Top: By default, event messages are displayed in ascending
order of occurrence, with the area at the bottom of the screen reserved for
the highlighted event. You can select to display the events in descending
order, with the highlighted event showing above the list of event messages.

52 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Auto-scroll delay (mm:ss): Will automatically start scrolling the message list
after a pre-set delay when the operator selects an item in the list. By default,
this option is turned on with a preset delay. You can select to turn this option
off which means that the operator will have to click the Restart Scroll button
in the Messages list (this option is not available for Archived Messages list).

- Message background colour: Allows the operator to modify the background colour
of the message window.
Note: To change the font colour of system messages: System > Event
parameters.

Performing Tasks on System Messages

About this task:
EntraPass enables you to perform various tasks on system events. These include:

• Deleting messages
• Viewing card information
• Validating card status and card transaction
• Modifying the desktop properties (such as display options), etc.
• Play, edit and export video recordings

1. From the Message desktop, right-click an event to enable a shortcut menu.

2. Do one of the following:

- New message filter: This option displays the Message filter dialog to define new
message filters (see Message Filters Definition for more information).
- Edit message filter: This option displays the Message filter dialog to edit an existing
message filter (see Message Filters Definition for more information).
- Delete all: This option allows an operator to delete all the events displayed.
- Card : This menu items offers two choices: View card transactions and Search
card. Select View card transactions to display all access information related to the
cardholder who has triggered the access event. The Search card shortcut allows you
to browse the card database and to display information about all the card numbers
associated with this specific card user name from the View card information window.
From this window, operators can perform a variety of tasks including viewing and
validating information contained on a card, such as the card number, cardholder
name, card state (valid or invalid), card type, etc. They can also select a card and view
its transactions or view and validate a card access. For details about validating card
holders’ access and last transactions, see Validating Card Access.

Result

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 53

Also, in order to reduce the quantity of data retrieved, a filter can be added to the user name or to
the card information fields (1 to 10) when searching for a card. Enter a name for the filter and click
the button on the left side of the field to display the contextual menu.

• Video recording: This menu items offers two options: Play and Play/Edit/Export. Selecting
Play allows users to play the video event in the Playback window, offering options to snap
(copy) it and save it for future use. Selecting Play/Edit/Export offers users features similar to
the ones in the Video Event list. Operators can then display details about the event (camera,
server, comment field) and camera information, etc. The video event can also be played and
exported.
Note: If camera buttons are not displayed, simply right-click a video event message,
select properties from the shortcut menu, and check Video in the Show buttons section
of the Properties.
• View parent: Displays the parent of each component related to the selected event.
• Edit: This feature offers you the ability to edit each component associated with the selected
event. If Edit is selected, a shortcut menu displays components associated with the selected
event. In this example, the connection definition modified event involves the EntraPass
application, the operator who was on duty when the event was generated and the connection
related to the event. It is now possible to edit any of the three components by selecting it
from the shortcut menu. If the selected event is an access event and if the card that triggered
the event has already been registered in the system, it will be possible to edit the card.
However, if the card is associated with an Access denied - card unknown event, the card will
be created and registered in the system.
• Audit, select one of the following options:

- Application: select this to open the Audit window to view who make changes, and
when the changes occurred on the component.
- Operator: select this to open an audit window to view the operator component tht
generated the message event. For example, any change under the function system for
operator, name, security level, and workspace. In the absence of an modification to
the selected compoenent, the otpion is not available.
- Card: select this to open the Audit window to view who made changes, and when the
changes occurred on the card.

• Send to back: This option only works when the window type is set to floating. It sends the
active window behind the main application window. To bring back to front, right click the
desktop button, then select Bring to front.
• Help: Displays the EntraPass Online Help.
• Properties: This menu item enables users to modify the display properties for the selected
desktop.

Add, Modify or Delete Tagged Events

You can see, in the desktop message list, if a component was newly created, modified or deleted.
Database events are precessed by the following signs:
• + (New)
• = (Modified)
• - (Deleted)

54 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Changing Desktop Events
To change which events are displayed in the alarm message list, right-click on the message list and
select Desktop Events. Select the an event group to display the events from that group. For more
information about event groups see here. Select none to block all messages.
Other options available in this menu are as follows:

• Select View Operator to view the desktop event selection for the logged on operator in read-
only mode.
• Select Edit Operator to modify the desktop event selection for the logged on operator.
• Select Assign Operator to assign one or more desktop events to another operator.
Note: Changes made to desktop events only affect new events. Existing events on the
list will remain unchanged.

Picture Desktop
If you selected Picture screen when defining the Message desktop, it will be displayed with the
Picture window. Access events are displayed with the card holder’s picture if you have set the
appropriate display option in the Message filter definition (System > Message filters). For details,
see Message Filters Definition.

Modifying Pictures Display Options

1. From the Message list and Picture , select an access event, then right-click the card holder’s
picture.
Note: The Send to back option only works when the window type is set to floating. It
sends the active window (Picture window) behind the Message desktop main window. To
bring it back to front, right click the Message desktop button, then select Bring to front
from the shortcut menu. From the shortcut menu, select Properties.
2. From the Aspect drop-down list, select the display size for the picture:

- Design size : The card holder’s picture will be displayed with its original size.
- Stretch : This option stretches the picture to the window size without maintaining
proportions. The picture may appear distorted.
- Stretch ratio : This option stretches the picture to the window size while maintaining
proportions.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 55

 3. The Display multiple pictures option allows you to show up to four photos, depending on
your needs. When selected, you can keep the default value “ Message ” or choose a specific
door for each of the four photos.
4. Check Apply all the following items for all cells to assign the parameters to all cells.
5. Select the information you want to see displayed with the card holder’s picture:

- Door : The door where the card was presented will be displayed above of the card
holder’s picture .
- Event : The event message will be displayed .
- User information : The User information field will be displayed above the picture.
- Comment : If this option is selected, a comment field appears below the card holder’s
picture. The comment entered when defining the card appears in this field.
Note: If a door is associated to a cell (photo) and the Door option is selected (
Display selected fields ), the name of that door will be displayed in blue instead
of the usual black colour.

Specific Desktop Customizing

EntraPass enables operators with appropriate permission to customize their desktop. Moreover,
operators with full access permissions can permit operators with read-only permission to
customize their desktop. They can also customize a specific desktop and transfer this customized
desktop to other operators using the Assign desktop feature. The following sections explain how
to customize a desktop:

• Customizing a desktop by a full access operator

• Customizing a desktop for a read-only operator
• Transferring a customized desktop

Customizing a Desktop for a “Full Access” Operator

About this task:
Operators with full access permission have the ability to customize their desktops. To grant full
access to an operator (System > Security Level):

1. Select the desktop you want to customize, right-click and select Properties in the menu to
open the Desktop properties dialog.
2. From the Desktop name field, assign a meaningful name to the desktop you are configuring.
3. Select the window type:

- Floating window : A floating window can be re-sized and positioned anywhere in the
work area screen. For example, you can choose to send it to the back or to bring it to
the front. If a floating window was sent to the back, you may bring it to the front by
right-clicking the desktop button, then selecting the Bring to front menu item.
- Desktop window : A desktop window is trapped within the work area. It is not
possible to send the window in the background. It always remains within the main
work area.

4. To save your changes:

- Click OK : If selected, you just save your the changes, the window is not displayed.

56 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Click OK & GO : If selected, this function saves your changes and displays the window
you have just configured.
Note: When opening a desktop window for the first time, you may need to re-size
it in order to view the information correctly. To do so, point to the frame border
you want to change; when the pointer turns into a double-headed arrow, drag
the border to exact size. You may then position the window in the work area to
the desired position.

Customizing a Desktop for a “Read-Only” Operator

About this task:
The security manager or an operator with the appropriate security level can give permission to
operators who do not have the appropriate permission to customize their desktop during a session.

1. Log in, using the user name and password of the operator with ‘full access’ security level.
2. Select the desktop you want to customize, right-click and select Properties in the menu to
open the Desktop properties dialog.
Note: A Permit button appears when the operator who is logged on has ‘read-only’
access permission. The permission acquired during this session will be valid until the
operator logs out. Click the Permit button. The operator login window appears. Enter
your user name and password, and click, OK. The temporary permission will be granted.

Transferring a Customized Desktop

About this task:
Another possibility available to the Security Manager (or to the operator with the appropriate
security level) is to customize a desktop, and then to assign the settings to other operators who
may not have the appropriate security level to modify their desktop settings.

1. Right-click the desktop you want to assign the settings.

2. Select the Assign (desktop) option from the shortcut menu.
3. From the displayed window, select the operators to whom you wish to assign the desktop
properties. You must select the appropriate check box. You can select operators one by one,
or you can use the Select all button.

Desktops Colors
About this task:
Event colors can now be displayed in a separate column. Text and message background colors can
also be selected.

1. From any message desktop, right-click on a message and select Properties .

2. Click on the drop down list and choose a color for the background.
3. Select Display event color in separate column if needed.
4. Click on the second drop down and choose a colour for the message text.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 57

Status
Use this section to view the status of applications and components in text and graphical
representations from different system perspectives.
You can use the Text Status to view the status of a particular component in text form. To view how
many sites or gateways are in a “not normal” state, use the Numerical Status. You can hover over a
component of a door controller in the graphic status to view its status in the component list.
You can use the Database status to view all applications defined in the gateway and controller
sites, and view the communication status of each application. The Video server status lists all the
parameters of the video servers connected to the Video Vault. To view detailed information on the
server including system information, system global memory, system process memory and system
disk space, use . To view how many operators are logged in to the system for each application, use .

Database status
About this task:
This window displays the status of the components within the database while browsing the
database structure. The system displays items including all applications (connected or not), the
gateway, and controller sites.
You can perform manual operations directly from the window and edit components to modify their
configuration.

1. Click the Status tab and click the Database button.

Note: The button identifies the type of component.
2. In the Database window, select the application you want to view the database. In the lower
pane, the status and full name of the selected component display.
3. Select a component to modify its definition. For example, if you select a door, right-click the
door to display a shortcut menu.
4. Select a command in the shortcut menu.

Note: The command list varies according to the selected component.

5. The shortcut menu offers the following options:

- Full expand: Click to expand the tree status and view all components. Only
applications that are connected to the server display a + sign.
- Full collapse: Click to collapse the tree status and hide all components of the root
component.
- Edit: When you select an assigned component (input) and click edit, the system edits
the definition window so that you can modify its definition and when finished, return
to the window you edited the component from.

58 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Limited display / No limited display: When you click on a physical component, the
bottom part of the window displays its status.If you select Limited display, the system
erases the previous status and displays the status of the next selected component.
Note: The icons on the left side of the components indicate the component type.

Graphic Status
This feature is used to display a graphical status of a door controller, including the status of all its
components (outputs, inputs, power supply status, communication status, etc.) represented by
coloured shapes (circle, square, etc.).

• An ellipse shape represents the controller

• A circle represents a door
• A square represents a relay
• A rectangle represents an input. Rectangles may be horizontal (KT-200 and KT-300) or vertical
(KT-100).

Viewing a Controller Status

About this task:

1. From the Gateway drop-down list, select the gateway on which the controller to display is
located. You may select “All gateways” to display all the controllers in the list.
2. From the Controller drop-down list, select the controller for which you want to display the
status.
Example with a KT-200 Controller

Example with a KT-400 Controller

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 59

 Note: The displayed graphic depends on the type of the controller selected.
3. To find out which items are represented by a coloured shape, move the mouse over a
coloured shape. The item highlighted on the right-hand (in the list) identifies the component.
4. Select a controller from the Controller list drop-down list (right side of the window), double-
click the item on which status is required.

- Red —The component is “Supervised” and “in a trouble state”.

- Green —The component is “Supervised” and “in normal condition”.
- Yellow —The component is “Not Supervised” and “in a trouble state”.
- Gray —The component is “Not Supervised” and “in normal condition”.
- Blue —The relay is activated (by an event or an operator).
Note: If there’s more than one controller connection per gateway, the numbers
between parentheses (xx) indicates the controller number and the following
numbers (xx) indicate the component number.

Numerical Status
About this task:
This menu allows an operator to view the number of components in a “not normal” state for a
selected gateway.

1. In the Status tab, select the Numerical status button. The Numerical window appears.
2. The window displays the number of cards for that gateway, the number of inputs in alarm,
the number of relays manually activated, the number of doors forced open, etc. This can be
very useful if you need to find out how many cards are defined.

Text Status
The Text status allows an operator to display the status of a selected component (and sub-
components) as well as all the characteristics associated with this component in a text form. This

60 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

menu option applies to all the system devices: applications, sites, controllers, doors, relays and
inputs. The text window contains additional buttons that assist operators in their tasks:

• The first seven buttons represent system devices (Workstation, Gateway, Connection,
Controller, Door, Input and Output).
• Summary/Detailed list —The magnifying glass button is used to display components that are
not in normal condition. It displays a summary list or a detailed list.

- Summary: shows the components that are not in normal condition

- Detail: shows all the components in any condition.

• Stop display —This button is used to stop the display when the information is taking too
much time. It cancels or interrupts the process.
• Refresh —Refreshes the status of the selected components.
• Print —Use this button to print the displayed status. You can preview your report before
printing it.

Displaying a Component Status

1. From the Status tab, select the Text Status button. The Text window appears.
2. In the Text window, select the button of the component for which you want to view the
status. If you select the Workstation button, the system displays the list of the EntraPass
Applications defined in the system
3. You can check the EntraPass application you want to display the status or enter a few
characters of the component name (field at the top) for the system to search in the database.
For example, you can enter “Sec” for Security Office. The system will highlight the first
name containing the entered characters. You may also click the Select all button to select
all the EntraPass applications; or select specific components by clicking in the checkboxes
next to each component name. The Clear all button removes the check marks from the
selected components. Click Cancel to return to the previous window without any selections
or changes.
4. You may check the View sub-components option (lower part of the window) to display
detailed information on the sub-components linked to the selected component. For example,
if you selected a controller, all its components (doors, relays, inputs) with appropriate status
will be displayed on the window if this option was checked. For more focus in one window,
filter doors, relays or inputs by connection.
5. Click OK to return to the previous window and apply your selections.
Note: The Magnifying glass button is used to display components that are not in
normal condition. When it is in a “summary” position, only components that are not in
normal condition will be displayed; the “detailed” position, displays a full status of all
components.

Video server status

In EntraPass, you can display the parameters of the video devices that are connected to the video
server. For example, operators can view information related to network data transfer such as
images and digital sounds.
Note: Installing and using the video feature may take a large amount of your company's
network bandwidth (LAN or WAN). The network administrator may control the use of the
network bandwidth for video transfer.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 61

Viewing the video server's full status
1. On the Graphic desktop window, right-click the Video server icon to display a shortcut menu.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Full status to display information about the video server status.
Note: The content of the full status window depends on the video server associated with
EntraPass.
Result
The following table provides descriptions of the displayed fields.

Table 5: Video server full status window

Item Description
Unit name The network name of the remote DVMS system. For example, Intellex. The unit
name is followed by the DVR IP address
Unit type The type of unit. For example, Intellex or Iris (network client).
Schedule The current schedule mode of the remote DVMS unit. It indicates how images are
mode recorded by the DVR installation. The values for this field can be: Regular (regular
schedule), Single (only a single camera), or Custom (a custom schedule has been
set by the operator).
Recording in The active record statue of the remote DVMS unit. Values can be: True (is
progress recording) or False (stopped recording).
Time span The time interval (in second) between the oldest and newest images in the
(h:mm) database.
Unit version The official version of the DVMS unit.
Number of The number of cameras connected to the video server. The source of the video
cameras data is generally a camera, but it may also be a television station or other video
source. The value varies from 0 to 16.
Record mode The record mode can be linear or circular. If you select Linear, the recording
continues uninterrupted until the available space is finished; if you select Circular,
the DVR notifies the operators before the recording space is completely filled.
The operator can choose to continue the recording or to stop it. By default, the
recording mode is set to Circular.
Recording The recording standard of the remote unit. The recording standard depends on
mode the area. Values can be: NTSC (the NTSC standard is mainly used in America and in
many Asian countries such as Japan and South Korea) or PAL (the PAL standard is
mainly used in Germany, Great Britain, China, Australia and Brazil).
Estimated The estimated number of frames that may still be recorded in the video database
remaining before the DVMS unit space is completely filled. This option is only useful if the
images recording mode is linear.
Interface Indicates the version of the application interface between EntraPass and the
version (API) selected video server.
Number of The number of audio streams available of the video server unit. The source of the
audio audio data is generally a microphone, but may be another audio source.
Record rate The rate code value. This value indicates the aggregate recording rate for the DVR
unit in number of frames per second. The value can be: 1, 2.5, 7.5, 15, 30, 60, 120,
other value.

62 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Table 5: Video server full status window
Item Description
Total number The total number of images in the remote unit’s database.
of images
Version Compatibility between the versions of the DVR unit and the application interface
compatibility used.
Number of The numbers of text data streams available from the DVMS. The text data source
text may be a cash register or other device.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 63

Operations
Use this section to perform manual operations on system applications and components. You must
have the applications and components configured and defined. Each section describes the icons
available, and a full description of their functionality. Operations range from reloading a controller
database, locking or unlocking doors, to monitoring a selected input. See the following list of
applications and components:

• Manual operations on controllers

• Manual operations on doors

• Manual operations on elevator doors

• Manual operations on gateway

• Manual operations on inputs

• Manual operations on integrated panels

• Manual operations on action scheduler

• Manual operations on relays

• Manual operations on sites

• Manual operations on view roll call

Manual operations on controllers

This dialog is used to reset or reload a controller: soft reset, hard reset, reload and reload controller
firmware.
Table 6: Controller icons
Icon Definition
Soft reset: does not affect the controller database. This command sends new
information to a controller to update its physical components (relays, inputs,
doors and outputs).
Hard reset: erases the existing controller database and reloads it with new
information in the controller database. Execute reset commands with caution.
Before you carry out a controller reset operation, contact Technical Support. For
more information, see Technical Support.
Reload: reload the controller database; if for example a controller database is not
reloaded correctly due to an erratic operation.
Reload controller firmware: reloads the firmware of the controller.

Clear buffered events: offline controllers buffer events until they reconnect to the
server. This operation discards saved events on the controller. This operation is
only available for KT-400, KT -1, and KT-2 controllers.
Unlock reader keypad: unlocks the reader keypad for KT-100, KT-400, KT-1, and
KT-2 controllers.
Reset reader power: resets the controller reader power. You can perform this
operation on KT-300, KT-400, KT-1, KT-2, and KTES controllers.

64 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Table 6: Controller icons
Icon Definition
Forgive: resets to zero the cards-in and cards-out counters or card counters from
controller local area.
Anti-passback cards list: displays the number of cards for each local area, obtain
a card list in local area controllers, move cards (when you have a KT-1, KT-2, or
KT-400 system) and allows you to get position a card. This feature is used only for
a Multi-site Gateway.
Request unassigned modules: will provide the serial numbers of all ioSmart
readers connected but not defined in the system, for example, Controller #1,
ioSmart reader, 14001560.
Reload module firmware: reloads the firmware of the ioSmart module.

Note: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.

Selecting a Controller
1. From the Operations window, select the Controller button to open the Controller window
where you will be able to reset the controller.
2. From the Site pane, select a site. Controllers attached to this site appear in the right-hand
pane.

- From the Controller list, select the controller where the operations will take place.
It has to be highlighted. To perform the operation on a group of controllers, select
Controller Group (lower right-hand pane).
Note: If only one site is defined in the system, the Site Controller list pane will
not appear on the Controller window.The Controller Group bottom panel is
available only to the selected site or to a selected connection not linked to a site.

Performing a Controller Soft Reset

About this task:
A soft reset will refresh the data in the controller.

1. In the Controller dialog, select desired controller or controller group.

2. Click the Soft reset button in the toolbar. This command will sends new information to the
controller to update its physical components (relays, inputs, doors and outputs, etc.).

Performing a Controller Hard Reset

About this task:
A hard reset will delete the existing controller database and reload it with new information in the
controller database.

Note: Reset commands should be executed with caution. Before you carry out a controller
reset operation, we recommend you contact our Technical Support. For more information, see
Technical Support.

1. In the Controller dialog, select desired controller or controller group.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 65

 2. Click the Hard reset button in the toolbar. This command will sends new information to the
controller to update its physical components (relays, inputs, doors and outputs, etc.).

Reloading a Controller Manually

About this task:
EntraPass allows you to reload a controller database when, for example, a controller database is
not reloaded correctly due to an erratic operation.

1. In the Controller dialog, select desired controller or controller group.

2. Click the Reload button in the toolbar. The controller’s database will be reloaded.

Manually clearing buffered events

About this task:
Offline controllers buffer events. When offline controllers are reconnected to EntraPass buffered
events can be downloaded or cleared. To clear buffered events, complete the following steps:

1. In the Controller dialog, select the controller you want.

2. On the toolbar, click the Clear buffered events button.

Result
This option is also available when you right-click the controller you want. This operation is only
available for KT-400, KT -1, and KT-2 controllers.

Resetting Cards In Counters or all Controller local areas

About this task:
This option allows to reset to zero for the cards in counter.

1. In the Controller dialog, select desired controller or controller group.

2. Click the Forgive button in the toolbar. Card holders will not be considered inside or outside
until the next use of their card at an entry or exit reader.

Calculating Number of Cards In

About this task:
If you have one or more controllers configured with anti-passback, this function allows you to view
a list of cards that are considered inside (Cards in) an area. To do so, the passback option (either
soft or hard synchronization) has to be enabled on the reader and the door has to be defined as an
entry door.

1. In the Controller dialog, in the Gateway/Site section, select KT-400-IP . Then in the
Controller section, the list of appropriate controllers relative to the selection display.
2. Select desired controller or controller group.
3. Click the Get Card List button in the toolbar. The system will display the number of cards in
for the selected controller or controller group.
Note: This operation is performed only on one controller at a time as it may be a lengthy
operation. The option is only available on a Multi-site Gateway.

Card Location
1. Right-click the appropriate local area number, and then click Find card position .
2. In the Get card position dialog, click Start with , Begin with or Contains to filter the search
criterion.
3. In the list, select the wanted card position, and then click Get position .

66 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Resetting Cards In Counters or all Controller local areas
About this task:
This option allows to reset to zero for the cards in counter.

1. In the Controller dialog, select desired controller or controller group.

2. Click the Forgive button in the toolbar. Card holders will not be considered inside or outside
until the next use of their card at an entry or exit reader.

Requesting unassigned modules

This feature provides the serial numbers of all ioSmart readers and ioModules connected but not
defined in the system. Use one of the following methods to view unassigned modules in a Message
List window:

• In the Operations tab, select a controller, right-click and select Request unassigned
modules.
• In the Operations tab, right-click in the toolbar and click Request unassigned modules.

To edit a module, right-click an event, click Edit, and choose one of the following options:

• Controller: use to open the Controller window and edit the definition for the controller.
• Assign: performs the following actions:

- Populates the data into the controller's configuration page in the ioSmart tab, or the
ioModule tab. If necessary, rename the reader or change the configuration details,
and click Save.

Full status
Use Full status to review the controller's communication settings and configuration.

Module status
Use Module status to review the module's status.
Note: If you want to view the Full status and the Module status windows at the same time,
click Full status, and on the controller window, click Module Status.

Edit
Use Edit to open the Controller window and edit the definition for the controller.

Manual operations on doors

This dialog allows an authorized operator to manually modify the state of a door or a group of
doors.
Operators can manually lock or unlock a door, temporary lock or unlock a door or a group of doors,
and enable or disable readers on selected doors.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 67

Table 7: Door icons
Icon Definition
Lock door or group of doors: will manually lock the selected door or group of
doors.
Unlock door or group of doors: The selected door or group of doors will be
manually unlocked and will remain unlock until the next valid change of the
unlocking schedule or an operator manually locks the door or group of doors
Temporarily lock/unlock door or group of doors: Temporarily unlocks a door
or group of doors for a preset delay. Once the delay expires, the door or group of
doors re-lock automatically.
Return to schedule: Will re-apply the locking schedule for a door or a group of
doors.
Enable card reader: Will enable a previously disabled door reader.

Disable card reader: Will disable a door reader and user will not be able to access
that door, even if they have access rights.
Soft reset reader: will restart the reader by powering it off and then on again.

Hard reset reader:will restore the reader to its original factory state. It deletes all
programmed settings.

Note: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.
There are various reasons why you would want to perform one of these operations; for example
you may need to “disable a reader” for a short period in order to deny access to the door, etc.
This operation allows an operator to lock a door that was previously unlocked by an operator or a
schedule. When a door is manually locked through the Operation menu, it remains locked until:
• The presentation of a valid card (will re-lock after access), or
• The next valid change of the automatic unlocking schedule (for a door defined with an
unlocking schedule), or
• An operator manually unlocks the door.

Selecting a Door or a Door Group

1. From the Operations window, select the Door button. The Door window appears.
2. Click the Enable animation button to view a real-time display of the door status.

- The left-hand pane displays the list of all Sites. You may select all or select one site.
- The individual doors associated with the site selected on the left are displayed in the
top right side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all doors in the system will be
listed on the right. You can select one, several or all doors.
Note: If only one site is defined in the system,the site list window will not appear
on the Controller window.
- Door groups associated to the site selected on the left are displayed at the bottom
right side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all door groups in the system will be
listed at the bottom right. You can select one or several or all groups.

68 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Note: The Door Group bottom panel is available only to the selected site or to a
selected connection not linked to a site.

Locking a Door Manually

1. In the Door dialog, select desired door(s) or door group.
2. Click the Lock-door button in the toolbar.

Unlocking a Door Manually

1. In the Door dialog, select desired door(s) or door group.
2. Click the Unlock-door button in the tool bar. The selected door(s) will be manually unlocked.
The system will prompt for operator confirmation. A door defined with an automatic
unlocking schedule will remain unlocked until:

- The next valid change of the unlocking schedule, or

- An operator manually locks the door.

Unlocking a Door Temporarily

About this task:
EntraPass allows you to temporarily unlock a door for a preset delay. Once the delay expires, the
door re-locks automatically. You can use this option in cases where you need to grant access to a
user who does not have a card or has forgotten his/her card.

Note: The maximum unlock time: 4:15 (255 seconds).

1. Click the Temporarily unlock button. The Change delay on action dialog will popup.
2. Enter the New time delay (m:ss) and click OK . The selected door will be temporarily
unlocked by an operator.
Note: If a door contact is installed, the door will re-lock as soon the system sees a “door
open-door closed” transition. There is no “Animation” for this type of operation.

Resetting a Door Schedule

About this task:
EntraPass allows you to reset a door schedule after a manual operation has been performed on a
component.

1. In the Door dialog, select desired door(s) or door group.

2. Click the Return to Schedule button. This option will reset the schedule for the selected
components.

Enabling a Door Reader

1. In the Door dialog, select desired door(s) or door group.
2. Click the Reader-enable button. This option enables a previously disabled door reader.

Disabling a Door Reader

1. In the Door dialog, select desired door(s) or door group.
2. Click the Reader-disabled button. This option disables a previously enabled reader. Disabling
a reader prohibits users from accessing the door, even if access rights have been granted.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 69

Modifying access level schedule
About this task:
Using the door's operation menu you can manage the access levels of the door directly.

1. In the Door dialog, select a door.

2. Right-click on the door and select Access Level. This window displays all access levels where
the door can be assigned.
3. To create a new schedule, right-click on the Schedule section and select New.
4. To edit existing schedules, right-click on the Schedule section and select Edit.
5. To apply an existing schedule to an access level, click on the drop-down list beside the
schedule.

Result
For more information about access levels, click here.

Manual operations on elevator doors

This dialog allows an authorized operator to manually lock, unlock or temporarily unlock elevator
floors. The window also displays, in real time, the status of the selected elevator door or doors.

• The cardholder pushes an up/down button, the elevator door opens.

• The cardholder presents its card at the reader (usually inside the cab).
• The system checks if the schedule assigned to this door is valid. If yes, the system checks
which floor group is associated to this door.
• Then the system verifies each floor of the floor group (in the floor group menu) and checks if
the schedule associated to each floor of the group is valid or not valid.
• Only floors that have a valid schedule are available for selection by the user (the elevator
panel enables the buttons corresponding to the floors).
Table 8: Elevator door icons
Icon Definition
Lock elevator floor or group of elevator floors: will manually lock the selected
elevator floor or group of elevator floors.
Unlock elevator floor or group of elevator floors: The selected elevator floor
or group of elevator floors will be manually unlocked and will remain unlock until
the next valid change of the unlocking schedule or an operator manually locks the
elevator floor or group of elevator floors.
Temporarily lock/unlock elevator floor or group of elevator floors:
Temporarily unlocks an elevator floor or group of elevator floors for a preset
delay. Once the delay expires, the elevator floor or group of elevator floors re-lock
automatically.
Return to schedule: Will re-apply the locking schedule for a door or a group of
doors.
Enable card reader: will enable a previously disabled reader.

70 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Table 8: Elevator door icons
Icon Definition
Disable card reader: will disable a reader and users will not be able to access any
elevator floor, even if they have access rights.
Enable elevator floor: will enable a previously disabled elevator floor or floor
group.
Disable elevator floor: will disable an elevator floor or floor group and users will
not be able to access that elevator floor or floor group, even if they have access
rights.

Note: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details
about the operation to be performed.

Selecting an Elevator Door

1. From the Operations menu, select the Elevator door button.
2. Click the Enable animation button to view a real-time display of the elevator door status.

- The left-hand pane displays the list of all Sites. You may select all or select one
connection.
- The individual elevator doors associated with the connection selected on the left are
displayed in the top right side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all elevator
doors in the system will be listed on the right. You can select one, several or all
elevator doors.
- Elevator door groups associated to the connection selected on the left are displayed
at the bottom right of the pane. If you select All on the left, all elevator door groups
will be listed at the bottom right. You can select one or several or all elevator door
groups.
Note: The Door Group bottom panel is available only to the selected site or to a
selected connection not linked to a site.

Locking Floors from Elevator Doors

1. Select an elevator door or a group of elevator doors.
2. Click the Lock button in the toolbar. This command will manually lock the floor group that
was previously unlocked by an operator or a schedule.
Note: A door defined without an unlocking schedule will only be locked by a manual
command. To lock all floors that were previously unlocked, use the Unlock option in the
Manual operation on doors menu.

Unlocking Floors from Elevator Doors

1. Select an elevator door or a group of elevator doors.
2. Click the Unlock elevator floors button in the toolbar to unlock a previously locked floor.
This command will only enable the elevator floors that are defined with an “X” in the “”
column of the Floor group Definition menu. If you do this, the system will prompt the you
to select a floor group that should be unlocked (available). Once the group is selected, the
system will prompt the operator to confirm the operation.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 71

 Note: For a door defined with an “automatic unlocking schedule”, floors will remain
available until the next valid change of the unlocking schedule, or an operator manually
locks the door.
A door defined without an unlocking schedule will only be locked by a manual command.
To lock all floors that were previously unlocked, use the Unlock option in the Manual
operation on doors menu.

When a manual unlocking operation is completed, only floors that are defined with an
“X” in the “” field of the Floor Group Definition menu will be available for selection. Also,
when communication is lost and the controllers are working in stand-alone mode, only
the floors marked with an “X” will be available for selection and the access schedule will
be ignored.

Unlocking Floors from Elevator Doors Temporarily

About this task:
EntraPass allows you to temporarily unlock a floor from an elevator door for a preset delay. Once
the delay expires, the elevator door re-locks automatically. The maximum unlock time: 4:15 (255
seconds).

1. Click the Temporarily unlock button. The Change delay on action dialog will pop up.
2. Enter the New time delay (m:ss) and click OK . The selected elevator floor will be temporarily
unlocked by an operator.
Note: This command will only temporarily enable the elevator floors that are defined
with an “X” in the “” column of the “Floor group Definition menu” (available for
selection).
There is no “Animation” for this type of operation. To temporarily unlock all floors, use
the “temporarily unlock door” option in the “manual operation on doors” menu.

Resetting an Elevator Door Schedule

About this task:
EntraPass allows you to reset an elevator door schedule after a manual operation has been
performed on a component.

1. In the Elevator door dialog, select desired elevator door (s) or door group.
2. Click the Return to Schedule button. This option will reset the schedule for the selected
components.

Enabling an Elevator Floor

1. In the Elevator floor dialog, select desired floor(s) or floor group.
2. Click the Enable elevator floor button. This option enables previously disabled elevator
floors or floor group.

Disabling an Elevator Floor

1. In the Elevator door dialog, select desired floor(s) or floor group.
2. Click the Disabled elevator floor button. This option disables a previously enabled elevator
floor. Disabling a floor prohibits users from accessing the floor, even if access rights have
been granted.

Manual operations on gateway

Manual operations on the gateway feature allows operators to refresh and reload gateway data .

72 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Redundant gateway operations
About this task:
If a redundant server has been used in a number of ways. It becomes active following the failure
of the primary gateway. It can also be manually switched to. This may be used for primary gateway
maintenance. If a redundant gateway is automatically switched to the primary gateway can only be
reinstated manually.

1. From the EntraPass workstation main window, select the Operation tab and click the
Gateway button to open the Gateway dialog where all the gateways connected to your
system are listed.
2. Select your multi-site gateway to see the status of all gateways.
3. Right-click on a gateway to view options.
4. Select as online gateway to reinstate primary gateway.

Result
A green square highlights the active gateway. A yellow square highlights non-active gateways.
Note: Gateways can be reloaded individually or together. To reload a gateway individually
right-click the gateway and select Reload. To reload the gateways together right-click the
multi-site gateway and select Reload. This reloads all associated gateways.

Manual operations on inputs

This dialog allows you to bring an input back to its normal state, or to stop monitoring an input, or
monitor a specific input at all times, or to perform a temporary shunt on a selected input, if it had
been previously modified from its original state as setup in the Device menu.
Table 9: Input icons
Icon Definition
Input normal: returns an input to its normal state as setup in the Device menu.

Input continuous supervision: will monitor the selected input at all times.

Input with no supervision will terminate the input monitoring, regard­less of its
schedule, and will start monitoring with the next pre-defined schedule.
Input no supervision temporarily (Shunt): will stop input monitoring for a pre-
set period of time.

Note: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.

Performing Manual Operations on Inputs

1. From the Operation window, select the Input button.
2. Click the Enable animation button to view a real-time display of the relay status.

- The left-hand pane displays the list of all Sites. You may select All or select one
connection.
- The individual input associated with the connection selected on the left are displayed
in the top right side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all inputs in the system
will be listed on the right. You can select one, several or all inputs.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 73

 - Input groups associated to the connection selected on the left are displayed at the
bottom right side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all input groups in the
system will be listed at the bottom right. You can select one or several or all input
groups.
Note: The Input Group bottom panel is available only to the selected site or to a
selected connection not linked to a site.

Returning an Input to Its Normal State Manually

About this task:
This option is used in cases where an input status has been modified by an operator and you want
to return the input to its normal state. For example, if an input is assigned a monitoring schedule in
its definition and an operator has reversed the state of the input making it “not supervised”, it can
be returned to its normal state using this button.

1. Select an input or a group of inputs.

2. Click the Input normal button . The selected input returns to its normal state as defined in
the Device menu.

Stopping Monitoring an Input

About this task:
You will use this option to terminate the input supervision, regardless of its schedule (if defined).

1. Select an input or a group of inputs.

2. Click Input no supervision . The selected input will not be monitored.

Stopping Input Supervision (Shunt) Temporarily

About this task:
You will use this option when you want the system to bypass a specific input, for a specific period of
time.

1. To temporarily shunt an input, select the input, then click the Temporarily shunt button. The
input will not be monitored temporarily.
2. Click Input no supervision temporarily. The Change delay on action dialog will popup.
3. Enter the New time delay (m:ss) and click OK . An button next to the input will indicate that
it is temporarily shunt. If an alarm occurs, or if the input is disconnected, no message will be
sent to the desktop Message list.

Manual operations on integrated panels

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click Operations and click Integrated Panel.
2. If required, select a specific component from the All components list.
3. In the left column, right-click a panel.
4. Click Full status to view the panel status details.
5. Click Virtual Alarm Panel to view the virtual keypad.
6. Right-click a partition.
7. Click Arm partition or Disarm partition as required.
8. Right-click a zone.
9. Click Zone bypass or Zone unbypass as required. When the panel is next disarmed, the zone
returns to its unbypassed state.

74 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Manual operations on action scheduler
Use the Action scheduler to create actions with the option to program one-time actions or recurring
actions. The initial input interface is a calendar layout, to open a new action in the scheduler
window, double-click a date. You can view existing actions in a daily, weekly, monthly or yearly
format and use the Action scheduler tag to filter the type of actions displayed.
The initial view includes a list of programmed actions, and include the following details: who
requested it, the date and time it is scheduled for, what the action is, a full description of the action,
whether it is a recurring action or not and, the used and total recurring count.
You control permissions for the Action scheduler in Action Scheduler under the Operations menu.
The icon is a calendar page with a timer, and is automatically installed on a system update. A
security item is also added for this feature and it is located under the Operation menu, Action
scheduler of the security level menu.
Note: To program actions the default security setting for Installer and Administrators is,
allow which, is indicated by a green icon, the default security setting for Operators is, not
allow indicated by a red icon. To change this, expand the Operation tree and select Action
Scheduler.
Table 10: Action scheduler icon
Icon Definition
Action Scheduler: This creates actions that are either one-time actions or
recurring actions. It provides a calendar view of all programmed actions with filter,
search and tag capability.

Programming the Action scheduler

About this task:
The following table outlines the controller compatibility and firmware requirements for this feature.
Table 11: Controller and firmware compatibility
V3 Assa-Abloy
firmware
Controller compatibility Gateways Fail-soft mode
KT-2, all firmware Yes Multi-site, Global, KT- Yes
versions NCC
KT-1, firmware 2.00 and Yes Multi-site, Global, KT- Yes
higher NCC
KT-400, rev 1, firmware Yes Multi-site, Global, KT- Yes
1.29 and higher NCC
KT-400, firmware 1.23 Yes Multi-site, Global, KT- Yes
and higher NCC
KT-300 No Global, KT-NCC No
KT-200 No Global, KT-NCC No

To program the Action scheduler, complete the following steps:

1. Click the Operation tab, and select Action scheduler from the menu.
2. From the calendar interface, double-click the date you want, or click the Add button on the
upper left panel.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 75

 3. In the Action scheduler window, enter a name for the action in the primary or secondary
fields.
4. From the Action list, select the appropriate action, the default action is Unlock door.
Note: Execute task is a new action that selects an existing task builder as a component,
an option to select a specific time zone is available, where the default is based on the
location of the local server. When you create a new action schedule by right-clicking
a component from the Operation menu, the menu only displays actions appropriate
to that component.For wireless door connections, use V3 of the Assa-Abloy firmware
with any of the compatible controllers listed in the table, Controller and firmware
compatibility.
5. In the Schedule date and time fields, select the appropriate values. The default day is the
current day, and the default time is one hour later than the current time.
Note: If you select a temporary action, an end time box appears. If an action has a dual
function such as Activate and Deactivate, Date and Time fields appears.
6. In the Action scheduler tag field, create a name to tag the action scheduler. The tag
populates a list used to filter all actions. Each new name generates a new tag, 50 tags is the
maximum amount possible. If no action uses a tag, it is automatically removed from the list.
7. Optional: Select the Recurring checkbox if you want the action to repeat. In the Frequency
list, choose from Daily, Weekly, Monthly or Annually. Set the counter to the amount of
times you want the action to repeat, this is a static setting and 99 is the maximum amount of
times available. A dynamic counter is visible in the lower section of the calendar view.
8. Select the Delete when expired check box to delete the action after the programmed
amount of recurrences.
Note: To ensure different time zones are adhered to, EntraPass deletes actions 24 hours
after midnight of the day of execution. For example, an action programmed for Monday
15:00 is deleted the following Wednesday at 00:00.
9. You must use one of the eight Component fields for an action.
Note: If you want the action to work in stand-alone mode, use only new generation
controllers such as the KT-1, KT-400, KT-400 rev1, or KT-2.
10. Click the Save button.

Programming the Action scheduler from the Door or Relay windows

About this task:
The following steps outline how to program the Action scheduler from the Door window, the same
steps apply if programming the Action scheduler from the Relay window:

1. Click the Operation tab, and click Door from the menu.
2. In the Door panel, select the appropriate door and right-click.
3. Click Action schedule to open the Action scheduler window.
4. Complete steps 3 to 9 in Programming the Action scheduler procedure.

Printing the Action scheduler calendar

About this task:
A report on all Action scheduler actions is available. To print the report, complete the following
steps:

1. From the Action Scheduler window, click the Print button.

76 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 2. Select the actions you want to include in the report, use Select all or Unselect all to assist
your choice.
3. The report lists actions beginning with the nearest date and time to the furthest away.
4. Actions include the following items:

- Name
- Action
- Which components
- Date
- Time, start time, and end time
- Recurring schedule with counter
- Time zone if applicable

Manual operations on relays

Use this menu to manually change the state of a relay or group of relays. You can activate/
deactivate and temporarily activate relays or group of relays manually. The window will also display,
in real-time, the status of the selected relay(s).
This feature allows to manually turn off a relay; for example, when an input programmed to
activate a relay goes in alarm in unknown conditions.
Table 12: Relay icons
Icon Definition
Deactivate relay: allows an operator to deactivate a relay which was previously
activated by an operator, event, schedule or input in alarm.
Activate relay: activate a relay which was previously deactivated by an operator,
event, schedule or input in alarm.
Temporarily activated relay: Temporarily activate a relay or group of relays for a
preset delay.
Return to schedule: Will re-apply a schedule after a manual operation was
performed on a component.

Note: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.

Selecting Relays
1. From the Operation window, select the Relay button.
2. Click the Enable animation button to view a real-time display of the relay status.

- The left-hand pane displays the list of all Sites. You may select All or select one
connection/gateway.
- The individual relays associated with the connection selected on the left are displayed
in the top right side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all relays in the system
will be listed on the right. You can select one, several or all relays.
- Relay groups associated to the connection selected on the left are displayed at
the bottom right side of the pane. If you select All on the left, all relay groups in the
system will be listed at the bottom right. You can select one or several or all groups.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 77

 Note: The Relay Group bottom panel is available only to the selected site or to a
selected connection not linked to a site.

Deactivating a Relay Manually

1. Select a relay or a group of relays.
2. Click the Deactivate Relay button.
Note: If you manually deactivate a relay that is usually activated according to a schedule,
it will remain deactivated until its reactivation schedule becomes valid. This means that if
a relay needs to be activated according to a schedule and you deactivate it, remember to
reactivate it again for the remaining scheduled time, because one relay can be defined
for various components of the system; its activation or deactivation will relate to its
configuration within these components.

Activating a Relay Manually

1. Select a relay or a group of relays.
2. Click the Activate Relay button. The selected relay(s) will be activated. This operation allows
an operator to activate a relay which was previously deactivated by an operator, event,
schedule or input in alarm.

Activating a Relay Temporarily

1. In the right-hand pane, you may select a relay in the upper part of the window, All Relays in
the lower part of the window.
2. Click the Activate relay temporarily button. The Change delay on action window will
popup on screen.
3. Enter the New time delay (m:ss) and click OK . The selected relay will be temporarily
activated by an operator.
Note: The selected relay (s) will be temporarily activated. This is useful for an operator
who would like to activate temporarily a relay which was previously deactivated by
an operator, event, schedule or input in alarm. The system displays a message box
requesting that a temporary activation delay, is entered. When this delay is over, the
relay will be deactivated automatically.

Resetting a Relay Schedule

About this task:
EntraPass allows you to reset a relay schedule after a manual operation has been performed on a
component.

1. In the Relay door dialog, select desired relay(s) or relay group.

2. Click the Return to Schedule button. This option will reset the schedule for the selected
components.

Manual operations on sites

The manual operations on site and connection feature is used to poll unassigned controllers. For
example, when a controller has been added in the system without a serial number, you can use this
command to get the controller serial number.

78 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Table 13: Site icons
Icon Description
Connect to remote site: Click to connect to a remote site using a pre-configured
dial-up connection.
Disconnect remote site: Click to close the connection between this EntraPass
workstation and the remote connection.
Disable remaining time: Click to stay connected until clicked again. This action
disables preset connection remaining time. This action bypasses any idle time.
Update remote connection: After selecting connection, click to connect and
update parameters.
Update all remote connections: Click to connect and update parameters on all
connection starting with the first connection on the list.
Remove connection from connect and wait list: Select a connection then click to
suspend connection after all connections had been set for update.
Reload IP Link firmware: will force a reload of the selected Kantech IP Link
firmware. NOTE: For security reasons, the System Administrator may disable this
button.
Broadcast IP Device: will send a signal to the selected Kantech IP Link and also
the KT-400 IP controller.

Note: A hint is displayed when you move your cursor over a button. It gives details about the
operation to be performed.

Performing Manual Operations on a Site/connection

1. From the Operation window, click on the Site and Connectionbutton to open the Site and
Connection window, then select the site/gateway to which the site/connection is connected.
2. To poll a controller that is not assigned, click the Controller button. A message is sent to an
unassigned controller, asking it to identify itself. When the controller receives the call from
the connection, it sends an acknowledgement message in the Message desktop.
3. You may select the Message desktop to view the controller serial number.
Note: The % column shows the communication performance of a selected connection.
If the percentage is too low (below 75% for instance), it may indicate that the connection
is not communicating efficiently. Communication problems may stem from various
reasons such as interferences, damaged cables, etc.

Manual operations on view roll call

This feature is used to visualize the users entering a pre-defined perimeter. When a user enters this
area, the corresponding data is displayed in the following dialog:

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 79

For more information, see Roll Call Report.

80 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Users
Users contains information on how to add, import, define, and export a user’s card details.
Cardholder features include the following: access levels, usage restrictions, audit trail, privileges,
managing groups, tenants, badges, and personal information.

Access Levels Definition

About this task:
Access levels determine where and when the card will be valid. Pre-programmed card access
groups allow quick selection of access levels for various sites. A total of 248 access levels can be
programmed per connection . To assign an access level to a card, you have to:

• Create schedules that correspond to the time the user has access to the desired doors.
• Assign the created schedule to the desired doors (in the Access level definition menu).
• Assign the access level to a card.

1. The default access level is Always valid, all doors : cardholders assigned this default access
level have access to all doors at any time. To restrict access to certain doors and at a certain
time, you have to create a specific access level.
2. From the Users toolbar, select the Access level button. The Access level window appears.
3. C lick New and assign a meaningful name to the access level you are creating.
Note: Components that are displayed in the Doors and Schedule columns have to
be pre-defined for selection. To define Doors: Devices > Door. To define Schedules:
Definition > Schedule.
4. From the Doors list, select the doors to which the cardholder has access.
5. From the Schedule column, select the schedule during which the cardholder will have access
to the corresponding door.
6. From the Floor group column, select the floor group, if applicable.
7. Click the Comment tab to add comments to the current access level. You can double-click in
the blank space to display the edition window.

Badge Designing
EntraPass contains a badge layout editor for users to create, save, edit or delete badge templates
that are later selected and associated with cards for badge printing. You can create and edit
badge templates, add coloured or graphic backgrounds, logos, text, bar codes, and place photo or
signature holders.

Creating a Badge Template

1. From the Users menu, select the Badge button. The Badge window appears.

Note: The printer configuration description must be first entered from the System
Parameters/Credentials menu.
The Badge window contains all the tools available in other EntraPass windows: new, save,
copy, delete, print, links, search (the Hierarchy button is disabled). However, it contains an
additional 1-2 button which allows to modify the number of sides assigned to a badge layout.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 81

 2. Click the New button in the toolbar. The Badge properties window appears.

To Specify Properties for a Badge Layout

1. In the Badge properties window, indicate the number of sides for the badge, then select the
desired size for the badge layout, then click OK.
2. Indicate the number of sides for the badge, then select the desired size for the badge layout,
then click OK.
Note: Measures are expressed either in inches or millimeters (a hundredth of an inch
or a tenth of a millimeter). To change the unit of measure, check the appropriate radio
button in the Units section.
3. Enter the name for the badge template in the language fields. You can enter up to 40
characters.
4. You may check Set as default card layout if you want this new design to be automatically
used for all new badges.
Note: Only one default layout is available. When you select one layout and check the
option Select as default card layout , the current default layout is replaced.
5. Click the Save button to save the badge template.

To Edit a Badge Layout

The Badge design utility allows users to edit the badge layout, to add background colour or
graphics, to modify the font, etc.
Note: When you move the cursor over the badge design objects, a hint explaining each object
appears. Once a card layout is created, you cannot modify its size; you have to create a new
layout. However, you can modify the number of sides by clicking on the Sides button in the
Badge window toolbar.

To Modify the Number of Card Sides

1. From the badge window, select the badge you want to edit.
2. From the Badge window toolbar, click the 1-2 button.
3. Click the Save button to save the new badge information.

To Modify the Background colour

1. From the Badge window, select the badge you want to modify.
2. Click the Click here to modify the card layout button (located in the lower part of the
window) to open the Badge design window.
3. To modify the template background colour, right-click anywhere in the work area. The
Properties shortcut menu appears.
4. Select Properties. The Background properties window appears.
5. Select the appropriate options for the template:

- No background (default setting)

- Use colour as background: this option will allow you to apply a background colour to
all the designs.
- Use image as background. This option allows you to incorporate an image that will
be displayed as a watermark in all the badges.
- Orientation: allows you to select a landscape (horizontal) or portrait (vertical) display.

82 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

To Add Objects to a Badge Layout
By a simple click and drop feature, the Badging utility permits you to incorporate objects into the
badge template:

• Card fields information

• Bar codes
• Text boxes
• Current date
• Previously saved images and logos (BMP, JPG, GIF, etc.)
• Border
• Rectangle (including rounded rectangle and ellipse)
• Line, pointer
Note: Objects are incorporated with their default settings. To modify an object’s
properties, right-click the object, then select appropriate settings from the shortcut
menu.

To Incorporate Card Information Fields

1. To add card information fields to the badge template, click the Card fields button. The Card
fields submenu appears.

2. To modify an object property before you drop it, go to Options in the Badge design window,
then choose Show properties on drop. If you do this, the Properties window will open every
time you drop an item in the template work area.
Note: To enable last and first name selection in the Card fields menu of the Badge
design window, go to the Options menu , then choose System parameters, select the
User name format tab, check Parse user name checkbox, then select the name (first or
last name) that will be used for sorting cardholders names. For more information see
User Name Format.
3. From the shortcut menu, select the card information field you want to add to the template
layout, then click in the template work area to incorporate that field you have selected.
Note: When you add a photo to a badge design template, the photo that appears is
only a placeholder. It indicates where the card holder’s photo will be displayed. When a
badge is assigned to a card, the appropriate card holder’s photo is displayed.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 83

To Align Objects in the Template Layout
Grids assist you in aligning items in the badge layout template. It can be used as a visual aid to
place items on grid lines.
Three options are available to help you align your objects in the badge template:

• Show grid lines: displays grid points to aid with object alignment.
• Align to grid: must be activated before you start building your template. As you “click and
drop” design objects in the template work area, they will be “snapped” to the nearest grid
mark.
• Grid settings: allows you to specify the horizontal (Height) and vertical (Width) grid spacing
(in pixels).
Note: To disable the grid deselect Show grid line in the Align menu.

To Modify Card Fields Properties

About this task:
Objects are incorporated in the template with their default settings (font, colour, etc.). You can
modify the settings later. For example, you can modify the appearance of any text object, such as
card field, static text, date, etc.

1. From the Badge design template, right-click the object you have inserted (in this example,
Card information fields).
2. From the shortcut menu, select Card fields properties .
Note: The Properties menu item depends on the selected item. For example, it will
change to Image properties or Current date properties, depending on the selected
object.
3. From the Card fields properties window, you can modify all the text properties:

- Font (name, colour, style (bold, italic, underline)),

- Background (transparent or solid with a colour),
- Justification (horizontal, vertical),
- Orientation,
- Parameters (word wrap, for example).
Note: The Set as default checkbox allows you to apply all the characteristic to all
text objects that will be incorporated in the template.
When Text Orientation is set to “Other” it is not possible to re-size the field.

To Modify Picture Properties

About this task:
This applies to any picture object such as photos, logos, and signatures.

1. From the Badge design work area, right-click the image (picture, logo) or signature that you
want to modify.
2. From the shortcut menu, select Images properties.
3. You may select another image from file or modify the image properties:

- Stretch ratio: select this option if you want the image to be centered in the image
holder space, while keeping the proportion of the original image.
- Transparent mode: if you choose this option, there is no background colour,

84 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Draw frame: select this option if you want a frame around the picture object,
- Frame colour (enabled when a Frame option is selected): select this option if you
want to apply a specific colour to the image frame. The Frame colour drop-down list
enables you to select a custom colour from the frame.

4. You may check the Set as default option if you want these properties to apply to all image
objects you add in the badge template.

To Add Static Text Objects

About this task:
To add text objects to a badge, first click and drop a text box, then enter the text in the Text
properties window. It is also in the Text properties window that you modify the text appearance.

1. From the Badge design tool bar, click the text button. To re-size the text box, select it and use
the two-headed arrow to drag the sizing handles to the desired position. This also allows you
to change the height and width of the text box.
2. To align the text box, see To Align Objects in the Template Layout.
3. To add text to the text box, right-click the text box, then select Static text properties from
the shortcut menu.
4. Enter text in the Enter text field; then modify the text properties as desired. The Preview
section shows the result of the changes you apply to the text.

To Add Bar Codes

About this task:
The Badging feature allows users to add bar codes to badges. By default, the bar code value is the
card number, if no other value is specified.

1. From the Badge design window, click the Bar code button, then click in the Badge design
work area.
2. To align the bar code, see To Align Objects in the Template Layout.

To Set Up Bar code Properties

1. From the Badge design window, right click the bar code to open the Bar code Properties
window.

2. From the Properties window, you can define settings for the bar code that you want to
incorporate in the Badge design.
Note: If it is necessary to set Bar code encoding option to Code 39-Modulo 43, set Field
Checksum to true.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 85

To Add the Current Date
About this task:
You add the current date just as you add any other design item by selecting the item in the tool bar,
then by clicking in the Badge design work area.

1. From the Badge Design template, select the Current date button, then click in the Badge
design work area.
2. Right-click the current date to display the shortcut menu.
3. To align the current date, see To Align Objects in the Template Layout.
4. Select Current date properties from the shortcut menu.
5. From the Current date properties window, you can:

- Select the date format (top of the window)

- Change the text properties: font, colour, justification, orientation etc.

Adding an image
About this task:
You can import background images from any directory. You can incorporate scanned images,
photos taken with a digital camera and artwork created in any illustration design program into the
badge design.

1. In the Badge design window, click the Picture icon.

Note: The Badging feature supports most available image formats: BMP, JPG, EMF, WMF,
GIF, PNG, PCD, and TIF.
2. Drag the Picture icon to the template work area. The Image properties window appears.
3. In the Image properties window, click the Select image from file button.
4. In the Open window, browse to the desired image, and click Open. The picture appears in the
template area.

Note: When you import an image, you have to re-size it to its original size, as illustrated
in the figure.
5. Using the sizing handles, adjust the image to the desired size, then move it to the right-hand
position; you can use the grid to align it properly. For more information, see To Align Objects
in the Template Layout.
6. Right click the image to modify its properties. For more information, see To Modify Picture
Properties.

To Place Other Design Objects

About this task:

86 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

The Badging feature lets you add borders, rectangles (regular, rounded, ellipse), lines and pointers,
just as you add any other design object, by a click in the toolbar, then a drop in the design work
area.

1. From the Badge design window, select the object you want to add (next to the Diskette
button), then click in the Badge design work area” The Border properties window opens.
2. To modify the border properties, select the border colour, the border style, and the border
width. You may check the Set as default option, then click OK to exit.

To Place a Rectangle
1. From the Badge design window, select the rectangle tool (next to the Border tool), then click
in the work area.

Note: This applies also to rectangles, rounded rectangles and ellipses.

2. From the Rectangle properties window, you may define the rectangle properties before
importing it:

- Line colour,
- Line style,
- Line width,
- Background (brush style and brush colour).

Printing Badges
You may print badges from a Card or from all Badge preview windows. The software is set up to
let you print one single or double-sided badges.
Before you print, you have to select a badge printer. It may be any network printer, or a specific
badge printer.

Selecting a Badge Printer

1. From the EntraPass Workstation window, select the Options toolbar, then click the Printer
Options button.
2. From the Printer options window, select the Badge printer tab.
Note: You can print badges to any network printer. However, to print badges on
appropriate cards, you have to select a badge printer.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 87

 3. Check the Badge printer option to indicate to the system that a badge printer is selected.
If the Badge printer option is checked, the Print badge and Preview badge are displayed in
windows where you can print badges (Card windows).
4. From the Select badge printer drop-down list, select the printer dedicated to badging.
5. Adjust the margins:

- Origin offset, X axis: Indicates the left margin.

- Y axis indicates the upper margin.

Previewing and Printing Badges

About this task:
The Badge - Preview and Print window allows you to preview a badge layout with card information
(if the badge layout is associated with a card) or with default values (if the template is not yet
associated with a particular card). The program permits you to print single or double sided badges.

1. From the Card window, click the Preview badge button.

Note: From the Badge design window, the preview option allows you to view a badge
with default values since there is no card associated with it.
2. From the Badge - Preview and Print window, choose a printing option:

- Print front side: only the front side (preview in the left-hand pane) is printed.
- Print back side: Only the back side (preview in the right-hand pane) is printed. This
button is enabled only when the badge is defined with two sides.
- Print both sides: The front and back side are printed. This button is enabled only
when the badge is defined with two sides.
Important: In order to print badges with bar codes, your printer has to be
properly set. You have to select the “black resin” option, otherwise, bar code
readers may not detect the bar code. If you have problems with bar code printing
or reading, refer to your printer manufacturer’s manual.

Card access groups definition

About this task:
Pre-programmed card access groups allow quick selection of access levels for various sites of the
system. This card access group can be recalled during card programming instead of re-entering
the access levels for each connection. It is only the card access group information that is associated
with the card. Therefore, you can modify the card access group information without modifying the
card access information.

Note: When importing cards, the card access group may be used to assign an access level to
the cards.

1. From the Users toolbar, click the Card access group button.
2. To modify an existing card access group, select it from the Card access group list. To create
a new group, click the New button and enter the group name in the language section. The
connection column displays the connection associated with a card access group.
3. From the Access level list, select the access level that will determine the access to the doors
of the selected connection.

Card Printing
About this task:

88 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Use the Print feature to print a specific range of all the cards that are stored in the database. You
can select various filters to customize the card list. You can preview your list so that you can modify
or verify the settings (fields) before printing. You can also use the Font button to set a different font
and font size for your report.

Note: Whatever your selections, the card user name and card number will always be
displayed. By default, only fields containing information will be printed. If no fields are
selected, only cards containing information will be printed. If you want to print empty fields,
check the Print empty fields option. If you want to print component references, check the Print
component references option. If you want to simply preview card reports there must be at
least one printer installed on the computer.

1. From the Card dialog, click the Printer button.

Note: By default, empty fields are not printed. To print empty fields, check the Print
empty fields option.
2. Select a sorting criteria from the Card Index drop-down list. These are card information
fields.
3. If you are printing a specific range, check the Specific range option. Select the field that will
be used to sort the card list. For example, if you select Card number, the cards in the list will
be sorted according to the card numbers in ascending order. This field can also be used to
target a specific range of cards when using the Lower/Upper boundaries fields.

- If you want to print a specific range, you have to specify a starting number in the
Lower boundary field. It has to be used with the Upper boundary field. You must
use the “card index field”.
- If you have decided to print a specific range and if you have entered a Lower
boundary value, enter the last number or letter in the Upper boundary field. This
field is used with the Lower boundary and the Card Index field.
Note: Only cards that match ALL the selected filters will be printed. For example,
if you specify six filters, all the six criteria must be met. Cards that do not match
all the six criteria will not be included in the range.

4. Select the Filter option if you do not want the system to search through all the cards of the
system. Filters will restrict the search and facilitate the production of the desired card list.

- Start date between: The system will include cards with a “Start date” field which is
within the specified range (Miscellaneous tab).
- End date between: The system will include cards with a “Use end date” field which is
within the specified range (Miscellaneous tab).
- Card: Check the option and then select the desired state. The system will include cards
that have this card state selected in the Card window (Miscellaneous tab).
- Select the Exist trace for the system to include cards that have the “Card Trace”
option in their definition (Card window, Miscellaneous tab).
- Select the Exist comment option for the system to include cards that have
information in the Comment field in their definition (Card window, Comment tab).
- Select Exist PIN: The system will include cards that have a PIN.
- Select Exist delete when expired: The system will include cards that have information
in the Delete when expired field (Card window, Miscellaneous tab).
- Select Exist wait for keypad for the system to include cards that have information in
the Wait for keypad field (Card window, Miscellaneous tab).

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 89

 5. To include specific data fields, select the Print selected fields check box, and select the fields
you want to appear in the card profile report. Save the files in a CSV file format.
6. Click the Select door access filter button if you want to include cards associated to a door.
7. Select the Based on time option if you want to select cards according to the time or select
Based on schedule if you want to select cards according to a defined schedule.
Note: To extend the selection, right click within Select door for access filter window.
8. Check the appropriate field you want to print. The system will include the field content as it
appears in the card definition.
9. You may save the list as a .QRP file (Quick Report) to view later using the Quick Viewer
option.
10. You can also use the “Font” button to use a different font and font size for your list. The
changes will appear automatically in the sample box. Use the Preview button from the print
window to preview your report.

Adding Comments to a Card

1. From the Card window, select the Comment tab.
2. Enter a comment (if necessary) relative to this cardholder. The displayed field can be used to
store additional information in the database. Maximum allowed: up to 241 characters.
3. Click the Save button, then the Close button to exit.

Cards definition
Cards are defined by the following properties: card number, card user name, access level and
status (valid, invalid, pending, lost/stolen or expired). Card records can be searched, sorted and
deleted.
An activity report icon on the toolbar becomes available when you select a card. Use this icon to
generate a quick report based on time parameters. The report contains the following information
on the user's card: date and time, event message, card number, and many description columns. For
more information on the report options, see Previewing Reports.
Table 14: Activity report icon
Icon Description
Activity report: this generates a last transactions report based on the time
parameters you enter. On completion of the report, EntraPass generates an event
with details of who requested the report, and for what user.

Issuing a new card

1. Click the Users tab, and click Card.
Note: If you activated the enhanced user management, see Issuing a new card in
enhanced user management environment.
2. In the Card window, click the New icon. The Card number field is enabled.
3. In the Card number field, enter the number printed on the card and press Enter. If it is a new
card, the Card user name field is initialized with “New user”. If the card already exists, the
system displays information about the card.
4. In the Card user name field, enter the cardholder's name. You can enter up to 50 characters.

90 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 5. Click Card type to access the Card type menu. Select the card type for the new card. The card
type is used to group cardholders; it is useful for tasks such as modifying an existing card
group or creating reports. For more information on how to create or modify card types, see
Card Type Definition.
Note: In the Card type window, you can right-click the Card type field and click New to
create a new card type, click Select to pick an existing card type, or click Edit to edit an
existing card type.
The system automatically displays the creation date, the modification date and the
modification count informaiton in the upper right of the card window.
6. Fill out the Card Information 1 to 10 fields. These are user definable fields. They are used
to store additional information regarding the cardholder. For example, you could use Card
Information 1 to store the employee number; Card Information 2, Department where the
employee works; Card Information 3, employee address. Later, card information fields will be
used to index reports, customize cardholder lists, etc.
Note: These information fields are editable labels. To rename an information field label,
double-click it, then enter the appropriate name in the displayed fields. You can enter up
to 50 characters.
7. Click the Save icon.

Card audit trail

About this task:
Use the card audit trail icon to view who made changes, and when the changes occurred on a card.
To provide access to the Audit trail functionailty, you must give permission to the operator to use
Audit in the System group, for more information, see Security level definition.

1. Click Users, click Card, and select a cardholder from the Card user name list.
2. To open the Audit window, in the toolbar, click the Audit trail icon.
The Audit window contains two tables, the first table contains the following card
information:

- Color coded column: indicates if the card was created, modified, or deleted.

- Green: Create
- Blue: Modify
- Red: Delete

- Date and time: the date and time an operator created, modified, or deleted the card.
- Operator: the name of the operator who made the change.
- Count: the number of fields that were changed.

The second table contains the following card information:

- Reference type: the connection, site, or gateway connected to the card that changed.
- Reference: the item the change references.
- Field name: the name of the GUI field.
- Old value: the value before the change occurred.
- New value: the value when the system saved the change.
- Field description: description of the field name.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 91

 To access the following column options, click the Filter icon on the upper left of the
table.

- Date type: the database data type:

- Time
- Integer
- Object
- Components

- Table name: the database table name.

Note: Define the results based on the amount of records, or by date. For more
information see, Server logs in System parameter.
To access the context menu, select a table entry, and right-click. The following options
are available:

- CSV export selected: export the selected entry of the card audit trail to a CSV
format file.
- CSV export all: export the entire content of the card audit trail to a CSV format
fiel.
- View old value: view a window with the value before the change.
- View old value parent: view a window of the parent of the selected component
with the value before the change.
- View old value link: view a window representing a link to the component with
the value before the change.
- View new value: view a window with the value after the change.
- View new value parent: view a window of the parent of the selected
component with the value after the change.
- View new value link: view a window representing a link to the component with
the value after the change.

Quick Access to Door List per Card

About this task:
This feature allows to quickly and conveniently display the list of doors with an associated schedule
for all access levels of the selected user.

1. From the Users/Card menu, click the Door access list button:
Result

The information is displayed over five columns:

• Gateway/connection button
• Gateway/connection description
• Door description
• Schedule description

92 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Note: This information can be exported to a CSV file for printing and report purposes.
The same information is also available from the View card information window by clicking the Door
access list button:

Creating New Cards Using the “Save As” Feature

About this task:
The Save as feature allows you to create a new card based on an existing card, only making
changes to specific information. For example: changing only the user name and keeping all other
card information.

1. Type required changes into specific fields in the Card window and click the Save as button.
This feature allows you to create a new card under a new card number.
2. Enter the new card number in the New card number field.
3. Select the Keep/Delete original card options to specify if the original card should be kept
or deleted (usually kept), then click OK to save the new information. The Card window is
displayed.

Issuing Cards Using the “Batch Load” Feature

About this task:
The Batch Load feature allows operators to issue cards by presenting cards to a door reader. The
card number is displayed on an “unknown card” or “access denied” event messages. During a
Batch Load operation, the operator can create new cards or modify existing ones.

1. From the Card window, click the Batch Load button.

2. From the Door drop-down list, select the door that will be used to read the cards.
3. Check the following options:

- Refresh an access granted: if this option is checked, each time an access is granted
the information displayed will be refreshed with data relative to the card.
- Save on new card: if this option is checked, new cards will be saved in the card
database on an “unknown card” event message. If this box is not checked, the
operator will have to save the card manually each time a card is read.
Note: When this option is selected, the first card presented to the door reader
will be saved only when presenting a second card or by pressing the save button.
- Find: allows operators to search for an existing card in order to create a new card
based on the existing card data.
Note: If an operator clicks the Close button without saving (when the Save
button is still enabled), a system prompt will ask to save the last information.

Viewing and Verifying PINs

EntraPass enables you to view and validate each configured cardholders’ PINs in the Card window.

Viewing Cards Assigned the Same PIN

1. From the Card window, click the List of PIN owners button.
2. From the Card or Visitor window, click the List of PIN owners button.
3. Enter the PIN number you wish to validate and click OK. A list containing all operators that
have a PIN number will be displayed on the screen.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 93

 Note: If the system is set to PIN duplication (Options > System Parameters), and if the
PIN is used by more than one cardholders, the system displays a list of cardholders who
are using the PIN. This feature is useful when for example you want to display the list of
cardholders who are using a given PIN or if you are issuing new cards and you want to
verify which PINs are already being used.

Card handling
Finding a card using the toolbar search
1. On the EntraPass workstation, click Users and click Card.
2. In the Card window, on the toolbar, click the Find icon.
3. In the Find a component (Card) window, in the Search field, enter a keyword.
4. To narrow the search results, click one of the following buttons:

- Start with: the list of results includes all of the components that start with the
keyword you enter, in alphabetical order, and includes all other components that are
in the database.
- Begin with: the list of results includes only components that start with the keyword
you enter.
- Contains: the list of results includes all of the components that contain the keyword
you enter.

5. Optional: The default search criteria is card user name. To change the search criteria, on the
left of the Search field, click the Index icon and select which criteria you want to search, for
example, card number or email.
6. Optional: To search for the picture that corresponds to the card that you select, click the
Details icon.
7. Click the Find icon.
8. From the list of search results, select the card that you want to display.
9. Click OK. The card that you select displays in the Card window.
Alternatively, in the Card window, in the Card user name field, enter a user name. Existing user
names display as you enter a value in this field. Select the card that you want to display.
For more information about searching in EntraPass, see Finding components.

Finding a card using the card search window

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click Users and click Card.
2. In the upper left of the Card window, click the Expand arrow button.
3. In the Find a component (Card) window, in the Search field, enter a keyword.
4. To narrow the search results, click one of the following buttons:

- Start with: the list of results includes all of the components that start with the
keyword you enter, in alphabetical order, and includes all other components in the
database.
- Begin with: the list of results includes only components that start with the keyword
you enter.

94 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Contains: the list of results includes all of the components that contain the keyword
you enter.

5. Optional: The default search criteria is card user name. To change the search criteria, on the
left of the Search field, click the Index icon and select which criteria you want to search, for
example, card number or email.
6. Click the Find icon.
7. From the list of search results, select the card that you want to display.
8. Click OK. The card that you select displays in the Card window.
If card information is modified, the updates do not register in the open search window. To
see the latest updates in your search results, refresh by pressing F5, or by closing and re-
opening the Card window.
For more information about searching in EntraPass, see Finding components.

Editing a card
To edit a card in the Card window, complete one of the following steps:

• In the Card user name field, enter a user name. Existing user names display as you enter a
value in this field. Alternatively, use the up and down arrows to browse for a card. Select the
card that you want to modify.
• In the Card number field, enter the card number and press Enter.
The card displays in the Card window and you can modify it as required.

Deleting a card
About this task:
If you have the appropriate access rights, you can use the delete feature to remove a card from the
cardholder database. If you delete a card from the cardholder database, you must re-issue it to use
it.

1. Find the card that you want to delete. To search for cards, see Finding a card using the
toolbar search.
2. In the Card window, on the toolbar, click the Delete icon.
3. In the Warning window, click Yes.
Deleting cards removes them from the cardholder database but they remain in the card
history. All events involving a deleted card remain in the event messages database. You can
generate an event report that includes past events for deleted cards.

Customizing Card Information Fields

About this task:
You may rename Card information fields under the General tab according to your organization
requirements. These fields can contain any information. They can be used as edit boxes or drop-
down lists.

1. In the Card definition dialog, select any card, then double-click the Card information label
under the General tab. The system displays the Change labels window .
2. Select the field you want to modify on the left, and enter the name in the field on the right.
If your system operates in two languages, two fields will be available to enter the field name
in both languages. For example, if you want to rename Card Information 1 to Employee
number , double-click the Card Information 1 label and enter the new name in the field(s) on
the right.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 95

 3. Select the Edit field option if the information appears as an Edit field (one-line information)
or Drop-down list (as applicable); then click OK to save your modifications.
4. You need to repeat these steps for all the fields you want to modify.
Note: An operator must have full access privileges to edit card information fields. An
operator with read only access may only view information in these fields.
The operator can make a search based on any of the 40 fields of card information.

Cardholder Access Levels Assignation

An access level must be assigned to each card. Access levels determine where and when the card
will be valid. The access level allows the cardholder entry to selected locations during specified
schedules. For information on defining access levels, see Access Levels Definition.
Note: When you modify the access level assigned to a card, you also modify the user’s access
permission to the doors and schedules associated to that access level.
In order to assign an access level to a card, you have to:

• Create schedules that will correspond to the time the user has access to the desired doors,
• Assign the created schedule to the desired doors (in the Access level definition menu),
• Assign the access level to cards.

Assigning an Access Level to a Cardholder

1. From the Card definition window, select the Access level tab. The Access level window
appears, it displays the connection column and Access level drop down list.
2. Click the Card access group button (displayed on the left of the connection or Gateway list)
to copy information from a Card access group to a card. The connection column displays the
sites and gateways to which an access level will be associated.
3. From the Access level drop-down list, select the access level that will determine the card
holder’s access to the doors of the selected connection. If you do not want this cardholder to
have access to the door of this connection, leave this field to None.
Note: You have to create Access levels ( Users > Access Level ) to have them displayed in
the Access Level drop-down list.

Assigning additional access levels (Multi-site gateway only)

About this task: When you use a KT-400, KT-400 rev1, KT-1, or KT-2, you can make up to five total
access levels for each user or connection.

1. From the Card definition window, select the Access level tab. The Access level window
appears, it displays the connection column and Access level list.
A small box in the far right column indicates the connection has controllers which accept multiple
access levels. If the box is black, no additional access levels have been added. If the box is green, at
least one additional access level has been assigned. If the box is yellow, the access level has doors
from legacy controllers, which prevent additional levels to be assigned.
2. Select the desired Gateway or connection by clicking the small box in the far right column.
The Additional access levels window appears with the different Gateways and Connections.
3. From the Additional access levels window, you can assign additional access levels.
Note: If there is a warning exclamation sign in the right column beside the access level,
there are controllers associated with the access level which do not support additional
access levels, such as the KT-100, KT-200 and the KT-300.

96 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Access exception
About this task:
Use the Access exception tab to link a specific schedule to a door.

1. On the left pane, select a door.

2. On the right pane, from the list, select a schedule. Click the button to add or remove doors
from the list on the right.
3. In the Access column, choose between Allow or Deny.
Note: Only doors with an associated schedule are saved.
WARNING: The user list report does not take access exception into account.
To enable the Access level exception feature, see Credentials Parameters.

Card options definition

About this task:
Use the Miscellaneous tab to specify and view card options.

1. Select a card number using the Up/down arrows. The Start date field indicates the card
creation date. You can change this information by selecting another date in the displayed
calender. The start date must be the same day or earlier than the current date; else, the Card
state field ( Miscellaneous section) is set to Pending.
2. Select the Use end date box, if applicable. When this box is checked, the system displays a
calender allowing you to select the end date. When the end date is reached, the Card state
field is set to Expired.
3. Select the Delete when expired option, if applicable. This option can only be used with
the Use end date option. When selected, the card information is automatically deleted on
the expiry date (using the end date and hour specified), otherwise the Card state field is
modified to Expired.
Note: A deleted card is a card that is not active in the system database. Even if a card
was deleted, previous events generated by this card are still stored in the archive file.
4. Select the Wait for keypad option to force users to enter a PIN on keypad to access all doors,
then in the Editable PIN field enter the PIN that users will be required to enter.
5. Editable PIN number: The operator can enter the number of digits needed by the reader/
keypad to grant access. See Defining a Card Display Format for more information.
Note: Selecting the Wait for keypad delays access to a door for this card until the
correct PIN has been entered on a keypad. This only affects doors defined with both
reader and keypad in the Door Definition menu (Devices > Doors). The keypad schedule
must also be valid for this door. For more information on defining a door, see Doors
Configuration.
6. From the Card state list, assign a state to the selected card. By default, a card is valid. The
following are available:

- Valid: the card is functional,

- Invalid: the card is not functional,
- Lost/Stolen: the card is not functional,
- Pending: the card is not yet functional.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 97

 - Expired: the card has reached its expiry date.
Note: You cannot force a card state to Pending by selecting this state from the
Card state list. To do so, you have to change the start date.

7. Select the Disable passback option if you want the card to override the passback option
when defined.
Note: If you are issuing a card for a cardholder with disabilities, check the Extended door
access delay option. To enable this option in the system, you have to define appropriate
delays in the Door definition.
8. Allow multiple-swipe (KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2 only): Enable the multi-swipe action. For more
information, see .

Adding Comments to a Card

1. From the Card window, select the Comment tab.
2. Enter a comment (if necessary) relative to this cardholder. The displayed field can be used to
store additional information in the database. Maximum allowed: up to 241 characters.
3. Click the Save button, then the Close button to exit.

Assigning Pictures and Signatures

EntraPass offers the ability to associate photos and signatures with cardholders and to associate
badge templates with cards as well as to print badges. Photos and signatures can be retrieved from
files, pasted from the clipboard, or captured using an appropriate device. For capturing signatures,
signature pads such as Topaz are recommended.

Assigning a Picture from a File

1. From the Card window, select the Picture tab.
Note: The Video capture option is enabled only when a video capturing device is
installed.
2. Right-click the picture area. A shortcut menu appears; choose the appropriate action:

- Get picture from file: This option allows you to select a previously saved picture:

3. From the Files of type drop-down list, select the file type you are looking for or leave this field
to All to display all image files. Make sure that the Auto displayer option is selected to enable
preview.
4. Select the directory where the image is stored. Select the image you are looking for, then click
Open to import it into the Card window.
Note: Files with the following extensions are supported: BMP, EMF, WMF, JPG, GIF, PNG,
PCD, and TIF.

- Paste picture: this option allows you to paste a picture from the clipboard. To use this
option, you have to copy the picture, then paste it into the picture window.
Note: To delete the imported picture, right-click the picture, then choose Clear
picture from the shortcut menu.

Assigning a Picture Using a Video Camera

About this task:
The Video capture option is enabled only when the option Enable video capture is checked:
Options > Multimedia devices > Video capture tab.

98 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Note: Before you can capture images using a video camera, all equipment needs to be
properly configured. For more information, consult your manufacturer’s device manual. If you
have more than one video driver, you will need to specify the video driver to be used ( Options
> Multimedia devices > Video tab).

1. Right-click the picture area.

2. From the shortcut menu, select Video capture. This option is enabled only when the Video
capture capability has been enabled in the Options menu ( Options > Multimedia devices >
Video ).
Note: Options may vary depending on the video capture program. If you have more
than one video driver, you will need to specify the video driver you are using. For more
information on configuring your video drivers, see Multimedia Devices Configuration.
3. Click the Freeze button when you are satisfied with the displayed image, then click the
Capture button to paste and save the displayed image.
4. To associate a badge layout with the defined card, select one from the Badge layout list. For
information on how to define a badge layout, see Badges Designing.
Note: The Print badge and Preview badge buttons are enabled only when a badge
printer and badge layout has been selected and the option Use badge printer checked:
Options > Printer options > Badge printer . If these buttons are enabled, you can preview
and print the card holder’s badge.

Importing a signature from a file

About this task:
You can import a signature, just as you import other images such as logos or pictures into the card.

1. From the Card window, right-click the signature area. A shortcut menu appears.
2. From the shortcut menu, make the appropriate choice:

- Get signature from file: allows you to select a previously saved signature,
- Paste signature: allows you to paste a signature that was previously copied to the
clipboard. The option is enabled when there is content in the clipboard.
Note: The Signature pad option is enabled only when the appropriate device is
enabled in the Options menu ( Options > Multimedia devices > Signature ).

3. Select the signature file, then click Open.

Adding a Signature from a Signature Capture Device

About this task:
Use this option if a Signature Capture Device is installed and configured. The Signature pad
option is enabled only when the appropriate device is enabled in the Options menu (Options >
Multimedia devices > Signature).

1. From the Card window, right-click the signature area. A shortcut menu appears.
2. From the shortcut menu, select Signature pad. The Signature window appears, allowing you
to preview the signature.
3. Click OK to paste the signature in the card window.

Working with Photos and Signatures

The EntraPass Integrated Badging feature allows users to extract part of an image or enhance
images that are incorporated into cards.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 99

Extracting Part of an Image
About this task:
If you have incorporated a large image but you need only part of it, you can select and extract the
part that you want to assign to the card (picture, signature).

1. Right-click the image you have just imported.

2. Select Start selection mode from the shortcut menu.
3. Once you have selected the part you want to incorporate into the card, right-click the image
again. A shortcut menu appears.
Note: To disable the current selection, right-click the picture, then select Cancel selection
mode. Select Undo to discard the changes. The Undo option is enabled only when you
have pasted an image.
4. From the shortcut menu, select Extract.

Editing a Picture/Signature
1. Right click the image you want to edit.
Note: The Bar code area allows you to assign a bar code to a badge for identification
purposes. Select any item from the drop-down list to be used as the value of the bar
code. Select Custom to enable the Value field and type a specific bar code value. If you
do not enter a custom bar code value, the Card number is used as the default value.
2. From the shortcut menu, select Edit (picture or signature ).
3. Adjust the features of the image using the displayed options. The Reset all option enables
you to go back to the original image:

- Auto contrast: this feature gives better contrast by intensifying lights and shadows:
it makes the darks darker and the lights lighter. In general, this auto contrast feature
gives a good result when a simple contrast adjustment is needed to improve an
image’s contrast.
- Sharpen: this feature provides more definition to blurry images by applying
sharpening only when an edge is found.
- Brightness: this feature allows you to add light to the image by sliding towards the
positive values.
- Reset all: this feature allows you to undo all the changes and to restore the original
image.

4. Click OK to close the Picture editing window.

5. From the Badge layout pull-down menu, select a layout to associate with the card you have
defined To define a badge layout, see Badges Designing.

CSV Files Import and Export

The CSV Import/Export feature allows the ability to import or export card files that are saved in a
CSV (Comma Separated Value) format. Importing/exporting data between two applications allows
the ability for the two application to share data. CSV files can be edited in most applications (Excel,
NotePad, etc.). You will use the CSV Import/Export feature if:
• You are upgrading from EntraPass DOS or WinPass 64 and you want to retrieve the cards
created in these previous versions.

100 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • Your company desires to import the card database information into the payroll system. Using
the Import/Export feature will save a considerable amount of time in setting up the card
holder database.
• Your company has a new database: instead of having to reprogram all the information
already available in the card database, the system administrator could export the data
contained in the card database (names, departments, card numbers, etc.) into a CSV file that
can be imported into the target database.
Note: The CSV Import/Export feature imposes a number of rules: each field contains a
specific value format that has to be respected. For example, the card state field will only
accept the following values (0=valid, 1=invalid, 2=stolen/lost).
To Import/Export card information, you may use Kantech pre-defined patterns or you may create
your custom patterns.

Using a Predefined Pattern

About this task:
Two patterns are available: the EntraPass (1,2,3) and the WinPass64 model. You may use the
template “as is” or you may edit it.

1. From the Users toolbar, select the Import/Export CSV file button.
2. From the Select operation drop-down list, select either Import or Export.
3. In the Available Patterns pane, select the pattern you wish to use. This depends on the
software you are upgrading from.
4. Use the Edit pattern button if you want to edit the pattern.

Creating a New Import/Export Pattern

About this task:
This menu lets you create your own import/export mask to use to import or export CSV files.

1. From the Users toolbar, select Import/Export CSV File button. The system displays the
Import / Export CSV file window.
2. From the Import/Export CSV file window, click on New Pattern. The New pattern window
displays a list of all the fields that are available in the EntraPass card databases. They contain
specific value formats that have to be respected. For example, the card state field will only
accept the following values (0=valid, 1=invalid, 2=stolen/lost).
3. Double-click the available fields or use the left and right hand button to move the field
back and forth. Once the fields are selected, you can use the red Up / down arrows to
organize information (this will indicate how information will be arranged in the CSV file).
Note: The card number must always be selected for every pattern including a specific
card. For example, if you select the field Card #1 - Stolen/Lost, you must also select the
field Card #1 - Card Number.
4. Specify the Add code and Modification code. These codes are used by the system to identify,
when importing a file, which card has to be modified or added to the card database. The
default add code is “+” and default modification code is “+”.
5. Select the Delete code. This code is used by the system to identify, when importing a file,
which card has to be removed from the card database. The default delete code is “-”. Field
separators can be: tab, space, comma, semicolon (;) and other.
6. Select the Field separator. This code will be used to separate the selected fields when
importing or exporting data. Usually a comma (,) is selected. Keep this in mind when adding
users’ last names and first names separated by a commas.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 101

 7. Select the Date format. The date will be exported or imported according to the specified
format. The most commonly used format is YYYY/MM/DD. Other date formats are:

- MM/DD/YYYY
- DD/MM/YYYY
- YY/MM/DD
- MM/DD/YY
- DD/MM/YY
Note: The Use DLL feature allows you to enable a program that will convert
specific card numbers. You may use the Remove DLL when you do not wish to
enable the program that converts card numbers.

8. Click OK to exit the pattern window and to specify the new pattern name.
9. Enter the pattern name, then click OK. The system automatically returns to the Export/Import
CSV file window. The pattern you have just created is displayed in the Available patterns list.
10. If you want to add or remove fields from your pattern, double-click the new pattern to edit
and make the necessary modifications. Now you can import or export your information using
the new pattern you have just created.

Exporting Cards
About this task:
Your organization may need to export the card database data into another application. You may
use a predefined template or create a custom template.

1. From the Users toolbar, select the Import/Export CSV File button. The system displays the
Import / Export CSV file window.
2. From the Select operation drop-down list, select Export.
3. From the Available patterns list (left-hand pane), select the pattern you want to use
when exporting cards. If necessary, you may edit the pattern so that it matches the target
application pattern, else, you may create a new one. (For more information on how to create
a pattern, see Creating a New Import/Export Pattern).
4. For the Transaction file, click on the three-dot, then select the folder in which EntraPass will
save the card database content. You can open the CSV file in Excel, NotePad, etc.
5. Once you have selected/created an export folder, click OK to return to the Import / Export
CSV file window.
6. Click the Export button; it is enabled once the transaction file is selected. The system displays
a window allowing you to filter the cards you want to export.
Note: For cards to be included in your file, they must match all the selected filters, if one
or more filters are not matched, the card will not be included.
7. In the Export Card’s filter window, specify the cards you want to export. Once you have made
all your selections, click the Export button. The Import / Export CSV file window appears.
Note: The Transaction file field shows the target file name and location. By default, the
export file is saved in the specified folder (Exportdata, in this example). The status bar
(lower part of the window), shows the number of imported cards (1, in this example).
The default name is YYYYMMDD.csv. You can open the target file with NotePad for
instance.

102 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Importing Cards
1. From the Users toolbar, select the Import/Export CSV File button. The Import / Export CSV
file dialog will display on screen.
2. In the Select Operation drop-down list, select Import.
3. Click the Available patterns button to select the pattern that will be used to import the cards
information (for more information on how to create a pattern, Creating a New Import/Export
Pattern).
4. For the Transaction file, click on the three-dot, browse your hard drive to the CSV file that
contains the data to import into the card database .
5. Once the file has been selected, click Open. You will return to the Import / export CSV file
window.
6. If no errors are present (or once you have corrected errors), click Import to complete the
operation.
Note: The system scans the file to be imported; then it displays the results using a
colour code. Each entry is identified by a colour flag. A yellow or red flag identifies an
entry in error. Errors are frequently caused by the patterns. You have to select another
pattern or edit the pattern you are using so that the pattern entries have to match the
source file entries. There may be errors also even if the transaction code is identified by
a green flag.

Correcting Import/Export Errors

About this task:
The CSV Import/Export feature imposes a number of rules: each field contains a specific value
format that has to be respected. For example, the card state field will only accept the following
values (0=valid, 1=invalid, 2=stolen/lost). The pattern used has to match the pattern used by the
source file. The present section will assist you in correcting import/export errors.

1. Click the Import or Export button to start the transaction (the following example illustrates
a case of importing CSV data). The lower part of the window displays the number of cards in
the list.
Note: Although entries in the Transaction code column are identified with a green flag,
the Card number column is empty. This indicates problems in the pattern conversion.
2. Click the Import button.
Note: The Error button is enabled because the system encountered problems during the
import transaction.
3. You may click the Error button to display information about the error. The Process error
window shows that the pattern used is invalid.
4. Click the Close button to go back to the Import Export window.
5. In the Import/Export CSV window, double-click the pattern you have used for the Import
transaction (Custom, in the example above).
6. From the Field separator drop-down list, select Comma as the field separator, then click OK.
Data in the Card number field indicates that the import transaction will be successful.

Customizing Card Information Fields

About this task:
You may rename Card information fields under the General tab according to your organization
requirements. These fields can contain any information. They can be used as edit boxes or drop-
down lists.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 103

 1. In the Card definition dialog, select any card, then double-click the Card information label
under the General tab. The system displays the Change labels window .
2. Select the field you want to modify on the left, and enter the name in the field on the right.
If your system operates in two languages, two fields will be available to enter the field name
in both languages. For example, if you want to rename Card Information 1 to Employee
number , double-click the Card Information 1 label and enter the new name in the field(s) on
the right.
3. Select the Edit field option if the information appears as an Edit field (one-line information)
or Drop-down list (as applicable); then click OK to save your modifications.
4. You need to repeat these steps for all the fields you want to modify.
Note: An operator must have full access privileges to edit card information fields. An
operator with read only access may only view information in these fields.

Issuing a new card in enhanced user management

environment
1. Click the Users tab, and click Card.
2. In the Card window, click the New icon. In the Card user name field, enter the card holder’s
name. You can enter up to 50 characters.
3. Click Save.
4. Double-click the Card type field to open the Card type window. Select the card type for
the new card. The card type is used to group cardholders; it is useful for actions such as,
modifying an existing card group and creating reports. For more information about how to
create or modify card types, see Card Type Definition.
Note: In the Card type field, you can right-click the Card type field, and select New to
create a new card type, select Select to choose an existing card type, or select Edit to
edit an existing card type.
5. Click the Card number tab, and double-click Card #1 if you want to change the label.
6. In the Card number, enter the card number.

- If EntraPass was previously configured for Multiple Card Format, you can modify
the card format by right-clicking the Card number field. See Defining a Card Display
Format to enable the multiple card formats . The default card format is HH:DDDDD
(Hexadecimal and decimal 24 bits).
Note:
- When the Multiple Card Format is selected, a list of all card formats is displayed
when you right-click the Card number field.
- When a card format is defined by the system administrator, the card format in use has
a check mark next to its description.

104 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Figure 3: Multiple card formats

Issuing Cards Using the Batch Load Feature

About this task:
The Batch Load feature allows operators to issue cards by presenting cards to a door reader. The
card number is displayed on an “unknown card” or “access denied” event messages. During a
Batch Load operation, the operator can create new cards or modify existing ones.

1. From the Card window, click the Batch Load button.

2. From the Door list, select the door that will be used to read the cards.
3. Check the following options:

- Refresh an access granted: if this option is checked, each time an access is granted
the information displayed will be refreshed with data relative to the card.
- Save on new card: if this option is checked, new cards will be saved in the card
database on an “unknown card” event message. If this box is not checked, the
operator will have to save the card manually each time a card is read.
Note: When this option is selected, the first card presented to the door reader
will be saved only when presenting a second card or by pressing the save button.
- Find: allows operators to search for an existing card in order to create a new card
based on the existing card data.
Note: If an operator clicks the Close button without saving (when the Save
button is still enabled), a system prompt will ask to save the last information.

Last Transactions Display

The View last transactions feature lets you view the most recent transactions for the selected
cardholder. For example, the window will display “Access denied” as the type of event, and will
display the date and time as well as the event message that was displayed in the Message desktop.
The system displays the 15 most recent transactions for each category:

• Access denied events (bad location, bad access level, bad card status, etc.),
• Access granted events,

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 105

 • Database events (that have affected the database, such as: card definition modified, relay
definition modified, etc.),
• Other/Miscellaneous events (these include events that were generated by cardholders),
• In/Out events (entry, exit).
Note: To view more transactions for a specific category, see the “Card use report” option
in the Historical Report definition menu.

Viewing the Last Transaction

1. From the card definition window, select the View last transaction button.

- Type: Displays the event category.

- Date and time: Displays the date and the time stamp of the event message.
- Event message: Displays the event message that was sent when this event occurred.
This is the same message as in the Message desktop (Desktop menu).
- Details: Displays additional details directly related to the type of transaction. For
example, for a “card definition modified” event message, the Details column lists
the EntraPass applications from which the card was modified as well as the operator
name.
- Refresh: This button can be used to refresh the window with new transactions as
they happen. As cardholders generate events, new information is available.
- Parent: To view the parent component of a selected component. For more
information, see Basic Functions.
- Print: Use this button to print an exact copy of the window. For more information, see
Basic Functions.
- Preview: The Preview button request the selection of a printer and then displays the
Report Preview dialog.
Result

106 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Quick Access to Door List per Card
About this task:
This feature allows to quickly and conveniently display the list of doors with an associated schedule
for all access levels of the selected user.

1. From the Users/Card menu, click the Door access list button:

Result

The information is displayed over five columns:

• Gateway/connection button
• Gateway/connection description
• Door description
• Schedule description
Note: This information can be exported to a CSV file for printing and report purposes.
The same information is also available from the View card information window by clicking the Door
access list button:

Tenants List
The tenant is a resident in an apartment building or an employee in a company. The tenant can
grant access to a visitor. Tenants list can be created in EntraPass to be used with the KTES.

Creating a New Tenants List

1. From the Users toolbar, select the Tenants list button.
2. Edit the Tenants list name. Default value is New tenant list.
3. Select the Tenant ID length (1 to 5). Default value is 4.
4. Select the Tenant PIN length (4 to 6). Default value is 4.
5. Select the Wiegand display format on LCD. Possible values are:

- Hexadecimal 24 bits
- Hexadecimal and decimal 24 bits
- Hexadecimal 32 bits
- Hexadecimal and decimal 32 bits
- Decimal ABA 8 digits
- Decimal ABA 10 digits
Result
Default value is Hexadecimal 32 bits

Adding new tenants to the list

1. Click the General tab.
2. Click the Add ( + )button. You can use the Legend button to display the actual status of each
tenant.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 107

 3. Configure the tenant parameters:

- Tenant name: Enter the tenant’s name (20 characters maximum). The default value is
New tenant.
- Tenant ID: Enter the tenant’s ID. The tenant’s ID is an identification code of 1 to 5
numbers that a visitor can use to call a tenant. The number of digits available for an ID
is configured when the list is created. The default value is 0000.
- First phone number: Enter the first phone number. The first phone number is used
when a visitor select the tenant from the KTES directory. If no phone number is
entered, the tenant cannot be called by the KTES system and is not displayed in the
KTES directory either (15 digits maximum). The default value is empty.
- Second phone number: Enter a second phone number. The second phone number
is used by the KTES to contact the tenant when there is no answer to the first number
(15 digits maximum). The default value is empty.
- PIN: A Personal Identification Number (PIN) is 4 to 6 numbers configured for each
tenant. The number of digits available for a PIN is configured when the list is created.
The default value is 0000.
- Access schedule: Enter the access schedule. For security reasons, an access schedule
is configured to link a schedule with the tenant access rights. A tenant can access the
building according to specific times, days and holidays defined in the system. The
default value is always valid. For more information about defining schedules, see
Schedules Definition.
- Tenant admin level: Select the administration level for the tenant (installer, owner,
maintenance or tenant). The default value is Tenant.
- Tenant language: Select the default language used by the KTES for the tenant
(System, English, French, Spanish, Custom). The default value is Default. For more
information about the system language, see Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES)
Configuration.
- Disabled Tenant: A disabled tenant status allows the activation of a relay and/or the
generation of an alarm. The default value is deselected (enabled).
- Trace: The trace option allows the activation of a relay and/or the generation of a
traceability event. The default value is deselected (not traced).
- Hide tenant: This option is used if you want the current tenant’s name to be
displayed or hidden. The default value is deselected (displayed).
- Extended door access delay: The extended delays correspond to the additional
time lapse a door should stay unlocked and can be kept opened. The default value is
deselected (no extended delay).
- Extended ring: The system can allow an extended number of rings to give more time
for the tenant to answer. The default value is deselected (no extended ring).

4. Click the Advanced options tab.

5. Set the Tenant validation date:

- Start date: The start date is the date from which the tenant can access the system.
Enter the date in the field (mm/dd/yyyy) or click the Calendar button to select a date.
The default value is empty.

108 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Use end date: The end date is the date at which the tenant cannot access the system
anymore and its status is no longer valid. Select the checkbox to enable the end date.
The default value is deselected (no end date used). Enter the date in the field (mm/
dd/yyyy) or click the Calendar button to select a date. The default value is empty.

6. Set the Do not disturb option. This functionality is used to place the tenant in a do not
disturb (DnD) status if the selected schedule is active. Select the Hide tenant check box if you
want the tenant to remain hidden from the list or for search option while in the DnD status.
7. The Call second phone number option enables the use of a second phone number
immediately (bypassing the first number) when the schedule is active. If you want to use
the second phone number only when the selected schedule is active, select the Call second
phone number only on schedule check box.
8. Set the Wiegand interface for access granted:

- Tenant card number: A 64-bit number associated to each tenant. This number is used
by the tenant to get access from the KTES.
- Card holder for access granted (not available in EntraPass KTES Edition): This
cardholder’s number is the first card number to be used by the tenant to get access
from the KTES.

Importing a tenant list

1. Click the Import button to run the Tenant Export/Import Wizard.
2. Click the Next button and select a CSV format source file.
3. Click the Next button and choose the field to be imported from the list on the right. Use the
left and right buttons to add or remove data fields. The default field separator is comma but
you can select a different one.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 109

 4. Click the Next button and select the tenants to be imported.
5. Click the Next button and click the Import button to complete the operation.
6. Click the Next button to see a summary of the imported data.

Exporting a tenant list

1. Click the Export button to run the Tenant Export/Import Wizard.
2. Click the Next button and choose the field to be exported from the list on the left. Use the left
and right buttons to add or remove data fields. The default field separator is comma but you
can select a different one.

3. Click the Next button and select the tenants to be exported.

4. Click the Next button and select a CSV format destination file. Click the Export button.
5. Click the Next button to see a summary of the exported data.

Validating card access

The Validate card access feature lets you view access levels that are assigned to a particular
cardholder.

1. In the Card window, select a card.

110 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 2. Click the View and Validate Access icon. It is the key icon on the toolbar.
3. Select a site/gateway/connection from the Site/Gateway/Connection list .
4. In the Select specific value area, select the date, time, and the door on which the validation
is required. The system displays the access levels for the selected door as well as the
schedules assigned to the displayed access levels. The Access Level column displays the
access levels associated with the selected door. The Schedule column displays the schedule
associated with the access level.

- Red: Indicates that access to the selected door on the selected date and time is not
allowed (not authorized).
- Green: Indicates that access to the selected door on the selected date and time is
allowed (authorized).

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 111

Definition
Use this section to define the elements to create a secured area for control and alarm purposes. A
schedule indicates when the system executes certain operations, when the system acknowledges
events, and when to activate relays controlling different functions, for more information see
Schedules Definition.
If you want to assign doors as elevator floors use Floors Definition.
When you want to associate a trigger with a particular event, use . You can use Graphics Definition
to view a secured area of the system where components are located on a connection. In addition
to viewing the status of a component you can perform manual operations including locking or
unlocking a door, and moving cards.
You can use Holiday Definition to assign extra days to a schedule, for example holidays that apply
to one site but not another.

Floors Definition
About this task:
Use the Floor window to create or edit elevator floors. After the floors are created, they are
grouped and associated with a schedule that defines when access is permitted.

1. On the Definition tab, click the Floor button.

2. From the Site/Connection list, select the Site/Connection for which you are defining floors.
This allows you to minimize the list of components defined in the system.
3. Select a floor or click the New button to create a new floor group.
4. Assign a meaningful name to the floor, then click the Close button. The system prompts you
to save.

Graphics Definition
A graphic corresponds to the secured area of the system where components (EntraPass
applications, controllers, inputs, relays, etc.) are located on a connection. With graphics, operators
can easily view the exact location of a component installed on a connection, or the status of
components and devices such as doors, contacts, motion detectors, controllers, assigned to the
graphic. Operators can perform manual operations directly from the displayed component (for
example, locking/unlocking a door). Each graphic can display up to 250 components including
using live video as a background. You may also import graphics or maps from other programs in
the following formats (BMP, EMF, WMF, JPEG, GIF, PCX, PNG, TIF or PCD).
Note: EntraPass offers users four sample floor plans. You can customize them to suit your
system needs. The sample floor plans are located at: C:\Program Files\Kantech\Server_ SE \
Generaldata\Demobmp folder .

Defining Components of a Graphic

1. In the Definition tab, click the Graphics button.
2. From the Graphic drop-down list, select the graphic you want to modify, or click the New
button to create a new one.
3. Assign a name to the graphic (or modify the existing name).
Note: When you select an existing graphic, or when you create a new one, all the
components that are assigned in your graphic are displayed in the left-hand pane. The
right-hand part of the window displays the graphic itself.

112 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 4. From the Graphic Definition window, click here to create, edit or modify a graphic to
bring up the Assign Components window.
Note: If the video feature is enabled in your system, video components are added to
the Graphics menu. These video components can be accessed from the graphic layout.
The button can be positioned on a graphic layout and its status can be retrieved by
clicking on the video button. In addition to standard options, the following status option
will be available for the video component: Video Server Online / Offline, Video Server
Parameters (Related to a specific vendor) and Camera status.
5. Click on the Options menu to display a pull down menu of drawing options. A check mark
appears next to an option that is activated. Show hints provides the component’s name
(component's address and name) when you point your mouse cursor over that graphic.

- Draw transparently will place a transparent button on top of a background picture

for a blended effect.
- Draw frame draws a frame around the component. Frame colour indicates the
current frame colour and allows you to change the colour.
- Auto display video view lets you add a video view.
- Select Edit background picture to edit the background of the selected graphic. From
this window you can modify the graphic's frame and background colour and add
annotations.
- Select Add live video as background to have live video as background.
- Select Add Web page as background to have a Web page as background. Enter
the URL address of the connection and press Enter on the keyboard, or click Test .
The Login and Password are not required unless the Web page you want to access
requires it. Click Test to see that the page is loading properly. Then, click Save .
- Select Clear background in order to clear the background picture of the graphic only
leaving the assigned components. You can use this option when you want to insert a
new graphic and leave the same components.

Card location
• For information on enabling the card location feature, see .

Designing the Background for the Graphic Window

1. Double-click anywhere in the background of the Assign components window to bring up the
Design background picture dialog.
2. Use this window to import a graphic that was created with another application or create your
own background using the drawing toolbar buttons.

- To import an existing graphic, click the diskette button, then drag and drop the
diskette in the work area. Once you have positioned the component, and released
the mouse button, the Image properties dialog will pop up on the screen. The system
displays the Open window. Locate the graphic you want to import and click Open. The
graphic will be placed in the graphic area of the dialog.

- To import a custom button into the background graphic, click the Custom images
button in the toolbar. The Select an image window pops up on the screen. Select an
button, then click OK to close the window and import the image in your design.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 113

 - To insert shapes and text in the background image, select a rectangle, a circle, an
ellipse, etc. in the toolbar, and drag and drop it in your background.
- To modify a shape you’ve just placed in the burgeoned window, right-click it to open
the Properties dialog. and make the appropriate modifications (colour, position, etc.).
- You can setup the system to display the Properties dialog as you drop the shape into
the design window. To do so, select the Show properties on Drop from the Options
menu.
- To retrieve shapes that were previously saved to a disk, select the Load annotations
option in the Image menu. When you add shapes to a graphic, you have the option of
saving them as annotation on a separate file in order to retrieve them later.
- To save annotations on a separate file from your graphic, select the Save annotations
option in the Image menu. You will be able to retrieve them for later use.
- To clear the shapes, select Clear annotation in the Image menu. If you save the
graphic with the shapes, the shape become permanent.
- Use the View menu to define how the graphic will be displayed.
Note: Sizing handles (square handles that are displayed along the sides of the
object that surrounds the selected object) indicate the object is selected.

Assigning System Components to Graphic Icons

1. From the Assign Components window toolbar, click and drag the selected component to the
desired position. To drag an object across a window, select the object with your mouse and
drag, while keeping the button pressed down, to the desired location in the graphic.
2. Once you have positioned the component, and released the mouse button, the Assign From
dialog will pop up on the screen.
3. Select the system component you want to assign to the button on the screen.
4. Click OK to go back to the previous window.
Note: If you do not assign the button to a component, the button will not be saved in
the graphic. Only components that were not selected in the graphic will be available for
selection.

Printing System Components and Graphics

1. From the Definition tab, click the Graphic button and select a graphic from the drop-down
list.
2. Click on the Print button from the Graphic dialog toolbar.

- Select the graphics to be printed using the checkboxes. You can also use the Select all
or the Clear all buttons.
- Select Print empty fields to include the titles of the fields even if they are empty.
- Select Print component references to print the component reference numbers.
- Use the Font button to display the standard Windows Font dialog and modify the font
attributes accordingly.
- Click on the Preview button to display a general view of the printing layout.

3. Click on Print to send the graphic to the printer.

Holiday Definition
About this task:

114 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

A holiday is treated differently than other days. It is recommended to program holidays at
the beginning of the year; this helps to modify floating holidays for the current year (Easter,
Thanksgiving, etc.). A holiday can be identified by a specific type (Hol 1, 2, 3, 4). The same day can
be defined as a holiday at one connection, but as a regular day in another connection.

1. On the Definition tab, select the Holiday button. The Holiday window appears.
2. To create a new holiday, select the New button.
3. To create a global holiday, proceed with the holiday definition. If you want to define a holiday
for a specific gateway/connection, select the gateway/connection from the list.
4. Assign a name to the holiday.
5. From the Date menu, select a the holiday date from the calendar.
6. Select the Recurring option if this is the case for the holiday you are defining.
Note: If the holiday is not a recurring holiday, you will have to reprogram it for the
following year. You can program holidays years in advance; but it is recommended to
review holidays on a yearly basis.
7. In the Holiday type section, select the type of the holiday you are defining. This gives you
flexibility when defining a holiday. For example, you may decide that a given day is a holiday
for a certain group of users, but it is a regular day for another group.
8. Click on the + Holiday list button to display a calendar for the next 12 months showing
holidays in one of the three colours identified in the legend.
9. If the holiday is to apply to specific sites only, the Selective Holiday checkbox must be
selected.
10. Drag & drop system, sites or global gateways to the appropriate holiday case. You can also

use the and buttons to move them.

Note: The legend is different from the one used to define schedules. For more
information, see Schedules Definition.

Schedules Definition
A schedule indicates when the system will execute certain operations such as automatically
unlocking doors, permitting access to employees, running automatic reports, monitoring inputs,
etc. It also determines when events are to be acknowledged or when to activate relays controlling
different functions (lighting, heat, etc.). You can use the same schedule in different menus, but it
is recommended to create a different schedule for each application, because it is much easier to
modify a particular schedule without affecting other applications.
Each schedule is composed of four intervals. Each interval has a starting and ending time. Each
of these intervals can be individually selected for the seven days of the week, and for 4 holidays.
EntraPass gives you the possibility of programming 99 schedules per connection .
Note: For more information, see System Parameters Configuration.

• System schedules : System schedules for global functions such as operators login schedules
and video triggers. These are not loaded in controllers.
• Multi-site schedules : These are defined per connection. You can define 99 schedules per
connection for such purposes as: power supervision (controllers), unlock schedule (doors),
Rex schedule (doors), activation mode (relay), monitoring schedule (input).

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 115

Defining a Schedule
1. From the EntraPass main window, click the Definition tab. Then click the Schedule button.
Note:
2. From the Schedule drop down list, select the schedule you want to modify or click the New
button to create a new one.
3. Assign a name (or modify an existing one) to the schedule. It is recommended to choose a
meaningful name.
4. You can click the Holiday button in the toolbar to view the list of holiday that are defined in
the system.
Note: EntraPass supports four types of holidays.
5. Specify the Start time : This is the scheduled time when the interval becomes valid. It will
become invalid when the end time has been reached.
6. Specify the End time : This is the scheduled time when the interval is no longer valid.
Note: Start and end times are in 24-hour time format; this gives a range from 00:00 to
24:00. For any interval, the end time must be greater than the start time.
7. Check the Days of the week during which this schedule interval will be valid. To do this, click
in the checkbox below each day.
8. Check the Holiday type ( Hol1, Hol2, etc.) column checkbox if you have defined four
holidays in the Holiday definition menu and you want this interval to be valid during a
holiday. You can also click on the + sign to display a calendar for the next 12 months showing
holidays in one of the three colours identified in the legend.
Note: The legend is different from the one used to define holidays. See Holiday
Definition for more information.

To Create a 2-day Continuous Interval

About this task:
To create an interval from Monday 20:00 (8:00 PM) to Tuesday 08:00 AM, the schedule must be
divided into two intervals:

1. First define an interval for Monday from 20:00 to 24:00;

2. Define a second interval for Tuesday from 00:00 to 08:00. The system considers these two
intervals as one continuous interval.

Extended Schedule
Note: Schedules with 20 intervals in stand-alone mode can be used with KT-400 and KT-400 V1
controllers only.

116 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Groups
To apply an operation to a group of controllers or components instead of individually, use this
section. You can use the Controller group creation, Door group creation, Relay group creation,
Access level groups grouping, to group a number of controllers, doors, relays, or access levels of
the same connection. Use the Input group creation, to group inputs of a controller connection.
You can use Floor group creation for operations including unlocking schedules and access levels.
Use Trigger group creation to configure trigger elements from a group of sub-components.

Access level groups grouping

About this task:
The Access level group dialog is used to group access levels of the same connection.

1. In the Group window, click the Access level group button.

2. Click the View hierarchy button to display all the sites defined in the system.
3. From the Gateway/connection list, select the connection or gateway from which you want to
group access levels.
4. Click the New button to create a new group access level, and assign a name in the English
field.
5. Select the check boxes that correspond to the access level group.

Trigger group creation

About this task:
Trigger groups are used to configure triggering elements from a group of sub-components.

1. On the Groups tab, click the Trigger group button to open the Trigger group dialog.
2. From the Trigger group list, select an existing group if you want to modify it, or click the New
button to create a new group. Then, enter the name of the group in the language section.
3. From the Component list, select a component. Select the boxes corresponding to the sub-
components you want as part of the trigger group.
4. Click the Save button.

Controller group creation

About this task:
Use the Controller group menu to group a number of controllers of the same connection.

1. In the Groups window, click the Controller button.

2. Click the View hierarchy button to display all the sites defined in the system.
3. From the Gateway/connection list, select the connection or gateway from which you want to
group controllers.
4. To create a new group of controllers, click the New button. To modify an existing group,
select one from the Controller group list, and enter the necessary information in the
language section.
5. From the list of controllers connected to the selected connection, select the controllers that
are to be assigned to the group.
Note: For more information about controllers, see Controllers Configuration.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 117

Door group creation
About this task:
Use the Door group menu to group doors of a specific connection. The door group can later be
used to carry out manual operations such as unlocking a group of doors.

1. In the Groups window, select the Door button.

2. Click the View hierarchy button to display all the sites defined in the system.
3. From the Gateway/connection list, select the connection or gateway from which you want to
group doors.
4. From the Door Group list, select a door group you want to modify, or click the New button to
create a new group, then enter the necessary information.
5. From the Door list , select the doors that must be assigned to the group.
Note: For more information about doors, see Doors Configuration.

Floor group creation

About this task:
Use this menu to group the floors that were created in the floor definition menu. Floor groups are
also used for various operations in the system such as: manual operations (unlocking schedules)
and access levels.

1. On the Groups tab, click the Floor Group button.

2. Click the View hierarchy button to display all the sites defined in the system, and from the
Gateway/connection list, select the connection or gateway from which you want to group
the floors.
3. From the Floor group list, select an existing group if you want to modify it, or click the New
button to create a new group. Then enter the name of the group in the language section.
4. From the list of defined floors that is displayed by the system, select the state column for the
floors you want to include in the group. Only floors that have the state field selected will be
enabled when:

- A manual unlock operation is done

- An “input” is programmed, for example, as a push button to enable floors for visitors (
Devices > Input definition menu > Elevator tab)
- Cardholders present their card to the card reader to enable floor selection when the
controller is operating in stand-alone mode (due to communication failure). Only the
floors marked with an “X” are available for selection.

5. From the Schedule column, select a schedule for each floor in the group.

- When assigning a floor group and an unlock schedule to an elevator door the system
scans the schedule column of that group and unlock each floor accordingly. For more
information, see Defining Elevator Doors.
- The schedule assigned to the floor group will be used to validate the access card and
its unlock schedule. This way, the floors will be unlocked only when the two schedules
(the floor and the access card) are valid.
Note: The unlock schedules are effective even when the controllers are in Fail
soft mode (communication failure).

118 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Input group creation
About this task:
Use the input group menu to group inputs of a controller connection. This input group can later be
used to carry out manual operations such as shunt on inputs.

1. In the Groups window, click the Input button.

2. Click the View hierarchy button to display all the sites defined in the system.
3. From the Gateway/connection list, select the connection for which you want to group
inputs.
4. From the Inputs group list, select an existing group to modify it, or click the New button to
create a new group, and enter the necessary information in the language section.
5. From the Inputs list, select the inputs that must be assigned to the group.
Note: For more information about inputs, see Input Configuration.

Relay group creation

About this task:
Use the Relay group menu to group relays of a specific connection. This relay group can later be
used to carry out manual operations such as temporarily activating relays.

1. In the Groups window, click the Relay button.

2. Click the View hierarchy button to display all the sites defined in the system.
3. From the Gateway/connection list, select the connection or gateway from which you want to
group relays.
4. From the Relay group list, select a relay group or click the New button to create a new group,
and enter the necessary information in the language section.
5. From the Relay list, select the relays that must be assigned to the group.
Note: For more information about relays, see Relay Configuration.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 119

Devices
Use this section to configure EntraPass applications, components, doors, the KTES, and integration
panels and components.
You can use Application Configuration to configure the minimum applications to implement
EntraPass. Included in this are procedures to define the general parameters, security parameters,
message controls, and alarm control filters.
Use EntraPass gateways configuration to configure a Multi-site Gateway. The site configuration
describes how to configure together controllers communicating over IP to create a virtual site.
Use the Connection configuration to determine which connection type is suitable for your gateway
and how to configure it, how to migrate your KT-1 Standalone backup data to an EntraPass
Server, and where to find the KT-1 or KT-2 controller unassigned controller list. The setting up
communication timing section explains why you should not alter the system’s communication
timings.
Use Controllers configuration to configure any of the Kantech door controllers: KT-100,
KT-200, KT-300, KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2. You can define an ioModule, and find a list of modules
communicating with a controller but unassigned, and find a list of readers and their compatible
controllers. You will also find instructions for configuring general parameters, changing controller
types, configuring specific controller parameters and wireless doors. Additional configuration
options include anti-passback, duress function, card count, and supervision functions. Depending
on the controller type, find out how to configure the controller for use as an elevator, and
configuring expansion modules.
To configure the Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) see the Kantech Telephone Entry System
(KTES) Configuration section. This system is a standalone system, or for larger installations,
integrates with EntraPass.
Use Doors configuration to define general parameters for a door, door keypad options, door
contact options, and Request to Exit (REX) options. Find out how to define card multi-swipe, double/
triple swipe actions, interlock options, elevator doors, and interlock options (mantrap). Find
procedures to describe how to define a door depending on your connection or gateway.
To activate alarms, control lighting, ventilation, and HVAC systems, use Relay configuration.
You can use Input configuration to define inputs. Door controllers monitor the state of input points,
and the number of inputs available depends on the type of controller. To control reader LEDs and
buzzer, use Output device configuration.
If you want to share the configuration of an ioSmart reader follow the procedure in Reader
Templates. EntraPass integrates with intrusion and fire panels; use the Integrated panel
configuration section to define these.

Application Configuration
The minimum configuration of an EntraPass software package includes a workstation application
(EntraPass monitoring application). EntraPass Special Edition application is a single-workstation
software. The software package comprises a number of applications including:
• A workstation application
• A server application,
• One multi-site Gateway application,
• And a number of utilities such as the Vocabulary editor, the Express Database utility, etc.

120 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Note: For a single gateway, limits are 2048 connections, 10,000 doors, 100,000 cards,
100,000 inputs and outputs.

• General parameters applicable to all computers where EntraPass is installed.

• Security parameters (applicable to all EntraPass applications).
• Filters (to define which gateways and EntraPass applications will send messages to the
Workstation application being configured).
• Message / alarm controls.

Configuring an Application
1. From the EntraPass main window, select the Devices tab, then click the Application button.
The Application main window appears.
2. Select Workstation EntraPass Special Edition.
3. Assign a name to the selected application. If you are running the software in two languages,
for example in English and French, you may assign a name in English and in French.

Defining Alarm Controls

1. Click the Alarms tab to define how alarms should be processed when the EntraPass
workstation is connected (or not) to the server.
Note: Alarms desktops are configured in the Desktop definition menu. For details, see
Alarms Desktop.
2. In the Alarm control section:

- Specify the number of alarms that will be kept on server when the EntraPass
workstation is off-line, that is, when it is not connected to the EntraPass module. The
EntraPass module buffers a maximum of 100,000 alarms per EntraPass workstation
(default: 500).
- Specify the number of alarms that will be kept on workstation . There is a maximum
of 100,000 alarms per EntraPass workstation. By default, it keeps 5,000 alarms.
Note: The EntraPass workstation will always keep newer events. To view older
events, you have to request a historical report. For details on requesting reports,
see Requesting Reports.

3. Specify if the server should keep newest or oldest alarms when its buffer reaches the defined
maximum number:

- Keep older alarms: The EntraPass module will keep the oldest alarms and archive the
newest alarms when the EntraPass workstation is off-line and when the Server buffer
is full.
- Keep newer alarms: The EntraPass module will keep the newest alarms and archive
the oldest alarms when the EntraPass workstation is off-line and when its buffer is full.
Alarms are processed on a first in - first out basis.

4. In the Clear Alarms Desktops section, specify when alarms should be cleared:

- On logout (on a regular logout by an operator).

- On workstation shutdown (when the EntraPass workstation is completely
shutdown).

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 121

 5. You may define the acknowledgement parameters. Checking Display alarm message
box will send an acknowledgement message box even if the operator is working in
another application. When this option is enabled, you have to enter the delay during which
the acknowledgement message box will be suspended. At the end of the delay, an alarm
message box will be displayed again requiring an acknowledgement from the operator.
6. You can check the Disable auto display of video views option to prevent video views from
being automatically displayed by this workstation. In fact, video views defined as alarms and
associated with components are automatically displayed when the component goes in alarm.
7. You may check the option Send message on acknowledge time-out to generate an
“acknowledge time-out” event when the operator fails to acknowledge an event during the
time-out delay specified in the Acknowledge time-out delay field. The message will be sent
to the Message desktop and the Alarms desktop.
Note: For more information on EntraPass desktops, see Alarms Desktop.

Defining Email Report Options

About this task:
EntraPass and the EntraPass Web offer users the ability to send reports using email capabilities.
This function can also be used with SMTP servers asking for a user authentication.

Note: SSL secured connections are not supported.

1. From the Application main window, select the Email reports tab.
2. In the Email server (SMTP or Exchange server) field, enter the IP address of the email
server that will be used for sending emails.
3. In the Email Port field, enter the number of the port that will be used for sending emails
(usually 25).
4. Select the encryption method.

- Unsecured (No SSL/TLS)

- Gmail(SSL/TLS)
- Secured (SSL/TLS)
- Office 365 (STARTTLS)

5. Enter a valid email address in the Email sender field. This email address will be used for
authenticating the email server.
6. Authentication: These options can be used to configure the authentication method.

- No authentication : No authentication will be applied.

- SMTP authentication : An authentication, sent on the SMTP port, must be validated
before the message is released.
- POP3 authentication : An authentication, sent on the POP3 port, must be validated
before the message is released.

7. User name : Enter a user name for the authentication process.

8. Password : Enter the password for the user name.EntraPass supports SMTP connection
passwords with a maximum length of 64 characters.
9. E-mail server (POP3) : Enter the POP3 server address for a POP3 authentication.
10. E-mail port (POP3) : Enter the POP3 port number for a POP3 authentication.
11. Send to : Recipient’s address for the message to be sent.

122 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 12. Test button: Send a test message with the selected parameters. According to the test results,
different error or success messages could be displayed.

Defining the host modem and keypad delays

About this task:
The host modem and the keypad delays are defined in the Configuration tab.

1. Edit the application name for both languages if needed.

2. In the Keypad delays section, enter the Inter-Digit Delay time (m:ss). It represents the
maximum delay permitted between each selection of a keypad key by a user. The maximum
delay is 4:15 minutes.
3. Enter the Time-out on keypad delay time (m:ss). It is set in seconds. It represents the
maximum time allowed for users to begin entering their personal identification number at a
keypad. The maximum delay is 4:15 minutes.
Note: The maximum time allowed for both the inter-digit and time-out on keypad delays
is 4 minutes and 15 seconds.
4. In the Delays (Not applicable to KT-200), use the up/down arrows, determine the number of
Invalid attempts before keypad is disabled. Users have a maximum of 255 invalid attempts
before the keypad is disabled.
5. Enter the Keypad disabled durationdelay (h:mm). The maximum duration allowed is 4
hours:15 minutes. When the counter reaches the maximum attempts counter, the keypad
will be disabled for all cards. It is disabled for the delay specified in the Keypad disabled
duration field.
6. Enter the Reset attempt counter delay (m:ss). When the delay specified in the Reset
attempt counter field is expired, the system will set the attempt counter to zero. The
maximum delay is 4:15 minutes. If the value entered is greater than the maximum allowed,
then the system will use the previous correct value.
7. Enter the multi-site gateway IP address or the Domain name.
8. Click the Host Modem Definition button to configure the modem communication options if
your gateway connects to the first controller of a remote site via modem.

Change site labels

1. Select a site information field from the list on the left.
2. Edit the site information captions. You can enter two different descriptions and use the Swap
button to swap the first and second captions.
3. Click OK to keep your changes or Cancel to return.

Connection configuration
About this task:
A connection is composed of 32 controllers attached to the same serial port. EntraPass Special
Edition supports 2 connections composed of KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2
controllers. Items displayed in the EntraPass Connection window vary depending on the selected
connection type. For example, if the selected connection type is an RS-232, an RS-232 tab will be
displayed to configure the corresponding serial port and baud rate. If the connection type is dial-
up, three extra tabs will be displayed for modem configuration.

Note: For a single gateway, limits are 2048 connections, 10,000 doors, 100,000 inputs and
100,000 outputs.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 123

 Seven types of connections are available: Direct (RS-232 and USB), Secure IP (KT-400), Secure
IP (KTES), Secure IP (IP Link), Secure IP (KT-1), Secure IP (KT-2), Ethernet (polling) and Dial-Up
(RS-232) modem. See the following table for the connection types and the gateways.
Table 15: Connection types and gateways
Multi-site Gateway
Connection Type (Note) Global Gateway (Note) KT-NCC (Note)
Direct (RS-232 or USB) Yes Yes Yes
Ethernet (polling) Yes Yes Yes
Secure IP (KT-2) Yes Yes Yes
Secure IP (KT-1) Yes Yes Yes
Secure IP (KT-400) Yes Yes Yes
Secure IP (KTES) Yes
Secure IP (IP Link) Yes
Dial-up (RS-232) Yes
modem

Note: The multi-site Gateway is available in all EntraPass Editions. Even though it is not
referred to as a multi-site Gateway, the EntraPass Special Edition includes an imbedded multi-
site Gateway.The KT-NCC and the Global Gateway are only available with EntraPass Global
Edition.

1. From the Devices window, click the Connection button.

2. Select a Site filter from the first list.
3. Select the Gateway.
4. From the Connection list, select the connection where the controller is located.
5. If you are defining a new Connection , click the New button. Assign a name to the new
connection and click the Save button.

6. Under the General tab:

- In the Hardware definition section , specify the number of controllers for the
connection. There may be up to 32 controllers for each connection. If the number
specified is greater than the maximum allowed, the system will set the value to 32.
Note: When the connection type is IP address (KTES), the number of KTES is
automatically limited to a single KTES per connection.
- Select a Time zone: This setting allows events from the remote site to display at local
gateway time on EntraPass workstations located in different time zones.

Setting up communication timing

CAUTION: Do not use the Communication timing option. If you need to set up the
communication delay and polling frequency, call Kantech Technical Support Help
Desk. Inappropriate use of this option may cause serious problems to the system. The
Communication timings window shows the actual default settings. They must be preserved
unless advised otherwise by Kantech.

Configuring a Direct RS-232 Connection Type

This type of connection can be configured in EntraPass Special Edition to communicate via a RS-232
gateway.

124 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

When selecting the Direct RS-232 connection type option in the General tab, a RS-232 tab will
become available.

• Select the Communication Port COM.

• Select the Controller’s loop baud rate . The default rate is 19200 baud.

Configuring an IP device connection type

About this task:
Configure this type of connection in the EntraPass Workstation to communicate using a Kantech IP
Link, a KT-400, a KT-1, a KT-2, or a KTES.

Note: For more information about configuring the Kantech IP Link, refer to the Kantech IP Link
Installation Guide, DN1670. For more information about the KT-400, refer to the KT-400 Ethernet
Four-Door Controller Installation Guide, DN2003. For more information about the KT-1, refer to
the KT-1 One-Door Controller Installation Guide, DN2186.
If you choose Secure (IP KT-400) as a connection type, the primary controller must be a
KT-400.

For the KTES, the only controller in the loop must be a KTES. For more information about the
KTES, see the KTES Installation Manual, DN1769.

1. From the Connection list, select a connection type. If you select one of the following devices:
KT-400, KT-1, KT-2, IP Link, or KTES, the following three tabs become available:

- IP Device IP configuration
- IP Device Automated Connection
- IP Device Parameters

- MAC address: Enter the device MAC address. The first 6 characters in the MAC
address (00-50-F9) cannot be modified.
- The Online box is selected by default.

- Obtain IP address automatically: Select this option when configuring the

device with a Reserved DHCP IP address.
- Use the following IP Address: Select this option when you want to assign a
static IP address to the device. When selected, the following three parameters
become available.
- IP Address: The static IP address is provided by the System Administrator.
- Subnet Mask: This address is provided by the System Administrator.
- Gateway (Router): This address is provided by the System Administrator.
- DNS server address: This address is provided by the System Administrator
(for Kantech IP Link, KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2 only).
- Protocol: Used to specify the communication protocol, UDP or TCP.
- Port:
- For TCP: 18802 for the host site. Not required for the remote site.
- For UDP: Port 18810 is automatically assigned to the device by default. It
should not be modified unless the IP device is at a remote location, like on a
WAN.
Note: Use port 18802 with KT-400, KTES, KT-1, KT-2, and IP Link.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 125

 - The multi-site Gateway IP address is used or click Override Gateway IP Address.

- Auto Discovered IP: This is a read only field that automatically displays the
gateway IP address. When the radio button is selected, the system overrides
the IP address and reloads the connections with that new information.
Note: The Auto Discovered IP field is always filled and updated with
an IP address even when not selected.For a new gateway, the Auto
Discovered IP radio button is not selected by default. The IP Address
field is still the default selected option.
- IP address: Enter the gateway computer IP address.
- Domain name: If you do not have the gateway IP address, you can enter the
domain name provided by the System Administrator (for Kantech IP Link,
KTES, KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2 only) .
Note: You must select to either enter the IP address or the domain
name. You cannot enter both at the same time (for Kantech IP Link,
KTES, KT-1, KT-2, and KT-400 only) .

- Test DNS: After you enter the domain name, click the Test DNS button to display the
corresponding IP address (for Kantech IP Link, KTES, KT-1, KT-2, and KT-400 only).

2. Move to the IP Device Automated Connection tab if you are in a WAN environment.

- The Broadcast configuration box must be checked at all times.

- Private IP Address (LAN): Will assign the IP address automatically.

- Public IP Address (WAN): This IP address should have been provided by your
internet provider. This corresponds to the IP of the remote site.
- Domain Name (WAN): This information should be provided by the System
Administrator. This corresponds to the IP of the remote site.

- Enable KT-Finder diagnostic for IP device: Check this box if you want to use the KT-
Finder as a configuration and troubleshooting tool.

3. Move to the IP Device Parameters tab to configure security and communication

parameters.

- Encryption key: type a 16-digit hexadecimal code to encrypt your site.

- Controller’s loop baud rate: Enter the controller’s loop baud rate.
Note: For a KT-200, the maximum baud rate is 19200.
- In the Delays section:

- Heartbeat frequency (mm:ss): Enter the frequency to which you want the IP
device to send a signal to the gateway to indicate it is online (00:15 to 10:00).
- Fail to report after (mm:ss): Enter the delay before acknowledging
communication failure (01:30 to 59:59).
- Fail-soft delay on gateway communication failure (mm:ss): Enter the delay
before the IP device will consider communication with a controller has been
lost and the controller is in fail-soft mode.

126 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Retry Count: Enter the number of times the IP device will try to communicate
with a controller within the delay setup in the previous parameter before
acknowledging communication failure (1 to 15).
- Maximum wait on send command (s.cc): When applicable, enter the
maximum delay period that the gateway will allow for the IP device to
acknowledge reception of a command from an EntraPass workstation (1.00 to
9.99).

Configuring an Ethernet Polling Connection Type

This type of connection can be configured in EntraPass Special Edition to communicate via the
network (Lantronix).
When selecting the Ethernet (Polling) option in theGeneraltab, an IP device tab will become
available.

• Enter the terminal server IP addressand Portnumber.

• Select the communication protocol:

- TCP if the communication is made with the gateway through a terminal server using
TCP protocol. In this case, you have to configure the terminal server. To do this, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions or refer to the Terminal server documentation.
- UDP (User Datagram Protocol), uses the IP protocol to send datagrams from one
Internet application to another. It is called “connectionless” because the sender and
the receiver are not required to connect before the transmission of data. Check this
option if the connection you are configuring uses this protocol.

Configuring a Dial-Up (RS-232) Modem Connection Type

About this task:
If you specified Dial-up (RS-232) modem from the Connection type drop-down list in the General
tab, you will be able to access three extra tabs: Modem options, Modem schedule parameters and
Miscellaneous.

1. Select the Modem options tab to set outgoing call behaviour to site modem.
Note: The Remote Baud rateshould not be changed. If you are uncertain about modem
setup parameters, consult your network administrator for the settings which apply to
your particular hardware configuration.

- Enter the Code to access an outside line (if applicable).

- Enter the Remote phone number .
Note: For reliability and configuration consistency, Kantech currently supports
the US Robotics Sportster external modem only.The Modem init settings cannot
be changed.
- Select the Phone line type: Tone or Pulse .
- Set the Number of rings before answer that will define the number of rings before
the modem picks up the call. This option is valid whenever ring schedules are not in
effect.
- Set theAnswer on first ring scheduleoption to configure the time interval during
which site modem will be allowed to answer on one ring.
- Set the Number of retries . This will set the number of calls the modem will attempt
to make before giving up.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 127

 2. Move to the Modem Schedule parameters tab to set time intervals during which the
gateway or site connects to remote sites or gateways (through modem calls) in order to
perform specific tasks.

- Click on the Retrieve site events button to bring up the schedule selection window.
Select the schedule that best corresponds to the time requirements set out for this
task. For more information on defining schedules, see Schedules Definition.
- Repeat this step for If data is modified since last , Report events under prioritycall
type and Report events automatically .
- Define the delay before the system will Fail to report after (mm:ss) .
Note: To schedule the reporting of events under priority call types, first define
Priority call types for items such as doors, inputs and controllers.

3. Click the Miscellaneous tab to configure how modems handle site incoming and outgoing
calls.

- Check the Use a callback connection option to force the gateway modem to
hang up after initial connection to the remote site modem and to stand by for an
acknowledgement call from the remote modem. You may also want to customize the
Fail to callback delay. Default is set to 1:30 (1 min 30 secs.).
- This option only applies to the KTES. Check the Enable multiple KTES line sharing
option to change the Identification delay (ss) between each KTES. The time range
value is between 00 and 20 seconds.
- Select the Primary host modem in the drop down list. If available, select a backup
modem in the Secondary host modem. This setting is useful when the primary
modem is busy or fails to take the call.
- Check After reception stay online for if you wish to limit in-call time to a
predetermined amount of time which can be set to anywhere between 00.03.00 and
23.59.59.
- Check the Call immediately when secondary controller communication failure to
be alerted in the event that a secondary controller fails to send data to the primary
controller (the one carrying the modem).
- Check the Call immediately when buffer 70% full to force download of a site
controller’s event buffer as soon as it reaches 70% capacity.
Note: Do not click the Remote modem delays button. All values are factory-set
for optimum performances with the supported US Robotics modems. Settings
SHOULD NOT be edited unless recommended by Kantech.

Migrating KT-Standalone backup data to an EntraPass server

About this task: You can migrate backup data from a KT-Standalone controller to an EntraPass
server; compatible controllers include the KT-1, firmware v2.01 and higher, and the KT-401,
firmware v2.00 and higher. The backup includes the following data:

• Controller definitions
• Door definitions
• Relay definitions
• Schedule definitions
• Holiday definitions

128 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • User definitions
• Action scheduler

Note: The following features are not included in the migration.

• Time zone
• Alarm panel integration
• Multi-swipe settings on exit door.
• Cards #2 to #5.
• Door access exceptions
• Interval #5 of schedules.

Table 16: Import KT-Standalone icon

Icon Description
KT-Standalone: selects backup files from a KT-1, firmware v2.01 and higher, and
the KT-401, firmware v2.00 and higher, standalone controllers.

Before you migrate your data, you must configure EntraPass to use the same card format,
Global Card Format, and PIN length as the standalone settings:

1. Click the Options tab, and click Display Format.

2. In the Default card format area, select the Card #1 format to match the Card #1 format in
the standalone controller, repeat for card #2 to card #5.
Note: If card #1 and card #2 use a different display format, EntraPass migrates to card
#4 or card #5.
3. In the Global Card Format area, choose the appropriate global card format.
4. Select the appropriate PIN length from the Number of PIN digits (KT-400 and KT-1) list.

To migrate backup data, complete the following steps:

1. On the Devices tab, click Connection.

2. Click the KT-Standalone icon on toolbar to display the KT-standalone backup CFG files for the
KT-1, firmware v2.01 and higher, and the KT-401, firmware v2.00 and higher.
3. Select a file to see the backup information: the Card #1 format to match the Card #1 format
in the standalone controller, repeat for card #2 to card #5.

a. Backup date and time

b. Controller type
c. Controller type
d. Controller MAC/Serial number
e. Controller firmware version
f. Amount of schedules
g. Amount of holidays
h. Amount of action scheduler
i. Amount of doors
j. Amount of relays
k. Amount of input

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 129

 4. A window displays the message Are you sure you want to import the following data?. If
you click Yes import data, the following message displays, Migration completed. Click OK. If
you click No, the message window closes.

Controllers configuration
Controllers provide audiovisual feedback on the access decision. Typically, a red/green light (LED)
indicator on the reader informs the cardholder that the door is unlocked or that access has been
denied. A local door alarm can be installed to provide an audible warning if the door is forced open
or remains open after an access.
The controller definition tells the system how a controller is being used and what devices are
associated with it: (doors, input zones, relays and output devices). Controllers may be defined
during a system or connection configuration; or in the controller definition menu, by selecting
either the controller button (Devices > Controller) or by using Express Setup program. EntraPass
supports the following controllers: KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2. These provide
the ability to activate local functions associated with a controller. The number of devices associated
with a controller varies according to the controller type. The following table summarizes the basic
components associated with each type of Kantech controller.
Table 17: Kantech controller components
Type Doors Wireless Relays Input zones Auxiliary
doors outputs
(licensed)
KT-100 1 not supported 4 4 2
KT-200 2 not supported 2 16 4
KT-300 2 not supported 2 8 4
KT-400 4 8 4 16 16
KT-1 1 8 2 5 5
KT-2 2 8 2 8 5

Unassigned modules
To find a list of modules commuicating with a controller but unassigned, click the Request
Unasigned Modules icon. A window with the following information displays:
• Module Type: ioSmart or ioModule.
• Module Serial Number: of the module.

To define an unassigned module, right-click the module, and click Assign module, it automatically
populates the module’s data into the controller’s configuration page in the ioModule tab, or the
ioSmart tab. If required, rename the module, or change the configuration details, and click Save.
When you define the module, the system removes it from the list.

Configuring general parameters for Kantech controllers

1. Click the Devices tab, click Controller, and, from the Site filter list, select a site filter.
2. Select the Gateway. For information about configuring a gateway, see Gateway
Configuration.
3. From the Connection list, select the connection where the controller is located. For more
information about configuring a connection, see Connection Configuration.
4. From the Controller list, select the controller you want to define. Once selected, the language
section is enabled. You may rename the selected controller.

130 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 5. From the KT controller type list, select a controller type. Once selected, the language section
is enabled. You may rename the selected controller.

- Assign a meaningful name to the controller in the language section, and click the Save
icon. After you save, the Controller type list is disabled.
- The system prompts you to use the Express Setup program. Click Yes to continue. If
you click No, you must manually configure these devices in their respective definition
menus (doors, relays, inputs and auxiliary outputs).
Note: In EntraPass, you can install two types of readers on the same controller
(primary and secondary). This feature is only available with KT-100 and KT-300.
For KT-400, KT-1, or KT-2, 8 different reader types can be loaded (this feature is
supported with firmware 1.06 and later).On a given controller, all reader types
must be the same (Wiegand or ABA).

6. Select the reader installed on your controller from the Reader type lists. Check Table 18 for
the reader types and the controller types.

Note: The icon allows you to install a custom driver for a specific controller. Use this
icon to add the driver in the Reader+ Driver table, making it available the next time you
want to configure a new controller.

Table 18: Reader types

KT-400/KT-1/
Reader Types KT-100 KT-200 KT-300 KT-2
ABA with Type CNPID Cards Yes Yes Yes
BC-201 - CF100 Yes Yes Yes
BC-201 Bar code with Polaris Cards Yes Yes Yes Yes
CARDKEY Yes Yes Yes
CASI-RUSCO 26/28-Bit Wiegand Yes Yes Yes
CHECKPOINT Sielox Format Yes Yes Yes
CHUBB Yes Yes Yes
DORADO ABA clock and data Yes Yes Yes
DORADO ABA Wiegand Yes Yes Yes
DORADO EMPI 26-Bit Yes Yes
DORADO EMPI 34-Bit Yes Yes Yes
FIPS 201 75-bit no expiry date Yes
FIPS 201 75-bit with expiry date Yes
h20302, 37-Bit Yes Yes Yes Yes
HID CORPORATE 1000 Generic Yes Yes Yes Yes
HID iClass 37-Bit No Party Yes
HID KSF (Kantech Security Format) Yes Yes Yes Yes
HUGHES 36-Bit - CF104 Yes Yes Yes
INDALA old 27-Bit Format Yes Yes Yes

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 131

Table 18: Reader types
KT-400/KT-1/
Reader Types KT-100 KT-200 KT-300 KT-2
INTERCON Yes Yes Yes
ioProx Dual Driver (26-Bit and XSF) Yes Yes Yes Yes
ioProx Kantech 26-Bit Wiegand Yes Yes Yes Yes
ioProx Kantech XSF Format Yes Yes Yes Yes
ioProx UK 31-Bit Wiegand Yes
KRONOS Card with Bar Code Reader Yes Yes Yes
Mifare 32-Bit CSN Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mifare 34-Bit AID 517A Yes Yes Yes
Mirage 135 Yes Yes Yes
NCS Yes Yes Yes
Northern 32-Bit with NR1 Reader Yes Yes Yes
Northern 34-Bit with Hughes Reader Yes Yes Yes
Paramount Farm 32-Bit Wiegand Yes Yes Yes Yes
Polaris 1 - CF101 Yes Yes Yes
Polaris 1 with 10-Digit Cards Yes Yes Yes
Polaris 1 with 16-Digit Cards Yes Yes Yes
Polaris 1 with Polaris Cards Yes Yes Yes Yes
Polaris 2 ABA with 10-Digit Cards Yes Yes Yes
Polaris 2 ABA with 16-Digit Cards Yes Yes Yes
Polaris 2 ABA with Polaris Cards Yes Yes Yes Yes
Polaris 2KP ABA with 10-Digit Cards Yes Yes Yes
Polaris 2KP ABA with 16-Digit Cards Yes Yes Yes
Polaris 2KP ABA with Polaris Cards Yes Yes Yes Yes
Polaris 32/35/37 CHRS - CF103 Yes Yes Yes
RBH 50-Bit Card Driver Yes
SCHLAGE 1030 and 1040 Card Format Yes Yes Yes
Sensor 26-Bit Wiegand Standard Yes Yes Yes Yes
Sensor 34-Bit Wiegand Yes Yes Yes Yes
SFT-R50 26-Bit Yes Yes Yes
Shadow PROX Yes Yes Yes Yes
Siteguard Format Yes Yes Yes
Wiegand 26/28-Bit - CF102 Yes Yes Yes
WLS Wireless 26-Bit Yes Yes Yes
WLS Wireless Shadow Prox and HID Yes Yes Yes

132 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 7. Select the keypad installed on your controller from the Keypad type list. Check Table 19 for
the keypad types and the controller types.
Table 19: Keypad types
KT-400/KT-1/
Keypad Types KT-100 KT-200 KT-300 KT-2
KP-1003H Yes Yes Yes
KP-500, KP-2000, KP-2500, KP-3000 Yes Yes Yes
ioProx with Integrated Keypad (8-Bit Yes Yes Yes Yes
Burst)
POL-2KP - 5-Digit Integrated Keypad Yes Yes Yes Yes
8. Use the Disable controller polling when you need to put the controller in disable mode.
In disable mode, the controller is never polled and all status requests from this specific
controller send a message that this controller is disabled.
Note: This option can be used when a controller is removed temporarily but must not be
deleted. For example, if the controller is under repair. It also allows operators to easily
set up the software before the physical installation is completed.
9. Select the Vital LED mode (for KT-1 and KT-2 only). For more information, refer to the KT-1
Installation Guide or to the KT-2 Installation Guide.
10. Select between On demand and Always on for the Status LED (for KT-1 or KT-2 only). For
more information, refer to the KT-1 Installation Guide or to the KT-2 Installation Guide.
11. Select a Graphic and Video view to which the gateway is assigned, if applicable. The video
view is activated only if the video feature is enabled in EntraPass.

Changing controller type

About this task:
Controller types can be updated to newer controllers without resetting the controller configuration.
To change the controller type, complete the following steps:

1. Click the Devices tab, click Controller, and, from the Controller list, select a controller.
2. Select a new controller type from the KT controller type list.
3. Click the Save icon. A warning message asks if you want to continue. Click Yes to continue.
This launches the Express Setup window.
4. Any undefined components can be configured using the Express Setup window. For
example, when changing from a KT-1 to a KT-400, the undefined doors can be configured.
5. Click OK to complete the process.
6. During the process, the option Disable controller polling is automatically selected. Ensure
that this option is cleared.

Result
This function only supports updating controllers to newer controllers. The rules for updating
controller types are summarized in the following table.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 133

Table 20: Updating controller types
Original controller type Supported update controller types
KT-100 KT-300, KT-1, KT-2, KT-400
KT-200 KT-300, KT-2, KT-400
KT-300 KT-2, KT-400
KT-1 KT-2, KT-400
KT-2 KT-400

Note: When converting from a KT-100 or a KT-1 to a KT-400, exit readers are converted to a
second door.
It is not possible to change the controller type if a KT-IP has been used.

Combus and SPI modules associated with a controller cannot be transferred. To change the
controller type, definitions for combus and SPI modules must first be removed.

Configuring Specific Controller Parameters

1. Click the Controller tab (KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-400 or KT-1/KT-2) from the Controller
window.
2. Enter the controller serial number in the Serial number field. Usually, the number is found
on the controller label. The field is defined to accept only numeric characters, except for
the first character which may be an a or A. If a lower case character is entered, the system
converts it to a capital letter.
3. For KT-400 only:

- To configure SPI modules, see Expansion Modules Setup.

- To configure the elevator floor associations, see Defining the KT-400 Elevator Floor
Associations.

4. For KT-300 only:

- To configure Combus Modules, see KT-300 Combus Modules.

- To configure the elevator floor associations, see Defining the KT-300 Elevator Floor
Associations.

5. For KT-200 only:

- To configure KT-200 Auxiliary devices , see Configuring KT-200 Auxiliary Devices.

- To define REB-8 relays, see Defining REB-8 Relays.
- To configure REB-8 elevator controllers, see Programming REB-8 Elevator Controllers.
- To configure KT-2252 elevator controllers, see Programming KT-2252 Elevator
Controllers.

6. Enter the Wait for second access card delay. The maximum time allowed is 2 minutes and
7 seconds. This feature is useful for secured areas where two cards are required to access a
secured door. If the value entered is greater than the maximum allowed, the system will use
the existing value.

134 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 7. In the Keypad escape key drop-down list, choose a keypad escape key if applicable. This
feature is associated with PIN numbers. When a user enters a wrong number, he/she may
press the escape key and re-enter the PIN, without incrementing the number of attempts.
8. In the EOL resistor (5.6K) drop-down list, select the resistor type used with your system.
By default, this choice is set to None . This feature is used as a supervision device for all
inputs. In fact, if this feature is enabled and if an input is disconnected, an alarm message is
generated and sent to the Alarm message desktop (or other desktop configured to receive
such events).
9. Select a value from the RS-485 baud rate list.
10. In the Reader template list, click the more options button to select a reader template.
Selecting a template ensures any reader connected to the contoller inherits the template
properities.
11. Click the Save button.

Configuring the status relay activations

Click the Status relay tab to program a relay or group of relays that activates when an event

occurs. Click the button to select a relay or a group of relays (not available for KT-100).

Configuring licensed wireless doors

Note: Before you begin, install the Licensed Door feature. For more information, see System
Registration.
The licensed wireless door feature supports the addition of ASSA ABLOY wireless doors in
EntraPass. For more information about configuring the Assa Abloy interface, refer to the
Application Note, ASSA ABLOY Wireless Locks integration (AH30 hub, serial).
To configure your EntraPass installation for licensed wireless doors, complete the following steps:

1. Click Devices, click Controller, and select the controller you want to configure. If the
controller supports licensed wireless doors the Licensed door icon is available on the
Controller window toolbar.
2. Click the Licensed doors icon.
3. If no integrated panel has previously been linked to that controller, EntraPass automatically
creates a new integrated panel.
4. Click Configuration to open the Licensed Doors window. The number of Purchased licences
and Available (remaining) licenses is displayed.
5. To add a door, click +.
6. You must input a description of the door and the device address. The device address (EAC
address) has been configured during the configuration of the wireless lock. For more
information about configuring the Assa Abloy interface, refer to the Application Note, ASSA
ABLOY Wireless Locks integration (AH30 hub, serial).
7. Select the correct box to indicate whether the door has a contact (to indicate open or close)
or a REX (Request To Exit) functionality.
8. To delete a door, click Delete and click OK.
9. If an integration panel has previously been linked to the selected controller, the Licensed
Doors window displays, and you can edit existing wireless doors.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 135

 10. To view the status of the wireless lock, select the wireless lock from the Operation/
Integrated Panel. The icon signifies if the device is operational. To view details, double-click
on the device. The possible states are listed in the table.
Table 21: Device states
Parameter Possible States
Door Number
Tamper • Tamper in alarm
• Tamper in normal condition
• [Unknown State: NOTHING DISPLAYED]
Device communication • Device Online, as per Hub Status
status • Device Offline, as per Hub Status
• [Unknown State: NOTHING DISPLAYED]
Door side • Door side: Inside
• Door side: Outside
• Door side: Both inside and outside
• [Unknown State: NOTHING DISPLAYED]
Handle State • Handle not used
• Handle used
• [Unknown State: NOTHING DISPLAYED]
Key Cylinder State • Key cylinder not used
• Key cylinder used
• Key cylinder is in Specific position: 1 (or 2 or 3)
• [Unknown State: NOTHING DISPLAYED]
Lock State • Door unlocked
• Door locked
• Door lock secured
• Door lock jammed
• [Unknown State: NOTHING DISPLAYED]
Door State • Door opened
• Door closed
• [Unknown State: NOTHING DISPLAYED]
Protocol version
Version Number
Vendor ID

136 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Table 21: Device states
Parameter Possible States
Mac Address
Hub Mac Address
On abnormal behaviour • Controller firmware does not support this integration
• No Reader Driver available
• Door not configured
• Input not configured

Note:
Licensed wireless doors can be identified by a blue icon. Wired doors have a green icon
in EntraPass.
There are less configurable parameters for wireless doors when compared to wired
doors. There are also some differences to the operation of wireless doors.

- Some manual features such as Arm Door, Disarm Door, Door contact back to
schedule and Disable Door Contact are not available for wireless locks.
- Wireless locks go into a sleep mode to conserve power. When you send a manual
operation to these locks you must wake up the lock (by interacting with the lock) for
the manual operation to be processed. This is also true of unlock schedules which
require the lock to be woken up to operate correctly. To wake a lock you may need to
swipe your card twice.
- On initial power up the Tamper State will be reported as Unknown until the lock
cover has been opened.
- If a wireless hub looses power it will not retain the last status of it wireless locks.
- The buzzer and LED cannot be controlled through EntraPass.
- When switching the length of the pin code, the wireless lock must be configured
through it's own interface.
- The current status of the lock is only updated on an event.
- The wireless lock cannot be operated when disconnected from the controller.
- The lock state refers to deadbolt of he lock. When the dead bolt is engaged the lock
state becomes unknown.
- Currently only 26-bit drivers are supported for wireless locks.

Note: If you go to Devices>Integrated Panel>Print, you can see the number of licensed
doors associated with that integrated panel.
Currently, wireless licensed doors are only supported for KT-1 and KT-400 controllers.

Defining Controller Options

About this task:
The Option tab enables operators to configure such features as:

• Anti-passback (for synchronizing entry/exit readers)

• Duress function (for defining a panic button)
• Card count options (for specifying cards in an area), etc.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 137

 Note: The anti-passback option works with entry/exit readers. It allows security
administrators to keep track of the number of monitored cardholders in an area. It is
local to each controller defined by corresponding entry/exit readers. A relay can be
activated when the counter reaches the number of cards defined to be inside the area;
the relay is disabled when the number of cards in the area goes below the specified
number.

1. From the Controller window, click the Option tab to define anti-passback, duress and card
count options.
2. Determine the Duress options . When a duress option is selected, you have to assign a
duress key, that is a silent panic key.

- Duress on access granted : This option enables the duress key when access is
granted.
- Duress on access denied : This option enables the duress key, even when access is
denied.

3. Select a duress key from the Keypad duress key drop-down list.
Note: For added security, you may select both options.
4. From the Anti-passback options , select the anti-passback option from the Type drop-down
list: when an anti-passback option is enabled, a card cannot be used on an exit door unless it
has been used on a corresponding entry door.

- None : The anti-passback option is disabled.

- Soft anti-passback : This option allows a cardholder to use an entry (or exit) reader
more than once without using the corresponding exit (or entry) reader. Only an “
Access granted - Passback bad location ” event is sent to the Message desktop.
- Hard anti-passback : A card used at an entry reader will not be able to access the
same entry reader again until it has used the corresponding exit reader. Only an “
Access denied - Passback bad location ” event is sent to the Message desktop.
- Controller local area: This selection enables the Controller local area tab. This
option is only functional with the KT-400; the Controller Local Area tab will only
appear with a KT-400 (see Defining the KT-400 Controller Local Areas for more details).

5. In the Forgive schedule section, click the three-dot button to set a schedule for resetting the
anti-passback option on all other cards.
Note: The Forgive Schedule section is enabled only when Soft anti-passback or Hard
anti-passback item is selected.
6. In the Miscellaneous section, indicate options for Enable fail-soft delay(10-255 s) . During
a fail-soft mode, the controller operates in stand-alone mode, following a communication
failure.
7. Enter the 32-bit card family code (optional). You can locate this hexadecimal code on the
access card.
8. In theCard countoptions , use the up or down controls to set the maximum card number.
The maximum card number allowed is 2,147,483,647. The system keeps track of the number
of monitored cards that are in the monitored area and activates a relay when the count is
reached. When users exit the area, the counter decrements and the relay will eventually reset
when the count is smaller than the value defined.

138 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 9. You may configure the system to activate a single relay or a group of relays when the

maximum count is reached. Click the button to select the relay or relay group that will be
activated when the number is reached.
Note: The Activate relay section is enabled only when Soft anti-passback or Hard anti-
passback item is selected.

Supervision Schedule
1. Select a schedule for the Power supervision (not available for KT-1).
2. Select a schedule for the Tamper switch (not available for KT-100 and KT-300).
Note: Please refer to Schedules Definition for more details about schedule
configuration.

KT-200
Defining KT-200 Auxiliary Devices
1. From the Controller definition window, select the KT-200 tab.
2. In the Auxiliary devices section, select the type of devices used with KT-200 controller.

- Check the REB-8 relay option if REB-8 expansion boards are used as relays. Only 16
relays can be defined. If two REB-8 are added, the last two relays (the 17th and 18th
relays) can be used to perform different actions. You have to specify the additional
actions for the two relays in the Extra relay drop-down list.
- Check the KT-2252 elevator controller and REB-8 relay option if KT-2252 are used
as elevator controllers and REB-8 are used as relays on the same door controller. A
maximum of four KT-2252 can be connected to the controller.
- Check the REB-8 ElevatorController option if REB-8 are used for elevator control. Up
to four REB-8 can be used for elevator control.
Note: When an elevator controller option is checked, an Elevator tab appears
beside the KT-200 tab.

Programming REB-8 elevator controllers

About this task:
REB-8 relay expansion boards may be used as a cost-efficient alternative for elevator control. With
a REB-8 expansion board added to a KT-200, the software may control up to two elevator cabs per
controller.

1. In the KT-200 definition window, select the REB-8 elevator controller option. When the
option is selected, an Elevator tab appears beside the KT-200 tab. The REB-8 definition
section is only active when REB-8 are used as relays.
2. Select the Elevator tab to configure the REB-8 elevator controllers. Up to four REB-8 elevator
controllers are supported.
3. Specify the number of REB-8 that are installed on the controller. The selection is cumulative.
For example, if four REB-8 are installed, the first three checkboxes have to be checked also.
The following table summarizes how REB-8 are assigned to floors and to elevator cabs.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 139

Table 22: REB-8 assigned to floors and elevators
Number of REB-8 Number of Floors Number of Cabs
1 1 to 8 Cab 1
2 9 to 16 Cab 1
3 1 to 8 Cab 2
4 9 to 16 Cab 2

Note: The Inputs column refers to the REB-8 terminals. When floors have been defined
(in the Floor menu), the Floors column contains the floors that are associated with the
inputs.
4. In the Floors column, select the floors associated with REB-8 controller terminals. For
information about floor definition and door group definition, see Doors Configuration.
Note: There is no floor confirmation when an REB-8 is used as an elevator controller.

Defining REB-8 Relays

About this task:
When REB-8 are used as relays, you need to specify how many relays are installed on the KT-200.
The controller can handle a maximum of 16 accessible relays and already provides 2 on-board
relays.

1. Under the KT-200 tab, select the REB-8 relay option if REB-8 are used as relays.
2. If they are used with the KT-2252 elevator controller, select the KT-2252 elevator controller
and REB-8 relay option. In either case, the REB-8 definition section is enabled.
3. In the REB-8 Definition section, select the appropriate option: No REB-8, One REB-8 or Two
REB-8.
4. If two REB-8 are added (for a total of 18 relays), the last two relays can be used to perform
different actions: select the use for the extra relays from the Extra relay drop-down list.
5. Select the Status relay tab to program a relay or group of relays that will be activated when
an event occurs.

KT-300
Defining the KT-300 Elevator Floor Associations
Note: The Elevator tab displays only when Combus modules have been defined as elevators
under the KT-300 tab.

Associating Floor Numbers

1. In the Controller window, click the elevator tab to define the floor associations.
2. From the Floors drop-down menu, for each number select a floor.
3. Click Save .
Note: To define floors, see Floor Definition.

KT-300 combus modules

About this task:
Five Combus modules can be connected to a KT-300:

• KT-PC4108 (8-zone input expansion module). This module has a tamper contact input.
• KT-PC4116 (16-zone input expansion module). This module has a tamper contact input.

140 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • KT-PC4204 (4-relay/power supply expansion module). It has a tamper contact input and also
includes a built-in 12VDC, 1A power supply for field devices.
• KT-PC4216 (16-zone output expansion module). It can be used for elevator control, although
additional hardware may be required.
• KT-LCD3 (Kantech 32-character liquid crystal display). The LCD is green (normal status), red
(power failure) and yellow (trouble).

1. If a Combus module is installed to the KT-300 controller, click the Combus module
configuration button. Undefined Combus terminals are identified by red flags/bullets. Once
a module has been defined, it is identified by a green flag.
2. To define a module, select one, then click the Define button (lower part of the window). The
Enter Combus module serial number message box appears.
3. Enter the module’s serial number, then click OK.
Note: To obtain this number, you have to activate the Tamper switch or to press any
key on the keyboard. The Combus serial number is displayed in the Desktop Message.
4. Assign names to the modules in the language fields.
5. Check the options related to the module you want to configure (if these are displayed in the
window).
Note: Usage options of a module vary according to the selected Combus module. For
example, installing the KT3-LCD and checking the options Combus low power and Display
date and time will allow the KT-300 to report Combus low power conditions and to
display the date and time.

Table 23: The options associated with each module

Combus type Options Additional options
KT3-LCD Combus low power, display date and time No additional options
KT-PC4108 Tamper alarm, Combus low power 8-input module
KT-PC4116 Tamper alarm, Combus low power 16-input module
KT-PC4204 Tamper alarm, Combus low power, Low Used as relays (1-4)
battery, Power failure, lower auxiliary
power
KT-PC4216 Tamper alarm, Combus low power Used as outputs
6. Check the Combus low power option so that the KT-300 will report any Combus low power
condition.
7. Check Display date and time option so that LCD can display the date and time.
8. When you have finished configuring the Combus module, click the OK button to go back to
the Status relay tab.
9. Associate a Local activation relay for Power failure, Combus failure and Combus low
power . If you want to assign a specific relay, you may click the three-dot button and select a
specific relay or group of relays.
Note: To configure local activation relay, you must configure relays (Devices > Relays),
and then select specific relays for local activation.
10. Under Priority call type, assign the call type option that best suits failure event reporting. To
access the Priority call type feature, the site connection type must be set to Modem.
Note: For more information, see Connection Configuration.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 141

KT-400
Configuring the KT-400 expansion modules
About this task:
The KT-400 support expansion modules through its SPI expansion port. The SPI port is a 6-
conductor cable bus to which several expansion modules are daisy-chained to add inputs, outputs,
and relays.

Note: The KT-400 SPI port maximum current draw is 500 mA, when the 12V AUX terminals are
not used. External power supply (12 VDC, 2 Amps) for the expansion module is required when
the total current draw exceeds 500mA on the SPI Port. For additional hardware details, refer to
the KT-400 Ethernet Four-Door Controller Installation Guide, DN2003.
Thare are three expansion module types available:

• KT-MOD-INP16: The KT-MOD-INP16 is an input module that adds 240 zones to the KT-400
controller. Up to 15 input modules (16 input modules if used for elevator configuration) can
be connected to a KT-400 for a total of 240 external inputs. Adding the 16 onboard inputs of
the KT-400 gives a total of 256 inputs per KT-400. For further details, check the KT-MOD-INP16
KT-400 Expansion Module 16-Zone Input with SPI Cable, Install Sheet, DN1776.
• KT-MOD-OUT16: The KT-MOD-OUT16 is a 16-output module. It can be used for elevator
access control with additional hardware. Up to 16 output modules can be connected to
a KT-400 for a total of 256 outputs. For further details, check the KT-MOD-OUT16 KT-400
Expansion Module 16-Output with SPI Cable, Install Sheet, DN1781.
• KT-MOD-REL8: The KT-MOD-REL8 is an 8-relay outputs expansion module used as general
relays or elevator control outputs. Up to 32 relay modules can be connected to a KT-400 for
a total of 256 relays. For further details, check the KT-MOD-REL8 KT-400 Expansion Module 8-
Relay Output with SPI Cable, Install Sheet, DN1786.

The following table summarizes the options associated with each module:
Table 24: Expansion module options
Expansion Module Options
KT-MOD-INP16 Controller inputs (up to 256) and/or elevator inputs (up to 64 per
elevator door)
KT-MOD-OUT16 Outputs relays (up to 256) and/or elevator outputs (up to 64 per
elevator door)
KT-MOD-REL8 (Note) Relays (up to 256) and/or elevator outputs (up to 64 per elevator
door)

Note: There are already 4 relays available on the KT-400. To prevent redundancy unless it is
planned, select the Relay number assignments check box. The 9-16 relay configuration is set
by default.

1. If an expansion module(s) is(are) connected to a KT-400, click the SPI module configuration
button. The Expansion modules setup appears.

142 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

If you want to then go to
configure an input module KT-MOD- Step 2
INP16
configure an output module KT-MOD- Step 5
OUT16
configure an output module KT-MOD- Step 6
REL8
modify an existing expansion module Step 7
configuration
2. To add a KT-MOD-INP16, select the Input Module tab and click on Add. If there is more than
one input module listed, ensure that you select the correct one before changing the input
assignments. Assign names to the modules in the language fields and choose the options.
3. Select the DEOL: Double end-of-line resistor JP4 On check box to define a KT-MOD-INP16
module in DEOL.
Note: The entire expansion board is used to provide 8 inputs with DEOL. These 8 inputs
are added of the next group of 8 inputs. For example, if inputs #33-40 are linked to a
DEOL module, inputs #33-40 and #41-48 are not available for other modules.
Controller inputs 1-16 are reserved to the inputs on the KT-400.
4. Select the inputs numbers in one of two ways; using the list or the Extended selection box.
Right-click the Inputs menu to view the Extended selection box. For more information, see
Using the extended selection box.
Note: This is an exclusive condition. You cannot select the same item in the Inputs list
and in the Elevator inputs list because it will be a duplicate, and the system does not
accept any duplicate. For example, Inputs # 17-24 cannot be selected twice. Another
way to let you understand this concept, is that in the Elevator inputs menu the same
item is not be available for the same door. The same concept applies for the Elevator
outputs menu.
5. To add a KT-MOD-OUT16, select the Output Module tab and click on Add. When you click
the Add button, a menu appears and lets you select which output module you want to add.
Assign names to the modules in the language fields and choose the options.
6. To add a KT-MOD-REL8, select the Output Module tab and click on Add . When you click
the Add button, a menu appears and lets you select which output module you want to add.
Assign names to the modules in the language fields and choose the options.
WARNING: There are already 4 relays available on the KT-400. Make sure to check
the relay number assignments to prevent redundancy unless it has been planned on
purpose.
7. From the Summary tab, you can modify all the modules. Make sure to highlight the module
you want to modify in the left column before doing any modifications on the right side.
8. When you have finished configuring the expansion modules, click OK to return to the KT-400
configuration window.
Note: For more information, see Connection Configuration.

ioModule
About this task:
To define a KT-MOD-IO16 for a KT-400, a KT-1, or a KT-2 controller, click the ioModule tab, and
complete the following steps:

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 143

 1. Select a controller from the Controller list, and click the ADD button.
2. In the ioModule area, type the name of the ioModule in the language field.
3. In the Serial Number field, type the serial number.
4. Select one of the following terminal banks:

- Terminals 1 - 4
- Terminals 5 - 8
- Terminals 9 - 12
- Terminals 13 -16

For each terminal, select one of the following action options:

- Not in use: this is the default setting. Select to indicate the terminals are not in
use.
- Use as input: select to use terminals of inputs/outputs as inputs. EntraPass
uses the same setting for EOL as the controller settings. If you want to change
EOL settings, use the Input menu. For more information, see Configuring
Specific Controller Parameters in the Inputs field, select an input bank from the
list.
Note: You cannot use an input bank on multiple devices. When you use it
on one device, it is no longer available until you delete the configuration.

- Use as relay: select to use terminals of inputs/outputs as relays. In the Relays

field, select a relay bank from the list.
Note: You can define a relay bank on multiple devices, they mirror each
other.
- Use as elevator: select to use terminals of inputs/outputs as elevator doors.
Two further options become available:

- Use as outputs
- Use as floor confirmation (inputs)

Use as outputs

a. In the Elevator field, select an elevator from the list.

b. In the Elevator outputs field, select the elevator output bank from the list.

Note: You can define an elevator output bank on multipe elevators, they mirror each
other.
Use as floor confirmation (inputs)

a. In the Elevator field, select an elevator from the list.

b. In the Elevator inputs field, select an elevator input from the list.
Note: You cannot use an input bank on multiple devices. When you use it on one
elevator, it is no longer available, until you delete the configuration.
Terminals 9 -12
In addition to the Not in use, Use as input, and Use as elevator options, Use as SPI is
available for terminals 9 -12.

144 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Use as SPI: select to use terminals 9 -12 as SPI relays. In addition to the 32 SPI relay
modules defined directly in the SPI tab, you can add another 32 relay SPI modules using
the ioModule tab.
To continue the configuration, complete the following steps:

a. Click the SPI tab, and click the Output module on ioModule tab.
b. If you have defined more than one ioModule, select the one you want from the
ioModule list.
c. In the Relay 1 -8 tab, select one of the following options:

- Not used
- Used as relays
- Use as elevator equipment
Note: You can define relays on the SPI expansion module, and on
the ioModule. For example, for the KT-1 controller, if you define
relays 1 - 4 on an ioModule, and an SPI expansion module, it lights
up on the controller, the ioModule, and the SPI expansion module.

5. To remove a module, click the REMOVE button.

Enable Exit Reader

About this task:
This feature is to bring up the number of readers to 8 (on 4 doors) for KT-400 and KT-401
controllers (only) when using ioProx XSF or IoProx UK 31 bits readers. This way, a second reader
can be connected to the controller. That second reader will keep the same values as the first one
for:

• Door lock mode

• Unlock time
• Open time
• Extended Unlock time
• Extended Open time
• Unlock Schedule
• Video View
• Graphic
• All “Door Contact” features
• Relay Activation for Door events except “Door forced open”

The second door will automatically be labelled with the first door name plus the word EXIT at the
end.

1. From the KT-400 tab, under Enable exit reader, select the doors for which the reader has to
be enabled.
2. Click Save.
Note:

- The feature is available only when IoProx XSF or IoProx UK 31-Bit readers are
used under General/Reader and keypad. If another type of reader is selected,
the option is not available.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 145

 - A number of option fields are not available for the 2nd reader since values are
already programmed in the first one.
- If you deselect the exit reader under controller, the exit reader will be disabled. It
is not possible to DELETE an exit reader.

Defining the KT-400 Controller Local Areas

About this task:
Note: The controller local area option is only available with a KT-400 controller (see Defining
Controller Options for the procedure to enable the Controller local areatab).

1. Click the Controller local area tab to define up to 4 local areas.

2. Assign a name for both languages for the 1st controller local area.
3. Select the Forgive schedule from the drop-down menu.
4. Enter the maximum number of cards allowed in the Cards threshold field.
5. Check the Deny access on area full box to prevent more users to enter the area after the
cards threshold has been reached.
6. Click on the three-dot to select the relay or the relay group to activate when the cards
threshold has been reached.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 for each controller local area.

Defining the KT-400 Elevator Floor Associations

About this task:
Note: The Elevator tab displays only when expansion modules have been defined as inputs or
outputs for elevators under the KT-400 tab.
For KT-400 controller, it is possible to choose up to four patterns to define door and floor
numbers that will be associated with each pattern. By default, pattern 1 specifies all door
numbers.

1. In the Controller window, click the elevator tab to define the floor associations.
2. In the Elevator tab, click Pattern #2 , and then select the appropriate Door number check
box(es).
3. From the Floors drop-down menu, select the appropriate item or floor number to associate
with the door number and the pattern number.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each pattern.
5. Click Save .
Note: To define floors, see Floor Definition.

KT-1/KT-2
Enrollment Button
About this task:
The enrolment button is used to send an “enroll me” request to EntraPass with the controller
status which includes:

• IP address
• How it is powered (PoE or 12 VDC)
• Full Status

1. The installers press the enrollment button.

146 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 2. The controller then sends information for a period of 10 minutes at 30 seconds intervals.
3. Once the 10 minutes delay is expired, the controller stops sending information.
Note: For the enrollment process to be allowed for a given operator, it must first be
enabled in System/Security Level/Devices/Connection/Enrollment.
Result
When an enrollment request is received, a circled digit will be displayed at the bottom right side
of the workstation main window. The digit indicates the number of unassigned controllers. When
there is only one unassigned controller, double-click on the circle to open the Enrollment Wizard.
Follow instructions on the screen. You can also do a right-click on it to display a contextual menu
that contains the following options:

• Define: Display the Enrollment Wizard.

• Full Status: Displays the full status window. Provide a pop-up box with the IP address, how it
is powered (IP or 12 VDC) and the full status information.
• Delete: Remove the selected controller from the list.
• Assign to an account.

The Unassigned Controllers List

When EntraPass receives data from the KT-1 enrollment process it adds the controller to the
controllers unassigned list. the "Controller was added to the unassigned list” event is then
generated with the following parameters:

• Gateway description
• MAC Address
• Device type
The unassigned controllers list displays:

• Date and time (when it was added to the list) of the gateway
• Controller model
• MAC Address
• Serial Number
• Broadcast received IP address

Video gateway or video vault enrollment

When the video gateway or video vault receives an outbound connection, it receives the following
incoming information from the DVRs:

• Name
• Serial number
• IP address

The incoming information remains in wait mode, ready for assignment to a hattrix account or a
defined Corporate Edition, or Global Edition system. In the workstation, the enrollment pending
count displays on the lower right section of the status bar. Double click the Enrollment pending
label to open the following report:

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 147

Table 25: Enrollment report
Column Description
Request date Date request received
Account Identifies if the account is selected or assigned.
Icon Video server
Model exacq model
MAC adress MAC address of the DVR unit.
Request received from IP address of the DVR that sent the request.

When you select an enrollment, double-click the enrollment to bring up the shortcut menu. The
following options are available:
Table 26: Enrollment shortcut menu
Column Description
Opens the video server window that EntraPass pre-populates with
Define information received from the outbound connection, which is the active
account. Rename the DVR and save it.
Delete Prompts to confirm and remove the unit from the list.

When you define a DVR using enrollment, the Video Server window opens, with fields pre-filled
with information received from the outbound connection. When you define a DVR unit, EntraPass
removes it from the list.
If you input the incorrect log in credentials, an error message is displayed. If the import is
successful, a confirmation window is displayed. When you click the Save button, the camera details
are automatically called. You can then rename the DVR in the Server Parameters tab. To maintain
the name of the imported cameras, select the Override Camera name from DVR check box, if you
clear the check box, operators can change the name of imported camera.

Adding an ioSmart reader

Follow the steps in How to setup the ioSmart to add an ioSmart reader.

Controller event buffer overflow message

When a controller is disconnected from the server, the controller buffer starts collecting the
controller’s events. When the buffer is full, it transfers the oldest events in a secondary buffer (50
to 100 bytes) that always contain 50 events. When the communication is restored, the system then
starts sending messages to the Desktop Message List to indicate that the buffer is full and that
events are being deleted from the buffer.

• The controller will delete messages in FIFO order (First In, First Out). The oldest message will
therefore be deleted first.
• When the controller is reconnected to the server, the controller events will be sent to the
Message list all at once, in the following order: events in the controller’s secondary event
buffer; a single Event Buffer Overflow will display, followed by the list of events generated
while the controller was disconnected from the server.
Note: For more details about the Comment entry box, see Comment Field.

148 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Expansion modules setup
For information about configuring expansion modules, see the following topics:

• Input module KT-MOD-INP16 configuration

• Output Module KT-MOD-OUT16 Configuration

• Output Module KT-MOD-REL8 Configuration

• Modify an Existing Expansion Module Configuration

Input module KT-MOD-INP16 configuration

1. To add a KT-MOD-INP16, click the Input Module tab and then click Add. If there is more
than one input modules listed, make sure that you select the correct one before changing
the input assignments. Assign names to the modules in the language fields and choose the
options.
2. Select the DEOL: Double end-of-line resistor JP4 On check box to define a KT-MOD-INP16
module in DEOL.
Note: The entire expansion board is used to provide 8 inputs with DEOL. These 8 inputs
are added of the next group of 8 inputs. For example, if inputs #33-40 are linked to
a DEOL module, inputs #33-40 and #41-48 will not be available for other modules.
Controller inputs 1-16 are reserved to the inputs on the KT-400.
3. Selection of the inputs numbers can be done in two ways: using the drop-down menu or
the Extended selection box. Right-click on the inputs menu selection to view the Extended
selection box. For more information, see Using the extended selection box.
Note: This is an exclusive condition. You cannot select the same item in the Inputs drop-
down menu and in the Elevator inputs drop-down menu because it will be a duplicate,
and the system does not accept any duplicate. For example, Inputs # 17-24 cannot be
selected twice. Another way to let you understand this concept, is that in the Elevator
inputs menu the same item will not be available for the same door. The same concept
applies for the Elevator outputs menu.

Output Module KT-MOD-OUT16 Configuration

To add a KT-MOD-OUT16, select the Output Module tab and then click on Add. When you click on
the Add button, a menu appears and lets you select which output module you want to add. Assign
names to the modules in the language fields and choose the options.

Output Module KT-MOD-REL8 Configuration

To add a KT-MOD-REL8, select the Output Module tab and then click on Add. When you click on
the Add button, a menu appears and lets you select which output module you want to add. Assign
names to the modules in the language fields and choose the options.
WARNING: There are already 4 relays available on the KT-400. Make sure to check the relay
number assignments to prevent redundancy unless it has been planned on purpose.

Modify an Existing Expansion Module Configuration

1. From the Summary tab, you can modify all the modules. Make sure to highlight the module
you want to modify in the left column before doing any modifications on the right side.
2. Click the Output from an ioModule tab to define outputs created in the ioModule tab. For
more information, see ioModules.
3. When you have finished configuring the expansion modules, click the OK button to go back
to the KT-400 configuration window.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 149

 Note: For more information, see Connection Configuration.

Doors configuration
Use this menu to define the door parameters on which readers and/or keypads are installed. A
door can be an elevator door, a In/Out door, an entry door for anti-passback, an exit door for
anti-passback or an access door. It depends on how the settings are programmed. The controlled
door may be secured at all times or only during defined schedules. The common locking devices
used are electric door strikes and electromagnetic locks. A door may be equipped with one or two
readers; one reader on each side. For doors equipped with two readers, the outer reader has to be
defined as an entry reader and the inner reader as an exit reader.
Note: For a single gateway, limits are 2048 connections, 10,000 doors, 100,000 inputs and
100,000 outputs.

Defining general parameters for a door

About this task:
Note: When you use the KT-300 system, you work with h:mm:ss and the range value is from
00:00:01 to 9:06:07. Each time you use a KT-400 system, you work with hh:mm:ss and the range
value is from 00:00:01 to 04:15 (255 sec.) for a KT-100, KT-200 and KT-300; or to 18:12:15 (65535
seconds) for a KT-400. Take this difference into consideration.

1. In the Devices window, click the Door button.

Note: The Local areas options are only available for a KT-400 controller with the
Controller local area property enabled. See Configuring the KT-400 Controller for more
information.
The Miscellaneous, In/Out, and Door Anti-Passback options are not available for a
KTES door.
2. Select a Site filter from the first list.
3. Select the Gateway.
4. From the Connection list, select the connection where the controller is located.
5. From the Controller list, select the controller you want to define. After it is selected, the
language section is enabled. You may rename the selected controller.
6. From the Door list, select the door you want to modify or define. New items are identified
with a red button. The button turns green once the item has been defined and saved.
7. From the General tab, specify the Door lock mode: Depending on the lock device used, the
locked state will energized or de-energized to lock. Default value is Fail-secure.

- Fail-secure: The strike is locked when power is removed (door locks, door strikes).
- Fail-safe: The lock output is energized to lock the door (electromagnetic locks).

8. If the door is for a KTES, go to Step 16.

9. Select the Elevator cab option if the door is to be used for elevator control. When this option
is checked, the Elevator tab is displayed to define the unlocking schedules. The default value
is cleared.
10. Specify the In/Out type from the list:

- None: The reader is considered as an access reader. An access reader generates only
Access granted/Access denied events. This option is selected by default.
- Entry: An entry door is an entry point. In order for the system to record an entry, the
door must be opened after a valid access (if a door contact is installed).

150 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Exit: An exit door is an exit point. For the system to record an exit, the door must be
opened after a valid access (if a door contact is installed).

11. If the Controller Local Areas are enabled, go to Step 14.

12. Specify the Door Anti-Passback type (default is Access) :

- Access: The reader is considered as an access reader. Anti-Passback options are

not used with access doors. An access reader generates only Access granted/Access
denied events.
- Entry : An entry door is an entry point. In order for the system to record an entry, the
door must be opened after a valid access (if a door contact is installed).
- Exit : An exit door is an exit point. In order for the system to record an exit, the door
must be opened after a valid access (if a door contact is installed).

13. Go to Step 16.

Note: None , Soft anti-passback and Hard anti-passback are used only with the KT-400
and Controller Local Areas.
14. Specify the Door Anti-Passback type (default is Access):

- None: The anti-passback option is disabled.

- Soft anti-passback: If the destination area is under Deny Access on Local Area Full,
access is denied. When a user is passing his access card to a local area, for example,
the system will allow him to access another local area even if the user was not in the
Local area before . The system will generate the event: “ Access granted - Passback
bad location “.
- Hard anti-passback: If the destination area is under Deny Access on Local Area Full,
access is denied. A card used at an entry reader will not be able to access the same
entry reader again until it has used the corresponding exit reader. The system will
generate the event: “ Access denied - Passback bad location “.

15. Specify the Local area before and Local area after . These items are enabled and can be
specified only for Controller Local Area .
16. Specify the Door access delay:

- Unlock time (hh:mm:ss): The time during which the door is unlocked on a valid card
read or a valid request to exit event (when the REX is defined to unlock the door).
The time range value can be from 00:00:01 to 04:15 (255 sec.) for a KT-100, KT-200,
and KT-300; or to 18:12:15 (65535 seconds) for a KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2. If this is an
elevator door and a push button (input) is used to enable floor selection, this is the
time during which a floor selection will be allowed. Usually, a longer period should be
defined to allow the user to select floors. Default value is 10s. For more information,
see Input Configuration.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 151

 - Open time (hh:mm:ss): The time during which a door can remain opened following a
permitted access or a valid request to exit request. This applies only to a door defined
with a door contact input. The time range value can be from 00:00:01 to 04:15 (255
sec.) for a KT-100, KT-200, and KT-300; or to 18:12:15 (65535 seconds) for a KT-400,
KT-1, and KT-2. After this delay has expired, the system will generate the event “door
open too long” and the door piezo will sound to warn the cardholder. You can use the
Pre-alarm on door open too long ( Door window, Contact tab) to sound the door
piezo when half of this delay has expired. It will continue to sound until the door is
closed. Default value is 30s.

17. The Extended door access delay(hh:mm:ss) feature allows to keep the door open for an
extended period in order to allow people with disabilities to pass through without triggering
an alarm. If you want to use this option, specify the delays in the Unlock time (default is 40s)
and Open time (default is 2 min) fields. The time range value, for both delays, can be from
00:00:01 to 04:15 (255 sec.) for a KT-100, KT-200 and KT-300; or to 18:12:15 (65535 seconds) for
a KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2.
18. Unlock Schedule will allow the system to unlock the door for a predetermine period of time
that you will select.
19. First Person In option (Not for KT-200): keeps door locked until the first granted card access
while an unlock schedule is valid. Default is unselected.

- For the KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2 only, it’s now possible to specify an Unlock Grace
Period (mm). This feature allows the door to be unlocked under its unlock schedule
if the first card access is granted inside the selected time period before the unlock
schedule starts. Time range value can be from 0 (disabled) to 59 minutes. Default
value is 0 minute. For example, if the door has an unlock schedule that goes from
8:00am to 5:00pm and the First Person In is enabled with an Unlock Grace Period of
15 minutes, a valid access between 7:45am and 7:59am will allow the door to unlock
automatically at 8:00am.

20. Select Enable Multi-Swipe to turn the visibility of the Multi-Swipe tab ON or OFF.
21. Select a Graphic and Video view to which the gateway is assigned, if applicable. The video
view will only be activated if the video feature is enabled in EntraPass.

Defining Door Keypad Options

For KT-100 and KT-300 Controllers
Doors can be defined with relay activation when the * or # keys are pressed on the keypad.
This option is only available for KT-100 (with firmware version 1.04 and higher) and KT-300 (with
firmware version 1.16 and higher) controllers.

For KT-400 Controllers

About this task:
Doors can be defined with relay or relay group activation by pressing any specified key on the
keypad.

Note: The Keypad tab is enabled only if you have selected a Keypad type while defining the
controller associated with the door being defined. There are 4 keys. The first 2 keys: # and *
are fixed keys and they are similar and play the same role as in the KT-300 system. The 2 other
keys: Key 3 and key 4 are variable according to the client’s needs.

1. From the Door window, select the Keypad tab.

152 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 2. Specify how access to the door is controlled (default is Reader only ):

- Reader only: select this option if you want to grant access using a reader or a keypad
only. A keypad access is less secure than a reader access as the user may share their
PIN and cannot permit further use, compared to lending a card and getting it back.
- Reader or keypad: select this option if access is granted using a reader or a keypad
only. A keypad only installation is generally considered less secure than a reader only
installation, because a user may “lend” its PIN to another person but cannot prevent
further use (in comparison to getting a card back).
Note: This option can be enabled on a reader with an integrated keypad if you
want, for instance, to use the keypad only.
- Reader and keypad: select this option if both a reader and a keypad are used to
permit access to this door. The keypad will only be used when the “keypad schedule”
is valid. Adding a keypad to a reader significantly increases the level of security. PIN
code requirement can be limited by a schedule for use only outside business hours,
for example, rather than during high traffic hours.

3. From the Card and PIN schedule menu, select a schedule during which cardholders will have
to enter their PIN after a valid card read. The time allowed between a valid card read and
entering the PIN at the keypad is set in the Gateway definition menu ( Time-out on keypad
option).
4. Check the Enable duress function on keypad option, if desired. Default value is deselected.
5. Select the Keypad relay activation key(s):

- For KT-100 and KT-300 Controllers: for doors defined with keypad or reader and
keypad, you can program the star key (*) or pound key (#) to activate a relay. When
this feature is enabled, users can activate a relay simply by pressing the appropriate
key.
- For KT-400 Controllers: for doors defined with keypad or reader and keypad, you
can program *, # or any key to activate a relay or a relay group. When this feature is
enabled, users can activate a relay or a relay group simply by pressing the appropriate
key.

Defining Door Contact Options

About this task:
In most applications, the low cost door contact is the only supervisory element that protects the
investment made to control access to the door. The door lock and card reader (or keypad) provide
security and prevent unauthorized entry only when the door is closed and locked. A simple door
contact allows the ability to monitor several door conditions such as: door forced open, door open
too long, interlock options (mantrap), etc.

1. In the Door window, select the Contact tab.

2. Select the door contact from the Door contact list.
3. In Shunt Door Schedule, select a schedule.
Note: A door contact cannot be assigned to more than 2 readers.
This feature allows associating a schedule to a door contact in order to bypass the
events / alarms related to the door contact supervision. If no schedule is selected, the

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 153

 system will continue to work as usual. If a valid schedule is selected, the system will hide
following conditions in the events monitoring desktop:

- Door Forced open

- Door forced open restored
- Door open too long (unless otherwise indicated)
- Pre-Alarm door open too long
- Door left open

4. Check Enable door open too long notification to continue to receive the Door open too
long event and the Pre-Alarm door open too long in the desktop. If there is no schedule
selected, this checkbox is not available for selection (greyed out).
Note: For KT-200 Controllers, Input 1 (door contact) and 2 (request to exit device) are
ideally reserved for Door 1 of the controller whereas Input 9 (door contact) and 10
(request to exit device) are ideally reserved for Door 2 of the same controller. The input
that is used for the door contact or REX contact SHOULD NOT have a “monitoring”
schedule defined in the “Input Definition” menu.
5. Check the door reading options:

- Door open reading : If selected, this option allows the system to read cards while the
door is open. However the system will not unlock the door if it was locked. If selected,
the event “Access granted” is generated. Otherwise, the event “Access granted - Door
open” is generated. Default is checked.
- Door unlocked reading : If selected, this option allows the system to read cards
while the door is unlocked manually by the operator or by a valid unlock schedule.
If selected, the event “Access granted - Door unlocked” will be generated on access.
To ignore all access events while the door is unlocked, leave this option deselected.
Default is checked.
- Unlock on access door opened: If selected, this option allows the system to unlock
access on door opened at any time. Default is unchecked.
- Pre-alarm door opened too long : If selected, this option allows the system to
generate the event “pre-alarm door open too long” and sound the door piezo when
half of the delay defined in the Open time field is expired. It will continue to sound
until the door is closed. Default is unchecked.
Note: If the door is a KT-400 and if the value entered is higher or equal than the
open time and if the checkbox is selected, a pop up will appear explaining that
the delay value is incorrect. Value range can be between 00:00:01 and 18:12:15
and must be lower than the door open time.

6. Select the appropriate Relock on access option. You may choose to relock an access On door
opening or On door closing. Default value is On door opening.

Defining REX (Request to Exit) Options

About this task:
A signal from the REX indicates that someone wants to exit through a controlled door. Devices
such as motion detectors, push buttons can provide the REX signal. EntraPass enables users to
configure doors with unlock time reset each time the primary or secondary REX is triggered. This
option is only available for KT-100 (with firmware version 1.04) and KT-300 (with firmware version
1.16) controllers.

154 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 1. From the door window, select the REX tab, then check the appropriate Relock on Rex options
(default is On door closing ):

- On door opening: if you want the door device to re-lock following a valid access.
- On door closing: if you want the door device to re-lock when it closes.

2. For thePrimary and Secondary REX options (the Secondary REX options does not apply to
KTES or KT-200) , make the appropriate choices:

- Assign the REX contact: The input to which a “request to exit” detector can be
connected. This input must be local; it has to be one of the inputs on the controller
operating the door.
- Select a Rex schedule: When this schedule becomes valid, the controller will detect
request to exit signals originating for the exit contact. This option applies only to a
door defined with a REX contact.
- Select a Rex Bypass Message schedule: When this schedule becomes valid, the event
will NOT be stored in archives . When invalid, event is sent to the gateway for archives.
On EntraPass updates, all existing REX will have the ‘Bypass REX message schedule’
set to NONE or to no schedule. On a new door definition, Bypass REX message
schedule is set to always valid by default.
Note: The primary and secondary Rex Bypass message schedule options will
be available upon activation in System parameters. See System Parameters/
Schedule for additional information.
- Unlock on REX: The door will be unlocked if a valid request to exit is permitted by the
controller. This option may be useful on exit doors such as interior doors, shipping
doors or other push doors through which people carrying packages may pass. The
system will permit the exit and generates the “request to exit granted” event rather
than “door forced open” event.
- Resettable REX function: The unlock time is restarted on a valid request to exit. Open
and unlock times are defined in the door definition ( Devices > Door > General ).
Select this option for high traffic area doors such as manufacturing doors where many
users may need to exit at short intervals (for example after a work shift) to prevent
unwanted door open too long or door forced open events.
Note: It is recommended to choose either Unlock on REX or Resettable Rex
function , not the two options at the same time. If you choose these two options,
the door may remain unlocked for long periods of time. Moreover, these features
should not be used if a door contact has not been defined.

Defining Interlock Options (Mantrap)

About this task:
You may define interlock options (mantrap) between two doors to synchronize the time when
these two doors are open/closed. The interlock options are also called the mantrap. This ensures
that once the cardholder has accessed the first door, that door is closed and locked before the
cardholder is granted access to the second door. The two doors have to be controlled by the same
controller.

Note: The Interlock options do not apply to a KTES door.

1. In the Door window, click the Miscellaneous tab.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 155

 2. From the Door list, select the first door for which you want to define interlock options
(mantrap).
3. From the Interlock contact list, select the first input for the interlock options (mantrap). The
selected input has to be the door contact of the second door .
4. from the Door list, select the second door for which the interlock options (mantrap) are
being defined and then select the interlock contact for this second door. It has to be the door
contact of the first door.
5. Select the Interlock schedule: The two doors must have the same interlock schedule. This
is the schedule according to which the interlock is checked by the controller before access is
granted to users.
Note: The interlock options (mantrap) are not available on doors controlled by a KT-100.
6. The Suspend report delay on door relock (hh:mm:ss) indicates the time during which
the selected inputs will not be monitored when the door unlocks. It is not possible to shunt
a door contact since the system will automatically shunt it. Values range from 00:00:01 to
18:12:15. Default is 15 secs.
7. In the Shunt inputs scrolling pane, select inputs that will not be monitored when the door
unlocks. Selected inputs or input group will remain unmonitored for the delay defined in the
Shunt delay field.
Note: The Shunt input items vary depending on the KT-300 or KT-400 system used.

Defining elevator doors

About this task:
During a door definition, it is possible to specify whether it is a “regular door” or an elevator
cab (Door window, General tab). When a door is defined as an Elevator cab, an Elevator tab is
displayed in the Door definition window. This tab is used to define the automatic unlock schedules
for specific floor groups.

1. From the Door definition window, select the Elevator tab.

2. From the Unlock schedule #1 list, select the applicable unlock schedule. By default, you may
select the Always valid schedule. You may also create a new schedule (Definition menu,
Schedules).
3. From the Floor group #1 list, select the appropriate floor group associated with the Unlock
schedule #1. Only floors that have a valid schedule in the Floor group definition will be
unlocked or available for selection when the Unlock schedule #1 becomes valid.
4. From the Unlock schedule #2 list, select the schedule applicable to the second group of
floors.
5. From the Floor group #2 list, select the appropriate floor group. Only floors that have a
valid schedule in the Floor group definition will be “unlocked” or available for selection when
the Unlock schedule #2 becomes valid.
Note:

- The Unlock schedule defined during a door definition (Door menu, General tab)
will OVERRIDE these schedules even if they are valid.
- Only one Unlock schedule can be valid at a time. For example if the first
schedule (Unlock schedule #1) is valid from 6h00 to 9h00 and the second
schedule (Unlock Schedule #2) is valid from 7h00 to 9h00, then Unlock schedule
#2 will NEVER be valid since Unlock schedule #1 is already valid.

156 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Do not overlap schedules. For example, if the first schedule is valid from 8h00 am
to 17h00 and the second schedule is valid from 16h00 to 21h00, the gap (between
16h00 and 17h00) can result in erratic operation of the elevator control system.
- Only floors that have a valid schedule in the Floor Group definition will be
“unlocked” or available for selection when the unlock schedules become valid.

For more information about how to program elevator control using REB-8 relays, see
Controllers Configuration.

Configuring Door Events

1. In the Door window, select the Door events tab. This is to define the relays (or relay groups)
that are to be activated on specified events. However, when you are using a controller other
than KT-400, this tab is used to define relays only.
2. Select the relay that will be activated locally for each event .
3. Pager call type (applies to KTES only): You can select Do not call (the relay activation for
that event will not be sent to the pager), Call immediately (the relay activation for that event
will be sent immediately to the pager) or Call when scheduled (the relay activation for that
event will be sent to the pager according to the pager call schedule). Default value is Do not
call.
Note: To specify pager call types for each events, the Pager reporting function must be
enabled. See KTES Configuration.
4. Once all door event features have been set, select the Access events tab to define relays (or
relay groups if you are using KT-400) that are to be activated on miscellaneous events.
Note: EntraPass offers you the ability to define a relay that will be activated if the
Extended delay feature is used. The card used must be defined with this feature. Only
KT-100, KT-300, KT-400 and KTES can be configured with the Extended door access delay
feature.
5. Select the relay that will be activated locally or the relay group (if you are using KT-400) for
each event .
6. Pager call type (applies to KTES only): You can select Do not call (the relay activation for
that event will not be sent to the pager), Call immediately (the relay activation for that event
will be sent immediately to the pager) or Call when scheduled (the relay activation for that
event will be sent to the pager according to the pager call schedule). Default value is Do not
call .
Note: To specify pager call types for each events, the Pager reporting function must be
enabled. See KTES Configuration.

Defining Door Options for Controllers and the KTES

The following tab only appears when KT-100, KT-300, KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2 controllers and the
KTES have been configured in a multi-site Gateway.
Click the Options and alarm system tab (or Options for a KTES).
• Supervised door lock device: use this feature in specific applications such as bank vaults to
compensate for the slow motor locks. Adding this delay avoids false door forced open alarms
if a user opens the door before it has been completely secured at the end of unlocking delay.
Select the Supervised door lock device check box to enable this option.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 157

 • Motor lock delay (does not apply to KTES) : Enter the time period (hh:mm:ss) after which
the door will be considered locked. Values range from 0s to 18 h:12 min:15 secs. The default
value is 0:00 for inactive. For example, if this delay is set to 5 seconds and unlocking delay is
20 seconds after access granted; the lock output will d deactivate after 15 seconds and no
door forced open alarm will be generated if the door is opened during the last 5 seconds.
• If a second card read is required, select a schedule from the Second card schedule required
(two-man rule) list (does not apply to KTES) .
• Relay to follow lock output (Only available for KT-400 and KTES): The relay follows the lock
output status.
• Multi-factor authentication: available for go Pass cardholders presenting at a door. To
define multi-factor authentication for go Pass, select one of the following options:

- None: multi-factor authentication is not enabled, present a card to the reader.

- go Pass: present a card to the reader, or go Pass to the door.

- go Pass + Disable card: present go Pass to the door only, disables an ioSmart reader
in RS-485.

The option you select saves as a global setting and is the default setting when you
create a new account and enable go Pass. You can change the setting as required.
Note: The first type of authentication is an activation e-mail. The second type of
authentication depends on the smarphone, use a PIN or biometric identification.
• Enable duress function on keypad (KTES only): Set this parameter to enable the duress
function on the door controller keypad. Employees or tenants use the duress function
to signal for help. The operator must enable the duress function. The duress function is
unchecked by default. For more information, see KTES Configuration. For more information
on the duress function for doors only, see Defining Door Keypad Options.

Configuring external alarm system interfaces

About this task:
KT-100, KT-300, KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2 controllers offer the ability to interface with any external
alarm system. When you add these Kantech controllers to an existing alarm system, cardholders
can arm/disarm an existing system, simply by presenting a valid card on an entry/exit door. Adding
a keypad will increase the system security since cardholders will be required to enter a PIN in
addition to presenting a card (does not apply to a KTES door). There are two ways of arming/
disarming or postponing an external alarm system:

• On a valid card read and with the trigger of an arming input.

• On a valid arming code entered and with the trigger of an arming input.

There may be a combination of the options. For example, an alarm system will be disarmed with a
correct access code during a valid predefined schedule and after a valid card read.

1. Click the External alarm system options button located under the Options and Alarm
System tab in the Door dialog. The Alarm system options dialog will display on screen.
2. Under the Arming request tab, select the Arming request input . This is the input that is
activated on an external alarm arming request.
3. Once you have selected an arming request input, you have to Enable arming request
schedule during which the request will be valid.

158 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 4. If applicable, select an Arming access level .

- The Group option allows you to select all access levels.

- The Single option allows you to select a specific level.
- If the level you want does not appear in the list, you may right-click in the Arming
access level field to create a specific level to arm the external alarm system.

5. To increase the security of your alarm system:

- Wait for access granted to armwill force the user to present a valid card before
pressing the selected Keypad button option.
- Relock door on request to arm will be used in conjunction with the Wait for access
granted to arm to override the schedule.
- Relock door on arming after exit delay will relock the door and arm the system after
the pre-configure exit delay is over.
- Prevent arming request on input status will prevent arming the system if an input is
in alarm.

6. Specify the Exit delay and Entry delay (hh:mm:ss) . The Entry delay is the time during
which the alarm system is bypassed after an access granted event. The Exit delay is the
period before which the system is armed. The maximum values are 18:12:15 for both the exit
and entry delays. When the KT-300 system is used, the maximum values are 9:06:07. Usually
the entry delay is shorter than the exit delay.
7. Select the input that will indicate the External alarm system panel status . When the
selected input status is “normal”, this indicates that the external alarm panel is armed.
8. Select the Input tab to define input devices that will be supervised or shunted (no
supervision) when the alarm system is armed. The input description column contains all the
inputs that are defined in the system.

- Using the checkboxes, select the appropriate input where you want an external alarm
system to supervise them. Also select the appropriate item for which you want to
suspend supervision (on entry, on exit, or when the alarm system is disarmed).

9. Select the Disarming request tab to select the Input to postpone arming .
10. Select the applicable schedule from the Enable postpone arming schedule .
11. You may check the Wait for access granted to postpone box. If this option is checked, the
alarm system will be postponed only after a valid card read and the cardholder will then press
the selected Keypad button to postpone the external alarm system.
12. Select the Postpone or disarm access level from the list.
13. Select the Relay tab to define a relay ( Partition and Relays for the KT-400 to define a group
of relays) and input status for the external alarm relays.
Note: When you select an Alarm relay, you may specify its Activation type. It may be
activated permanently or temporarily.

Managing door access levels

Select the Access Level tab to manage the access level schedule for this door. This tab displays all
the access levels where the door can be assigned.
• To create a new schedule, right-click the Schedule section and select New.
• To edit existing schedules, right-click the Schedule section and select Edit.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 159

 • To apply existing schedules to an access level, select from the list beside the schedule.

For more information about access levels, see Access Levels Definition.

Reader Templates
About this task:
Use a reader template to define how a reader is configured. Reader templates can only be used
for ioSmart card readers in RS-485 mode. Creating a template allows the same configuration to be
shared across a number of card readers. To create a reader template complete the following steps:

1. Click the Devices tab.

2. Click Reader template from the menu. When the Reader template window appears, click the
New icon to enable editing.
3. Select the Status bar LED color, Buzzer, and Backlight setting for each State of the reader.
4. Select the Send UID option for the reader. Use this option to define which type of card is
accepted by the reader.

- Never. Only send card ID from ioSmart Cards

- When not ioSmart card. Send card ID from ioSmart cards and UID from non ioSmart
cards.
- Always (No encryption). Always send UID from a card.

5. Select the HID 125 kHz and ISO 14438B options to define the card technology.
6. If the controller connects to ioSmart readers and you want to enable the BLE technology,
select the BLE check box. EntraPass selects the BLE check box by defulat as all ioSmart
readers are BLE enabled.
7. Select the Keypad backlight intensity when in idle mode.
8. Set the delays for the LED flash duration (ms), Buzzer signal duration(ms), and Keypad
backlight duration(s).
9. Select Visible in all accounts to make the template accessible for all accounts.
Result
The Visible in all accounts checkbox is available in system account. When it is selected, the
template is viewable across all accounts, however operators cannot edit or delete the template.
When you clear the checkbox, the default reader template is reassigned to the controllers that
previously used the assigned template. A confirmation message appears and the option to delete
becomes available.

Input configuration
Door controllers can monitor the state of input points such as: door contacts, interlocks, alarm
points, motion detectors, temperature sensors, any REX and other devices with dry contacts. KT-100
monitors the state of 4 input points, KT-200 monitors the state of 16 input points, and KT-300
monitors the state of 8 on-board input points, with a maximum capacity of 16.
• KT-200 controllers: Inputs are normally closed or normally open dry contacts connected in
series with one resistor. If the dry contact is connected in series with the green resistor, the
input number will be odd. If the dry contact is connected in series with the red resistor, the
input number will be even.

160 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • Inputs 1 (door contact) and 2 (request to exit device) are ideally reserved for Door 1 of the
controller whereas Input 9 (door contact) and 10 (request to exit device) are ideally reserved
for Door 2 of the same controller. The input that is used for the door contact or REX contact
SHOULD NOT have a “monitoring” schedule defined in the “Input Definition” menu.
• KT-100 Controllers: Input 1 is reserved for door contact while input 2 is reserved for a
request to exit device.
• KT-300 Controllers: Input 1 should be reserved for contact on door 1 while input 2 should
be used for request to exit device for door 1 of the controller. Input 3 should be reserved for
contact on door 2 while input 4 should be used for request to exit device for door 2 of the
controller.
• KT-400 Controllers: Reserve input 1 for the contact on door 1. resver input 2 for a request to
exit device for door 1. Reserve input 5 for the contact on door 2. Reserve input 6 for a request
to exit device for door 2. Reserve input 9 for the contact on door 3. Reserve input 10 for a
request to exit device for door 3 of the controller. Reserve input 13 for the contact on door 4.
Reserve input 6 for a request to exit device for door 4 of the controller.
Note: For a single gateway, limits are 2048 connections, 10,000 doors, 100,000 inputs and
100,000 outputs.
• KT-1 controllers: Reserve input 1 for the contact on door 1. Reserve input 2 for a request to
exit device for door 1.
• KT-2 controllers: Reserve input 1 for the contact on door 1. Reserve input 2 for a request to
exit device for door 1. Reserve input 5 for the contact on door 2. Reserve input 6 for a request
to exit device for door 2.

Defining Input
About this task:
You may define inputs from the Input button of the Devices toolbar. You can also define inputs
using the Express Setup when defining a controller (see Express Setup Program ).

1. From the Devices toolbar, select the Input button.

2. Select a Site filter from the first drop-down list.
3. select the Gateway.
4. From the Connection drop-down list, select the connection where the controller is located.
5. From the Input drop-down list, select the input you want to define. Once selected, the
language section is enabled. You may rename the selected input.
6. From the General tab, assign a Monitoring schedule to the selected input: this is the
schedule during which the system will supervise the condition of the input. When the
schedule is valid, a change in input condition generates either an “Input in alarm” or “Input
restore” event.
Note: The input that is used for the door contact, REX contact or interlock contact
SHOULD NOT have a monitoring schedule.
7. Specify the Normal condition for the input: it may be Closed or Opened .
Note: When using single or double EOL resistors, set input Normal Condition to Closed
.
8. Specify the Notify abnormal condition for the input: it may be Alarm or Activate .
Note: When configuring event parameters with Input in alarm or Input activated as
the selected event, only the inputs corresponding to these criteria are displayed. See
Event Parameters Definition for more information.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 161

 9. By default, EntraPass will not select the Suspend status update when not monitored . This
is to keep data traffic at a minimum. However, this option can be enabled if necessary.
10. Specify the Input response time. This delay corresponds to a period within which an input
must remain in the same state before a transition is recognized. This delay is expressed in
minutes (mm:ss:cc). Values range from 10 secs to 10 min:55 secs:35 cc for both the alarm
response and alarm restore times.

- Alarm response time (mm:ss:cc): The delay before the system generates the input
and alarm event. Default is 50 cc.
- Restore response time (mm:ss:cc) : The delay before the system generates the input
restore events Default is 50 cc.
Note: Specifying the input response time allows bouncing time when the contact
changes state, and helps to generate only one event for each transition if this
time is longer than the bouncing time. For example, a 01:00:00 delay requires
that a condition remains stable for at least one minute before it is reported.

11. Specify the Telephone Entry System options (applies to KTES only).
Note: To access the modem call type feature, the site connection type must be set to
Modem. For more information, see Connection Configuration. The modem call type
feature is supported by multi-site Gateways only.

- Pager call type : You can select Do not call (the relay activation for that event will not
be sent to the pager), Call immediately (the relay activation for that event will be sent
immediately to the pager) or Call when scheduled (the relay activation for that event
will be sent to the pager according to the pager call schedule). Default value is Do not
call .
- Under modem call type , assign the call type option that best suits event reporting.
Default value is Do not call.
- Input pager ID : Enter the pager code corresponding to the selected input. Possible
values are 201, 202, 203 and 204.
Note: To specify pager call types for each events, the Pager reporting function
must be enabled. See KTES Configuration.

12. For KT-400 and KTES only, check Override default EOL (56K), and then, in the drop-down
menu, select the appropriate item. Default is unchecked.
13. Select a Graphic and Video view associated with the input, if applicable.

Defining Relays and Inputs

1. Select the Relay and input tab to define which relay(s) or input(s) will be activated or
shunted when this input is enabled.
2. From the Activate relay list, select a relay or a relay group that will be triggered when this
input is enabled.
3. Activate relay temporarily will activate the relay according to the Temporary activation
parameters defined in the Relay dialog. Default is unchecked.
4. In the Temporary Shunt Timer (h:mm:ss) field, specify the period during which an input is
not monitored. Setting the timer to 0:00:00 will instruct the relay to follow the input state. The
maximum value for the Shunt delay (hh:mm:ss) is 18:12:15 when you are using the KT-400
or the KTES. Default is 0s.

162 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Note: For the system to process properly the reset delay on a temporary shunt, the
Temporary Shunt Timer option must be set in the definition of the input that will reset
the delay. For example, if Input 1 will temporary shunt Input 2, the Temporary Shunt
Timer must be specified also in the definition of Input 2.
5. From the Shunt input list, select the input that will not be monitored when the input being
defined is enabled.
6. If applicable check Shunt input temporarily and Reset delay for shunt temporarily
options. Default is unchecked for both.
7. Delay before unshunt : Values range from 1 sec to 18 h:12min:15 secs.
Note: When the input is restored or returns to normal condition, the shunted input will
also return to normal condition. The event “Input shunted by input” will be generated by
the system. When the input returns to normal condition, the event “Input unshunted by
input” will be generated.

Defining Tamper and Trouble

1. Select the Tamper and trouble tab to associate a relay or a group of relays to activate in case
of an input in trouble or in tamper. This tab is visible for a zone in DEOL (double end-of-line)
only.
2. From the Activate relaylist (Tamper alarm), select a relay or a relay group that will be
triggered when this input is in tamper.
3. Activate relay temporarily will activate the relay according to the Temporary activation
parameters defined in the Relay dialog. Default is unchecked.
4. From the Activate relay list (Input in trouble), select a relay or a relay group that will be
triggered when this input is in trouble.
5. Activate relay temporarily will activate the relay according to the Temporary activation
parameters defined in the Relay dialog. Default is unchecked.

Defining an Input for an Elevator Door

About this task:
When the input being defined or edited is used for elevator control, an Elevator tab is displayed in
the Input definition window. You may associate an input to a push button. It can then be used by
a guard or by a receptionist to temporarily enable the floors defined in the Floor group activation
section.

1. In the Input definition window, select the Elevator tab.

Note: Only the floors marked with an “X” in the state column in the Floor group
menu will be available for selection. The system will temporarily enable floor selection
according to the delay defined in the Unlock time of the Door menu. A valid schedule
has to be selected (Enable schedule list) for this feature to be activated. It may be
necessary to define a door as an elevator cab to access this tab.
2. In the Select cab for floor group activation section , select the cab associated with the
input.
3. Select the Floor group associated with the selected cab, that will be enabled when the input
is triggered.
4. Select a schedule according to which the defined input will carry out this command.

Enabling Remote Event Reporting

1. Select the Input event tab.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 163

 2. From the Local activation relay list, select a relay or a relay group that will be triggered
when this input is in alarm (activated).
Note: The relay group is only available when you are using KT-400.
3. Under modem call type , assign the call type option that best suits event reporting. Default
value is Do not call .
Note: To access the modem call type feature, the site connection type must be set to
Modem. For more information, see Connection Configuration. The modem call type
feature is supported by multi-site Gateways only.

Integrated component configuration

Use the Integrated Component window for any type of panel component, including partition and
zone, under any type of panel, including intrusion and temperature control.

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click Devices and click Integrated Component.

2. From the Component list, select the component.
Note: You can use the list in the toolbar to sort the displayed components by type.
3. From the Component type list, select the component type.
4. Click Configuration Form to display the DSC Power Series window.
5. For a User component type, enter the User access code. This code is a PIN number used for
arming or disarming a partition.
6. For a Simplex panel, select proper values to define the fire panel device point. After the
device is granted an address (manually or automatically from IDNet import), the user cannot
change it unless the point is deleted and another one is created.
7. For a Virtual Zone, from the Component type list, select a component type. You can select
door, input, or event.

For an Event component type, select an event. For a list of events based on the selected
a.
component type, see Table 27.
b. For a Door or Input component type, indicate the component source (controller).
c. Select the appropriate Component action to be reported for the virtual zone and click OK.
The purpose of this feature is to create virtual zones in an alarm panel that receive commands
from groups of selected inputs, doors, and other events of a gateway. These commands are then
transmitted from the panel to a central station.

Note: The DSC PowerSeries Neo 1.1 integrated panel can support 16 or 32 virtual zones: 16
virtual zones for HS2016 and 32 virtual zones for HS2032/3032, HS2064, HS2128/3128, and
HS3248.
Note: This feature is available only when using KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2 controllers. You require
the following firmware: KT-400 v1.16.xx, KT-401 v1.22.xx, KT-1 v1.02.xx, or KT-2 all firmware
versions.

164 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Table 27: Events sent to the virtual zone
Component EntraPass event Report Report Report
alarm trouble tamper
Input Input in alarm / Input restored or in X
normal condition
Input in trouble/ Input in trouble X
restored
Input tamper in alarm / Input tamper X
restored
Door Door forced open / Door forced open X
restored
Door open too long / Door open too X
long restore
Door lock device failure / door lock X
device failure restored
Duress Duress feature X
Controllers Controller AC power failed / Controller X
AC power restored
Tamper switch in alarm / Tamper X
switch restored
Controller Auxiliary power failure / X
Controller Auxiliary power restored
Controller reader power failure / X
Controller reader power restored
Controller battery power failure / X
Controller battery power restored
Controller module communication X
failure /Controller module
communication restore
Controller DC power failed / Controller X
DC power restored
Controller lock power failed / X
Controller lock power restored
Controller power trouble (KT-1) X
Access Access denied - Bad card status X
Denied
Access denied - Card lost or stolen X
Access denied - Card expired X

8. If the Video feature is enabled, the Video view field appears (for zones and partitions only).
If this is the case, select the video view in which you want the defined component to appear.
For information about defining video views, see Video Views Definition.
9. From the Graphic list, select the graphic to which the application is assigned, if applicable (for
zones and partitions only). For information about defining graphics, see Graphics Definition.
Note: The Details button is available only for a User or a Virtual Zone component type.
10. Click Save.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 165

What to do next: To complete the configuration, see Manual Operations on Integrated Panels.

Integrated panel configuration

To view and use the integration buttons, ensure that your system meets the following minimum
requirements:

• Load the Integration DLL on the EntraPass Server. If the toolbar does not display the two
buttons, see System Parameters Configuration.
• Connect the third party hardware on the serial port of the multi-site gateway or on the serial
port of a pass-through KT-400 controller.
• Turn on the third party hardware.

General tab
1. From the Connection type list, select a connection type.
2. From the Panel model list, select a panel model.
3. If the Video feature is enabled, the Video view list appears. If so, select the video view in
which you want the defined component to appear. For more information about defining
video views, see Video Views Definition.
4. From the Graphic list, select the graphic to which the application is assigned, if applicable.
For more information about defining graphics, see Graphics Definition.
5. Click Configuration to display the Panel Configuration window. A different window displays
according to the selected connection type.
Table 28: List of panel models and connection types
Callout Panel model connection type
A DSC PowerSeries Neo connected to serial or IP controller
B DSC PowerSeries Neo connected to serial or IP gateway
C DSC PowerSeries Pro connected to IP controller
D DSC PowerSeries Pro connected to IP gateway
E DSC PowersSeries or MaxSys connected to serial controller
F DSC PowersSeries or MaxSys connected to serial gateway
G Bentel Kyo320 connected to IP gateway
H Honeywell Galaxy connected to IP gateway
I Simplex 4100 & 4007ES connected to serial controller
J Simplex 4100 & 4007ES connected to serial gateway

166 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Table 29: Panel configuration parameters summary
Parameters A B C D E F G H I J
Virtual Zone management: Select Single Yes
controller to limit the integration to
the controller it is connected to. Select
Yes
Multiple controllers so the integration
can use events/components for any
controller of the same gateway.
Intrusion model: Select the access Yes Yes
management. By partition means that
the default user code is used to arm and
Yes
disarm the system. By users means that
the user card is used to arm and disarm
the system.
Controller selection for pass-through: Yes Yes Yes
Select the controller to which the panel is Yes
connected to establish communication.
Integration identification number: Enter Yes Yes
the DSC communicator code to establish Yes Yes
communication.
Integration access code: The DSC Yes Yes
communicator code that the user can Yes Yes
configure.
Number of digits: Enter the number of Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
digits for the master access code.
Master access code: Enter a code that is Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
used to program the panel.
Default user access code: From the list, Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
select a default user access code.
Communication port COM: From the list, Yes Yes
select a port. This port is used for manual
operations and when the system uses the
managed by partition mode.
Communication type: Select between Yes Yes
Serial (RS-232), IP-TCP, and IP-UDP Yes Yes
physical connections.
Connection filter NEO connected to serial Yes Yes
or IP controller: Used to filter controllers
Yes Yes
on the gateway. Selected controllers are
used for virtual zones.
Baud rate: Default is 9600. Yes
Ethernet IP address: Enter the controller Yes Yes
IP address to allow communication.
Domain name address: Enter the Yes Yes
controller domain name to allow
communication.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 167

Table 29: Panel configuration parameters summary
Parameters A B C D E F G H I J
DSL Port: Enter the panel communication Yes
port.
IP ports: Select the three IP ports to Yes
communicate with the Galaxy panel.
PIN value: Enter the remote panel PIN Yes
number. The displayed value is the default
value from the Galaxy panel.
Select Always validate MAC address Yes
upon startup to verify that it is the right
panel.
For Simplex 4100 panels, select Import Yes Yes
IDNet points to automatically import the
panel points defined into the IDNet boards
located on the fire panel. The information
imported is the point addresses includes
the slot number, the point value, and the
subpoint value with the corresponding
point label.
For Simplex 4100 panels, select Import Yes Yes
panel button points to retrieve the
button addresses to generate an
EntraPass-specific named event for the
following buttons:
• System Reset key
• Alarm Silence key
• Master Fire alarm Ack key
• Master Supervisory Ack key
• Master Trouble Ack key
• Master Priority Ack key

Note: You cannot use the default integration access code when you program a DSC
PowerSeries Pro or Neo panel. For information about retrieving an integration access
code from a DSC PowerSeries Pro or Neo panel, refer to the following application notes:
Integrating the DSC PowerSeries Pro panel with KT controllers using type 2 encryption and
Integrating the DSC PowerSeries Neo panel with KT controllers using a DSC communicator
5.3x with type 2 encryption.
Note: If you select Access managed by user, on the Users tab, in the Card window, an
Intrusion tab becomes available.
For the KT-400 version, an additional list is available to select a controller for pass-
through.

168 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Panel component tab (Bentel, DSC Maxsys, PowerSeries Neo and Pro)
This feature depends on the type of intrusion panel. You must create the device in EntraPass for the
DLL to download to the corresponding gateway or KT-400. After it downloads, the auto-detection
becomes active.

1. Define the Zone, Partition, User, and Virtual Zone parameters. The following table lists the
parameters' maximum values.
Table 30: Parameter maximum values
Parameter PC1616 PC1832 PC1864 HS2016 HS2032/ HS2064 HS2128/ HS3248
3032 3128
Zones 32 32 64 16 32 64 128 248
Partitions 2 4 8 2 4 8 8 32
Users 48 72 95 48 72 500 1000 1000
Virtual Zones 16 32 32 32 32

2. Select the number of Zones. Click the button in the upper left to display a table that shows all
the defined zones. Click View or Edit to view or edit the selected zone.
3. Select the number of Partitions. Click the button in the upper left to display a table that
shows all the defined partitions. Click View or Edit to view or edit the selected partition.
4. Select the number of Users. Click the button in the upper left to display a table that shows all
the defined users. Click View or Edit to view or edit the selected user.
5. Select the number of Virtual Zones. This is available only for Neo panels connected to a KT-1
or a KT-400. A corresponding number of virtual inputs are added in Integrated Component
window. Configure virtual zones in the Integrated Panel window to view all zones. Configure
virtul zones in the Integrated Component window to view one zone at a time.
Note: The default number of Virtual Zones is the maximum value shown in Table 30.
The purpose of this feature is to create virtual zones in an alarm panel that receives
commands from groups of selected inputs, doors, and other events of a gateway. These
commands are then transmitted from the panel to a central station.
The DSC PowerSeries Neo 1.1 integrated panel can support 16 or 32 virtual zones: 16
virtual zones for HS2016 and 32 virtual zones for HS2032/3032, HS2064, HS2128/3128,
and HS3248.

This feature is available only when using KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2 controllers. You require
the following firmware: KT-400 v1.16.xx, KT-401 v1.22.xx, KT-1 v1.02.xx, or KT-2 any
firmware versions.
6. Click Virtual Zone List. The displayed table allows you to map Kantech components to DSC
virtual zones.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 169

 Note: The Physical Zone column is displayed only with a valid DSC panel
communication.

a. Click the Door, Input and Event tabs, and select a physical zone number and the type
of event (Alarm, Trouble or Tamper) to be sent to the central. View the remaining
available zones on the counter in the upper right.
Table 31: Events sent to the virtual zone
Component EntraPass Event Report Report Report
Alarm Trouble Tamper
Input Input in alarm / Input restored or in normal X
condition
Input in trouble / Input in trouble restored X
Input tamper in alarm / Input tamper restored X
Door Door forced open / Door forced open X
Restored
Door open too long / Door open too long X
restore
Door lock device failure / door lock device X
failure restored
Duress Duress feature X
Controllers Controller AC power failed / Controller AC X
power restored
Tamper switch in alarm / Tamper switch X
restored
Controller Auxiliary power failure / Controller X
Auxiliary power restored
Controller reader power failure / Controller X
reader power restored
Controller battery power failure / Controller X
battery power restored
Controller module communication failure / X
Controller module communication restore
Controller DC power failed / Controller DC X
power restored
Controller lock power failed / Controller lock X
power restored
Controller power trouble (KT-1) X
Access Access denied - Bad card status X
Denied
Access denied - Card lost or stolen X
Access denied - Card expired X

b. Click Add to add a new event in the list or click Remove to remove the selected event.
c. Click Save or Cancel to return to the Integrated Panel window.
d. Printing: Use the Print button from the Virtual Zone Summary section to send the
virtual zone configuration parameters to the central.

170 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Figure 4: Virtual zone printing

RS-232 tab
1. From the lists, select the Communication port COM and the Baud rate.
2. Click Save.

Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) Configuration

The Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) is a telephone entry system that is suited for small
and large applications with a separate access control system, or in applications that require
telephone entry access only. This system provides visitor access control for a variety of applications:
apartment buildings, gated communities, condominiums, office buildings, factories, and industrial
sites. Visitors use the KTES to communicate directly with a tenant and are easily identified by voice
communication. The tenant can grant or deny the visitor access directly from a telephone land line
or a cellular phone.
Designed as a stand-alone unit, the system controls one door, auxiliary relay, and supports postal
lock access. For larger commercial installations, the KTES integrates with EntraPass Special Edition
and KT-controllers to provide a complete access control solution. The entire programming of
the system can be done directly on the keypad or remotely from a PC via a modem, Ethernet
connection or RS-485 interface.
The system reports all events directly to EntraPass, where you can obtain a detailed event log.
Additionally, programmed alarms can be reported to a pager and/or to the EntraPass system via an
integrated modem. For more information on the KTES, see the KTES Installation Manual, DN1769 and
the KTES Programming Manual, DN1770.
Note: For reliability and configuration consistency, Kantech currently supports the US Robotics
Sportster external modem only. Even if other type of modem are available, we strongly
recommend using the officially supported external US Robotics.

Defining general parameters for the KTES

1. On the Devices toolbar, select the KTES button.
Note: You must select a multi-site Gateway when configuring a KTES.
Use the KTES Setup Wizard to set up the Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) in a
few steps. For more information, see Configuring a KTES Using Express Setup.
2. Select a Site filter from the first list.
3. Select the Gateway.
4. From the Connection list, select the connection where the controller is located.
5. From the KTES list, select the KTES you want to define. Once selected, the language section is
enabled. You may rename the selected KTES.
Note: For more information about configuring connections, see Connection
Configuration.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 171

 6. On the General tab, specify the visitor call settings :

- Talk time: This is the maximum talk duration in seconds for a normal call between a
visitor and a tenant (10 secs to 59 min:59 secs). Default value is 40 secs.
- Extended talk time: This is the maximum talk duration in seconds for a extended call
between a visitor and a tenant (10 secs to 59 min:59 secs). Default value is 60 secs.
- Talk time remaining warning : The system sends a warning ring (a beep sound), a
certain number of seconds (depending on the value entered) to indicate the end of
the allowed talking period (1 sec to 59 min:59 secs). Default value is 10 secs.
- Number of rings before answer : This is the maximum number of rings allowed for a
tenant to answer (4 to 16). Default value is 5.
- Extended number of rings before answer : This is the maximum number of rings
allowed, for a tenant with the extended option, to answer (4 to 16). Default value is 10.

7. Specify the Postal Lock options :

- Postal lock contact: This is the input corresponding to the door postal lock (0 to 4).
Select an input and click OK:
Note: See Input Configuration for more information.
- Postal lock Schedule : This is the schedule inside which the input, corresponding to
the postal lock, generates a valid postal lock request when that input is in alarm.
Note: See Schedules Definition for more information about schedule definition.

8. Disable KTES polling option: Select this checkbox when you need to put the KTES in disable
mode. In disable mode, the KTES will never be polled and all status requests from this
specific. Default value is selected.
9. Specify the Tenants list options:

- Tenants list capacity : By default, the capacity is 250 tenants unless you have
registered for 500, 1000 or 3000 tenants total.
Note: Remember that you are limited by the options purchased with the
software. If you have registered many KTES options for additional capacity, make
sure to assign it to the correct KTES site.
- Tenants list : Select a tenants list. Default value is empty.
Note: See Tenants List for more information about Tenants list definition.
- Use all tenants from list : Check this box to include all the tenants from the list.
Otherwise, leave the check box empty and click the Customize button. Select the
check boxes for tenants to be included and/or displayed on the LCD. Default value is
selected.
- Use the Print button to send a printout of the tenants list to a printer of your choice.
Sort by name or by code and preview before printing.
- Select a Graphic and Video view to which the gateway is assigned, if applicable.

Defining the Kantech Telephone Entry System parameters

1. From the KTES window, select the Kantech Telephone Entry System tab.

172 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 2. Specify the General options :

- Serial number : The serial number is unique to eachKTES . It is used for

communication between the KTESand the EntraPass software. Default value is
00000000.
- Enable fail-soft delay : Enter the delay before EntraPass enters fail-soft mode and
consider communication with the KTES lost . Values range from 10 secs to 4 min:15
secs. Default value is 45 secs.
- EOL resistor : This parameter defines the input termination as:None for no end-of-
line resistor (dry contact), Singlefor single end-of-line resistor (5.6K) or Double for
double end-of-line resistor (2 * 5.6K). Default value is None.

3. Specify the Regional configuration parameters:

- Line Type : Set this parameter to select the telephone line type used by the system.
Possible values are Tone or Pulse . Default value is Tone.
Note: For New Zealand, pulse dialling cannot be used.
- Telephone line regional setting : The Telephone line regional setting must be set to
specify which telephone line country code should be used by the KTES. Default value is
USA/Canada (0). Click the drop down list to display the available countries:

- Time base : Main time base comes from the AC power input (50 Hz or 60 Hz) for
best accuracies over large operating temperatures. Time base will be automatically
switched to internal Xtal in case of AC power failure. Time base can be forced to
internal Xtal when DC power only or unstable AC source is used. Default value is 60Hz.
- Line monitoring : The telephone line is monitored when busy or disconnected, when
this option is selected. Default value is selected.
Note: In order to comply with New Zealand Telepermit requirements, line
sensing must be turned on.

4. Specify the Tenant response setting :

- Keypad key for access granted by tenant : This telephone key can be used by a
tenant to grant access to a visitor. Default value is 9.
- Keypad key for access denied by tenant : This telephone key can be used by a
tenant to deny access to a visitor. Default value is *.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 173

 - Keypad key for auxiliary relay activated by tenant : This telephone key can be used
to grant access to a visitor that is using a secondary entrance. Default value is empty.

5. Specify the Wiegand interface options:

- Reader type : This is the Wiegand Interface output format to be sent to the KTES.
Default value is KantechXSF .
- Reader’s Driver download: Click on the button to open the selection window and
select a driver to download:
- Wiegand integration with an access controller : Selecting this option indicates that
the KTES is connected to an access controller. Otherwise it is operating in Standalone
mode (not available in EntraPass KTES Edition ) .
- Card holder used for postal activated : This is the card number used by the KTES to
generate a Wiegand code when the postal lock is activated. Default value is empty.

Defining the Language and Welcome Message Parameters

1. From the KTES window, select the Languages and Welcome messages tab.
2. Specify the Enabled languages : Select the languages available in the KTES LCD Display.
Default values are deselected.
3. Specify the Custom language : Select the custom language available in the KTES LCD Display,
chosen by the customer (in addition to the enabled languages). Use the + button to add other
languages. Default value is None .
Note: See Vocabulary Editor for more information about Custom language definition.
4. Specify the Default KTES language : Select the default language used by the KTES . Default
value is None.
5. Define the Welcome Messages :

- Enter the message to be displayed on the KTES LCD for each enabled language.
Default value is empty. Use the button next to the Display delay text box to centre the
message text.
- Enter the displaying delay in seconds (0 sec to 4 min:15 secs). Default value is 2 secs.
- Repeat both steps for the second message.

6. Click the Save button.

Special characters
By combining the commands listed in the following table, you can display the KTES current hour
and date according to different formats. For example:

• The complete current date in the international format: &yyy/&o/&d = 2007/01/18

• The complete current date in the American format: &o/&d/&y = 01/18/07
• The complete current hour in 24 hours format: &h:&m:&s = 14:50:55
• The complete current hour in am/pm format: &h:&m:&s&a = 02:50:55pm
• The current day in 3 letters format: &ww = mon
• The current day in 10 letters format: &wwwwwwwww = wednesday
• The current month in 3 letters format: &oo = jan
• The current month in 9 letters format: &Oooooooo = January

174 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • The complete current date in letters and digits format: &ww &oo &d &yyy = thu jan 18 2007
Table 32: Special characters commands
Display Format
Hour displayed in 24 hours format &h
Hour displayed in 12 hours format &h&a
Minutes &m
Seconds &s
Ten of years &y
Year &yyy
Month &o
Date &d
Day of the week &ww to &wwwwwwwww
Current month in text format &oo to &ooooooooo

Defining the Options Parameters

1. From the KTES window, select the Options tab.
2. Specify the LCD setting :

- Hide PIN number : Select this check box to hide the tenant’s PIN numbers on the
LCD. Default value is deselected.
- Backlight delay : TheBacklight Delay is the maximum delay of inactivity before the
LCD backlight turns low (0 sec to 4 min:15 secs) . Default value is 20 secs.
- Next character delay : TheNext Character Delayis the maximum delay allowed
between each key press before considering a next character entrance when entering
a text string at the keypad (0 sec to 4 min:15 secs) . Default value is 2 secs.
- Find user timeout delay : After pressing theFindoption key, the Find user timeout
delayis the maximum delay allowed between each key press before cancelling a find
sequence (5 sec to 4 min:15 secs). Default value is 15 secs.
- Programming PIN timeout delay : The Programming PIN timeout delay is the
maximum delay allowed to enter a complete valid PIN number before entering in
system programming mode (5 sec to 4 min:15 secs) . Default value is 20 secs.
- Programming mode timeout delay : The Programming mode timeout delayis
the maximum delay allowed between each key press before exiting from the
programming mode and returning to the welcome messages (5 secs to 9h:59 min).
Default value is 60 secs.

3. Specify the Duress options. A Duress alarm is used by employees or tenants to signal for
help:

- Duress on access granted : Allows a tenant to trigger a duress alarm after a valid PIN
entry. Default value is deselected.
- Duress on access denied : Allows a tenant to trigger a duress alarm after an invalid
PIN entry. Default value is deselected.
- Keypad duress key : Set this parameter to configure the symbol that will activate the
duress functions. A Duress alarm is used by employees or tenants to signal for help(0
to 9, # and *). Default value is 9.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 175

 4. Specify the Supervision Schedule options:

- Power supervision schedule : To define the schedule applicable to KTES power

monitoring. Select a schedule from the list and click OK. Default value is empty.
- Tamper switch supervision schedule : To define the schedule applicable to KTES
tamper switch monitoring. Select a schedule from the list and click OK. Default value is
empty.

5. Click the Save button.

Note: See Schedules Definition for more information about schedule definition.

Defining the status relay parameters

1. In the KTES window, click the Status relay tab.
Note: See Relay Configuration for more information about relay configuration.
2. Specify the Relay activation parameters:

- Power failure: This is the relay that can be activated when a KTES AC power failure
occurs. The default value is none.
- Battery trouble: Relay that will be activated if the 12 volts standby battery is
disconnected or comes low (under 11.5 volts DC). The default value is none.
- Tamper in alarm: This is the relay that can be activated when a KTES tamper switch
event occurs. The default value is none.
- Buffer 70% full: Relay that will be activated if the event buffer for the EntraPass
software has reach a 70% capacity. The default value is none.
- Lock power trouble: This parameter defines the relay to be activated in the event of
a door lock problem, locking device disconnected or shorted to ground. The default
value is none.
- Other troubles: Relay that will be activated when any other trouble on the KTES
occurs. The default value is none.
- Heater kit activated: Relay that will be activated when cabinet inside temperature
falls below +5oC. The default value is none.
- Postal lock: Relay that will be activated with an entry request from the front door
postal lock. The default value is none.

3. Specify the Pager call type:

- For each event you can configure a pager call type. You can select No call (the relay
activation for that event will not be sent to the pager), Immediate call (the relay
activation for that event will be sent immediately to the pager) or Schedule call (the
relay activation for that event will be sent to the pager according to the pager call
schedule). The default value is No call.
Note: To specify pager call types for each events, the Pager reporting function
must be enabled.

Defining the Pager Options

1. From the KTES window, select the Pager tab.
Note: For New Zealand: This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to
the Telecom “111” Emergency Service.

176 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 2. Specify the Pager Reporting options:

- Pager phone number : The pager phone number to which events will be reported (24
characters maximum). Default value is empty.
- Pager call schedule : The schedule number from which the KTES can communicate
programmed events, alarms and troubles to the pager. Select a schedule from the list
and click OK.
Note: See Schedules Definition for more information about schedule definition.
- Unit ID : The Unit ID identifies theKTES that sent the pager code(0001 to 9999).
Default value is 0001.
- Restore code : The Restore codeis the pager code corresponding to the general event
that triggered a zone restore condition (0 to 999). Default value is 0.
- Alarm code : The Alarm code is the pager code corresponding to the general event
that triggered a zone alarm condition (0 to 999). Default value is 1.
- Tamper code : The pager code corresponding to the general event that triggered a
zone tamper condition (0 to 999). Default value is 2.
- Trouble code : The pager code corresponding to the general event that triggered a
zone trouble condition (0 to 999). Default value is 3.
- Field separator : The Field separator is the character to be used as a field separator
or delimiter (*, # or ,). Default value is *.
- Field ending : TheField ending is used to indicate that the call is completed.
Remember that you can enter any signs for the ending parameter (*, # or ,). Default
value is #.

3. Specify the General event pager codes:

- Tamper in alarm : The pager code that corresponds to a tamper switch problem (0 to
999). Default value is 100.
- Power failure : The pager code that indicates an AC power failure on the KTES (0 to
999). Default value is 101.
- Battery trouble : The pager code that indicates a low battery problem on theKTES(0
to 999). Default value is 102.
- Buffer 70% full : The pager code sent to indicate that the event buffer for the
EntraPass software has reach a 70% capacity (0 to 999). Default value is 103.
- Other troubles : The pager code that corresponds to any other system event that can
occur (0 to 999). Default value is 104.
- Door forced open : The pager code thatcorresponds to a forced open door (0 to 999).
Default value is 120.
- Door open too long : The pager code that corresponds to a door opened for too long
(0 to 999). Default value is 121.
- Door alarm on relock : The pager code that corresponds to a door left opened (0 to
999). Default value is 122.
- Lock trouble : The pager code that corresponds to a problem with the door locking
device supervision (0 to 999). Default value is 123.
- Keypad disabled : The pager code that corresponds to a keypad disabled condition
(when the option is enabled (0 to 999). Default value is 124.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 177

 - Duress alarm : The pager code that corresponds to a duress alarm. A Duress alarm is
used by employees or tenants to signal for help (0 to 999). Default value is 125.
- Access granted : The pager code thatcorresponds to a granted access. An access
granted code is sent when the tenant was granted access using his PIN (0 to 999).
Default value is 140.
- Invalid access schedule : The pager code that corresponds to a denied access. An
access denied code is sent when the tenant was denied access using his PIN (0 to 999).
Default value is 141.
- Access granted by tenant : The pager code that corresponds to an allowed access by
a tenant to a visitor (0 to 999). Default value is 142.
- Auxiliary relay activated by tenant : The pager code that corresponds to an allowed
access by a tenant to a visitor at an alternate entrance, different from the main
entrance usually used by the tenants or visitors, for example(0 to 999). Default value is
143.
- Access denied by tenant : The pager code that corresponds to a denied access by a
tenant to a visitor (0 to 999). Default value is 144.
- Tenant traced : The pager code thatcorresponds to a granted access for a traced
tenant(0 to 999). Default value is 145.
- Disabled tenant : The pager code that corresponds to an access attempt from a
tenant with an invalid status (0 to 999). Default value is 146.
- Other access denied : The pager code thatcorresponds to an access attempt from a
tenant outside of his assigned schedule(0 to 999). Default value is 147.

Configuring Tenant Administration Level Parameters

1. From the KTES window, select the Tenant administration level tab.
2. Specify the access parameters rights: Use the scroll boxes to set the administration level for
the four different tenant types (Full access, Read only or No access).

Output device configuration

Outputs usually control the reader LED and buzzer. There are four outputs available for each
KT-200, KT-300 (2 per door), but there are 16 outputs for KT-400 controllers (4 per door). A KT-100
supervises the state of two outputs. Electrical outputs are configured as open-collector. They
provide an open circuit when deactivated (not connected to ground) and are switched to ground
when activated. You may configure Output devices from a controller definition menu or from a
gateway window.
Note: For a single gateway, limits are 2048 connections, 10,000 doors, 100,000 inputs and
100,000 outputs.

Defining General Options for an Output

1. From the Devices configuration window, select the Output button.
Note: The Miscellaneous section is hidden in the case of using the KT-400 system
because the items are already defined in the Gateway/KT-400 events.
2. Select a Site filter from the first drop-down list.
3. Select the Gateway.
4. From the Connection drop-down list, select the connection where the controller is located.
5. From the Output drop-down list, select the output you want to define. Once selected, the
language section is enabled. You may rename the selected output.

178 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 6. From the General tab, specify the Operating mode for the output device (default is Normal
):

- Normal : The output is switched to ground when it is activated.

- Inverse : The output is an open circuit (not grounded) when it is activated.

7. In the Selected doors section, select which door will affect the output you are configuring:

- First door: Only the first door port will follow the state programmed for these events.
- Second door : Only the second door port will follow the state programmed for these
events.
Note: This option is not available with KT-100 and KTES.

8. Set the Activation period (m:ss) delay . It defines the activation time in seconds during
which the output remains active when it is programmed for a temporary activation. It will
leave the output activated indefinitely, regardless of the activation type. Values range from 1
sec to 4 min:15 secs. Default is 5 secs.
Note: This option is not available when you are using the KT-400 or the KTES.
If you are using the Video Integration feature, EntraPass enables you to assign all
system components into a video view, the same way you assign them to a system
interactive floor plan (graphic). To do this, you simply select the video view where you
want the system component (Workstation, site, gateway, controller, etc.) to appear.

Associating Events with Auxiliary Outputs

About this task:
System events can trigger auxiliary outputs. You can define how each event will trigger the output.

1. Select the Definition tab to associate a door event with an auxiliary output.
2. In the Options column, associate an event with an output state. Default is None .

- Steady timed : The output given this option will not flash, it will remain activated for
the specified activation period and will return to normal state when the activation
period is over.
- Flash timed : The output will flash and remain activated for the specified activation
period and will return to its normal state when the activation period is over.
- Steady : The output given this option will not flash, it will remain activated until it
returns to normal condition.
- Flash : The output will flash and remain activated until its condition returns to normal.

Relay configuration
Use the output control relays provided on each KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-400 and KTES to activate
alarms or other devices such as lighting control, ventilation, and air conditioning. You can activate
these relays according to schedules, events reported by the system. You can also activate them to
indicate the status of an alarm system or a combination of different logic conditions.

Defining relays
1. Click the Devices tab, and click Relay.
2. Select a Site filter from the list.
3. Select the Gateway.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 179

 4. From the Connection list, select the connection where the controller is located.
5. From the Relay list, select the relay you want to define. Once selected, the language section is
enabled. You may rename the selected relay.
6. On the General tab, specify the Operating mode for the relay:

- Normal : The relay is normally de-energized (deactivated) until it is energized

(activated) by an operator, an event or any other system schedule.
- Reverse:The relay is normally energized (activated or resting) until it is de-energized
(deactivated) by an operator, an event or any other system function.

7. Specify the Automatic activation schedule: When this schedule is valid, the relay will be
triggered (activated or deactivated) according to the specified activation mode.
8. Specify the Disable relay action: When this schedule is valid, the relay will be deactivated (or
activated) according to the predefined operating mode .

9. Set the Temporary activation timer to indicate the delay during which the relay will be
temporarily triggered following a temporary activation.
Note: When the timer is set to zero, the default activation delay is set to five seconds.
Maximum time allowed: 9:06:07 (9 hours, 6 minutes and 7 seconds). When you are
using the KT-400, the maximum time allowed is 18:12:15 (18 hours, 12 minutes and 15
seconds).
10. Select a Graphic and Video view associated with the relay, if applicable.

Setting up Communication Timing

CAUTION: Do not use the Communication timing option. If you need to set up the
communication delay and polling frequency, call Kantech Technical Support Help
Desk. Inappropriate use of this option may cause serious problems to the system. The
Communication timings window shows the actual default settings. They must be preserved
unless advised otherwise by Kantech.

Site configuration
About this task:
A site is composed of one or many physical connections. For more information about connections,
see Connection Configuration.
You can link together a large number of controllers, communicating over IP within an EntraPass
system, into a common virtual site, regardless of their physical connections.

Note: Dial-up connections are not supported by virtual sites.

1. Click the Devices tab and click Site.

2. If you are defining a new site, click the New icon, assign a name to the new site and click the
Save icon. The bullet next to the site name turns green.
3. Enter or edit the description in both languages.

180 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Video
Use video to define cameras, video servers, and events recorded by cameras. You can also view
video recordings. The is an archive management tool that organises recordings in a directory style
pane that makes retrieval easy, and has large storage capacity. You can use Video Vault to export
video files, to find video events, set up recording parameters, link video clips with key frames, and
view recordings of up to 16 cameras simultaneously.

Camera definition
You can assign names to cameras, presets, and patterns for easy identification in the Video desktop
and in all system video events.
The definition of a camera includes identifying its:

• Types: fixed or dome

• Presets: for dome cameras
• Patterns: for dome cameras

The camera name is displayed when viewing live or recorded video events (Intellex only). The
default names are Camera1 through Camera n (where n is the last camera number).

Defining a Camera
1. From the Video window toolbar, click the Camera button. The Camera window appears.
2. Select the camera you want to define, then assign it a descriptive name in the enabled
language fields. It is recommended to assign a name both in the primary and secondary
languages if the system is running in two languages.
3. Select the Camera type from the drop-down list.

- Fixed camera: no preset/pattern; operators cannot control a fixed camera.

- Dome: preset and pattern (Intellex only) available; selecting this option allows
operators to control the camera. If you select this option, assign descriptive names to
the camera presets.

4. Check the Show camera option for the camera to be accessible for selection and display
in the Video view desktop. It is important to check this option if you want the camera to
be enabled in EntraPass. Only operators with appropriate permission will be able to view
a camera with the Show camera option not checked (Hidden/covert cameras). To assign
permission to an operator: System > Operator definition > Privileges .
Note: If you leave the Show camera box unchecked, the camera will not appear in the
Video view component window ( Video view > Modify video view components ) and will
not therefore be assigned in the Video desktop for view. This feature allows to hide a
camera from all view. Operators who do not have appropriate permission will not be
able to view, search, export or carry any other operation on a camera for which they
do not have access permission. However, all links and references to this camera will be
kept. This feature is different from deleting a camera since links to a deleted camera are
deleted as well.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 181

 5. Check the Select specific events option if you want this camera to record specific events.
By default all camera events are displayed in the Video Events List. However, you can decide
which events will be recorded by a specific camera by checking this option. When you do
this, the Event tab appears. You can then select it and specific events will be recorded by
the camera being defined. If this option is checked, you have to select events that will be
recorded by this camera.
6. Using the Up/down controls, adjust the number of presets and patterns for the selected
camera if the selected camera is a dome. When you do this, the Preset or Pattern tabs
appear in the Camera window.
7. Select the view type you want to display when an alarm occurs.

- Video View: The video view selected will be displayed when an alarm occurs on this
camera.
- Graphic View: The graphic view selected will be displayed when an alarm occurs on
this camera.

Associating a Camera with an Icon

About this task:
EntraPass offers you the ability to associate a specific button with a camera for easy identification in
the Video desktop and system Graphic.

1. From the Camera window, select the camera you want to associate with an button, then click
or double-click the button next to the camera type drop-down list. The Select an button
window opens.
2. Choose an appropriate button to associate with the selected camera, then double-click it to
close the window. When you do this, a camera is associated with an button using the button
index.

- The Camera button in the Camera window toolbar allows you to add custom buttons
to the list of available buttons. The list of buttons is displayed when you click the
Camera button in the toolbar.

Defining Presets and Patterns

1. From the Video server window select the Preset (or Pattern ) tab to assign custom names to
your presets.
2. Select a table cell, then overwrite the default name. If you are running the system in two
languages, enter the name in both the primary and secondary language, then click Close to
close the Preset (or Pattern) window.
Note: If you select a preset or pattern and click the Default button, the assigned name is
replaced by the default name.

Defining Events Recorded by a Camera

If the Select specific events option is checked in the General tab, you have to:
• Select events that will be recorded by the camera being defined and that will be sent to the
EntraPass Server. This option is disabled when a camera is connected to an Intellex LT DVR.

182 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • Select or define a schedule that will be used by the video server to report selected events to
the EntraPass Server. This schedule can be used as a filter to limit the message flow from the
Video Server to the EntraPass Server. For instance, choosing an Always valid schedule will
send all the selected events to the EntraPass server. Specifying a limited period of time will
allow to send events that occurred during a targeted period of time.

To Select Camera Events and Schedules

1. From the Camera window, select the Event tab. Typical camera events are displayed in the
window. These are specific to the selected DVR.
2. Select a schedule for camera event reporting. Only events that will be recorded during the
specified period of time will be sent to the EntraPass server. Right clicking the Event report
schedule field enables operators to create a new schedule or to select an existing one. To
define a schedule , make sure that you are selecting the proper category for this schedule.
For example, if you are assigning or defining a system schedule (for workstation, operators,
video triggers) this schedule will be available for selecting components of this category. If
you are selecting a schedule for physical components such as controllers, doors, inputs, their
schedules will be grouped If you have defined two sites in your system, there will be two
separate groups of schedules for each connection. You can define up to 99 schedules for each
connection.
3. Select camera events that you want to send to the EntraPass server. Specifying events to be
sent to the video server is a way of saving on controlling the flow of the video data, and hence
of decreasing bandwidth usage. The list of events is specific to the video server:

- Camera advanced motion alarm (Intellex only) : the camera will send any event
related to a motion alarm.
- Camera alarm (Intellex only) : the camera will send any event related to a change
that occurred in the target area.
- Camera light alarm (Intellex only) :
- Camera motion alarm : the camera will send to the EntraPass server all video
segment events related to any movement that occurred in the target area.
- Camera override (Intellex only) :
- Camera perimeter (Intellex only) : the camera will send all video segment events
related to an object, that has crossed into or out of the target area, to the EntraPass
server.
- Camera text alarm (Intellex only) :

4. Enter the comment you want to associate with the camera being defined, then save and close
the window.

Result

Current recording
Use the current recording feature to view the list of all on-going recordings. The information
displayed depends on the source of the recording request:
• Started by a video trigger
• Started by an operator
• Started by an alarm on the video server

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 183

Viewing the current recordings
1. On the Video toolbar, click the Current recording button. The Current recording window
displays all on-going recordings.

Result
The following table shows the information displayed in the Current recording window depending
on the source of the recording.

Table 33: Current recording information

Initiated by Information
Video server alarm • Initiated by
• Event name
• Start date and time
Video trigger • Initiated by
• Video trigger
• Recording parameter
• Event
• Start date and time
• Remaining time for the recording
Operator • Initiated by
• Workstation
• Operator name
• Start date and time
• Remaining time for the recording

Viewing exported videos

About this task:
EntraPass enables users to view all exported videos. Use this feature to browse the list of all
exported videos and to preview a key frame of the exported videos sequence for all KVI and KVA
formats. You can preview the exported video segment before viewing it.

1. In the Video window, click the View exported video button. The Video folder opens
automatically and includes the list of all exported video sequences that have been exported.
2. Select a video sequence. The video thumbnail appears in the lower left part of the window.
The directory contains the Date and Time the video was taken, the video file format ( Type
) and the File Name . You can then click the Preview button for details about the exported
video.

Exporting Video Files

About this task:
EntraPass exports video segments in four formats: KVI and KVA.

• KVI (Kantech Video Intellex format). Video data are stored in Intellex format (.img). A simple
double-click allows you to view the file using VideoPlayerIntellex.exe.

184 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • KVA (Kantech Video AVI format). Video data are stored in AVI format (.avi). A double click
opens the video file using VideoPlayerWindow.exe.
• AVI format
• IMG format
• PS format

EntraPass users have two options when exporting videos:

• From the Video event list (without previewing the video)

• From the video playback window: in this case, the video is previewed before it is exported.

1. From the video event list, select the video event you want to export.
2. Click the Export button. The Enter a video filename window opens.
3. Enter a file name in the File name field. By default, the file is assigned the Kantech KVI
format. The file will be saved among EntraPass program files:\Kantech\Server SE\Video. Later
you can call this file simply by double-clicking it.
Note: Video files can be viewed in the Exported video window ( Video tab > Exported
video ). The video file is displayed with its name, date and time. Key frames (if any)
associated with a video clip can also be previewed in this window.
4. Click Save to close the Enter filename window. When you do this, the Description and
password window appear.

Finding video events

About this task:
Go to Video > Video event list, and click the Search button to locate and view video segments. If
the Search button is not displayed, click the Menu button.

• Click the Video server tab to search for a video segment on a specific video server.
• Click the Events tab to filter events.
• Click the Options tab to determine the size of the video you are looking for. Appropriate user
access rights are necessary for performing this task.

1. In the Video Events window, click the Search button.

Note: If the Menu button is not activated, the window will not show the button in the
lower part.
2. In the Find video events window, select the Start date and time and the End date and
time for the video segments you are looking for.

3. Select the video server that you want to include in the search. You can select All video
servers if you want to search through all video servers defined in the system.
Note: If an event was registered by more than one video server, at least one of the
servers must be selected for the event to be included in the list.
4. Click the Events tab to filter events to be included in the report. If you select All events, all
the specific events are selected.
5. Click the Options tab to filter video segments according to their duration.
6. Check the Video segment duration limit option, and enter the duration in the Greater than
(mm:ss) and Smaller than (mm:ss) fields. The value entered is in minutes and seconds. This
feature allows you to target video segments meeting specific duration criteria.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 185

 7. Click OK to go back to the Video event list window.

8. Complete one of the options outlined in the following table:

Table 34: Finding video events buttons
Button Use description
Use this Search button to search for events associated with a video segment.

Use the Play button to view a video event. When you click this button, the Video
desktop displays the video event. If only one camera was used, which is most often
the case, the system displays the duration of the video event. If the video event
was recorded by more than one camera on a single server, the video server will use
the most optimal display layout. If the video event was registered by more than
one server, it is possible to select a specific video server. For example, 2x2 for a
maximum of 4 camera, 3x3 for a maximum of 9 camera and 4x4 for a maximum
of 16 cameras. For events with various length, events will be played based on the
longer event. Note that this feature shows limitations when used in systems not
configured for continuous recording as it will not display cameras involved outside
the selected time frame.
The Retry aborted button enables operators to trigger any archiving process that
was suspended.
Use the Menu button to display the buttons in the lower part of the window and the
Legend button to display a legend about the status of the displayed video recording
events.
The KVI (Kantech Video Intellex), KVA (Kantech Video AVI), IMG, AVI and PS formats
are available for your Export needs. These formats allow users to store all the data
relative to a video event such as the event button or key frame, description, etc.
The Save button is enabled when an operator enters data in the Comment field. It
enables operators to save comments associated with a video event.
The Cancel button is enabled when the Comment field is modified. It enables
operators to discard the comment and to go back to the previous value.

Recording parameters
Use the Recording Parameters menu to define parameters that control video recording and to
associate recording parameters, such as video source and cameras, with a video trigger. For each
recording event, you must specify parameters such as the video server source, the camera, etc.
A recording can be stopped by a timer (maximum recording time) or by a trigger when a stop
recording trigger is used. A source component must be specified for each type of triggering event.
For example, the “door” component must be specified for the “Door forced” event message. The
resulting action (whether to start or stop recording) must also be specified.
You can associate multiple recording parameters with one trigger. In this case, all recordings are
associated with the single event and it is possible to save all record segments as a single event
recording.

Setting Up Recording Parameters

About this task:

186 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

The Video record window lets you configure how EntraPass Video records videos. You must possess
the appropriate privileges to set up this feature. There is no limit to the number of definable
recording parameters. The following information can be defined:

• Name in two languages (for systems in two languages)

• Video source (server and camera)
• Preset and patterns
• Start recording trigger
• Pre-alarm time
• Maximum total recording time, etc.

1. From the Video toolbar, click the Recording parameters button. The Recording parameters
window appears with the General tab enabled.
2. Click the New button to create new Recording parameters (or select one from the
Recording parameters drop-down list) and assign a descriptive name to the Recording
parameters.
3. From the Video server pop-up window, select the video server that will be used for the
Recording parameters.
4. From the Camera drop-down list, select the camera for this Recording parameters.
Note: If the selected camera is a dome, you can specify the Preset or Pattern name and
number. Defining these options allows you to direct the camera to a specific position
for recording. However, the pre-alarm time feature may not work well with the preset/
pattern option. In fact, the pre-alarm may be triggered when the camera is directed to a
location different from the one where the video recording event occurred.
5. From the Start recording trigger pop-up window, select the Video trigger you want to
associate with the Recording parameters being defined. The Video trigger pop-up window
displays all video triggers defined in the system.
6. In the Timings section, specify:

- Pre-alarm time (m:ss) : This option enables users to retrieve from the video server,
segment that was recorded before recording was triggered. For example, if a
recording was triggered at 2:00 PM and if the Pre-alarm time is 1min. 0 seconds, the
record segment will start at 1h 59.
- Maximum total recording time (m:ss) : This options allows you to specify a
maximum length for the recording. This includes the pre-alarm time but not the post-
alarm recording delay. The maximum allowed is 5 minutes.

Setting Up Stop Recording Trigger Parameters

About this task:
If you want to associate the defined recording parameters with a trigger for stopping recording,
check the Stop recording trigger option. If you do this, the Stop recording trigger tab appears in
the Recording parameters window.

1. From the Recording parameters window, select the Stop recording trigger tab.

- Post-alarm recording delay (m:ss) : this delay enables the system to end recording
when an “end recording delay” condition has been used. Moving the mouse pointer
over the field shows the value range allowed in the field.
- Trigger : select one (or more) trigger(s) that will stop recording.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 187

 Note: You can create new stop recording triggers by right-clicking the triggers
display area.

Video desktop
The video desktop allows operators to display and monitor, in real-time, video cameras that are
configured and connected to the network.

Displaying a video view

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click the Desktops tab, and select the desktop dedicated to
video.
Note: The Video desktop is empty the first time you open it and the message No video
view selected displays.
2. In the Video View window, select Video view from the list. You can edit the view (Video view
> select a specific View > Modify Video view components button).
3. Perform various tasks using the icons in the lower part of the window. The following table
describes the icons.
Table 35: Video view icons
Icons Description
Use these icons to select a size for the displayed
video. Note: A bigger image requires more process
power. Therefore, selecting a bigger image may
result in lower process power.
Use these icons to Create and Edit video views.

Use this Show view selector icon to display a

mosaic view of all the camera defined in the system.
Help and Close icons. These are EntraPass standard
icons.
4. Click the Show view selector icon to display the View selector window. This small window
allows you to so select a specific view or to monitor a specific camera pattern. For instance, if
you select a cell in the View selector, the sequence is interrupted to display the selected cell.
Note: When you open the Video view selector while a camera is recording, the camera
icon blinks until the end of the recording.
5. From the displayed view, you can click a dome camera icon to display control icons for
this camera (movement, zoom, focus). Available options depend on the Digital Video
Management system connected to your system. For more information, refer to your DVMS
documentation.
Note: If your dome camera is set with pre programmed movement patterns, you can
define a view displaying a pattern composed of one or many of these patterns. For more
information, see Video Views Definition.

Video event list

The Video Event List window displays all video segments recorded in the system and stored in the
Video server database . These video segments can originate from three sources:

• Video triggers

188 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • Manual requests from operators
• Automatic recordings from video servers
Note: Operators must have access rights to the video server to perform operations
on events displayed in the Video Event list. For example, if an operator has not
been assigned permission to use a specific video server, he/she will not view events
originating from this server. User permissions are assigned while defining the security
level: System > Security level.

Using the Video Event List

The Video event list window displays all video events as well as their description. EntraPass
operators can:

• Search for a specific event associated with a video segment based on the date and time when
the video was recorded
• Play a video segment
• Export the video segment for future consultation

Finding video events

• For information about how to find video events, see Finding video events.

Playing Video Segments

About this task:
The Video Event List window is divided in two panes: the left-hand pane displays all video events
that were retrieved according to the search criteria. The lower pane of the window displays the
legend explaining the status of each event. It also contains buttons that enable operators to
perform operations on video recordings. The right-hand pane contains three tabs:

• The Details tab displays the text description of the video event such as the video server that
recorded the event, the operator who was logged on, etc.
• The Cameras tab shows cameras that are associated with a selected event.
• The Image tab contains the key frame for the video sequence. The key frame serves as
preview of the video sequence. It is from this pane that you can associate a video key frame
and link it to the video segment.
Note: Video recordings can be streamed from the left-hand pane ( Play button) or from
the Camera tab. You can also view camera recordings from the Message desktop. To
do so, you have to select a video recording event (identified by a camera button in the
Message desktop), right-click it and select Video recording > Play from the shortcut
menu.

1. From the Video event list, select an event, then click the Play button. The video clip appears in
the Video Playback window.
2. You may select the Cameras tab to view information about the camera that captured the
selected event.

- Start/End dates and times when the recording event occurred.

- Recording time (mm:ss) : duration of the video segment. This duration is specified
when defining recording parameters ( Video menu > Recording parameters ).
- Video trigger , if any: the video trigger is defined in the Video trigger menu and then
selected in the Recording parameters definition.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 189

 Note: The status indicator next to the video server name indicates the current
connection status of the server.

3. You can:

- Click the Play button to view this video segment of the selected camera for the
duration of the recording. The video appears also in the Video desktop ( Desktop
menu)
- Click the Export button to export it for future use. For details, see Exporting Video
Files.

Linking Video Clips with Key Frames

About this task:
EntraPass users have the ability to save a still image that best represents a video sequence linking
this image to the whole video recording. This may be useful for example if one event was registered
by more than one camera and you want to associate the recording with a more explicit image.
Viewing the video event will enable users to identify the best image for this video event, to snap it,
paste it and save it as the best sequence for the video clip. It is also possible to retrieve a previously
saved image and to link it to a video segment, or to paste a previously snapped image.

1. From the Video event list , select an event, then click the Image tab (right pane).
2. From the image window, you can:

- Import image : click the Import button to retrieve a previously saved or exported
image from a file.
- Paste image : click this button to paste a previously snapped image. The Paste image
button is enabled only when you have snapped (copied) an image while viewing it.
You can first play a video clip, snap it and then paste it.
- Clear : click the clear button to delete the displayed image from view.

Exporting Video Files

About this task:
EntraPass exports video segments in four formats: KVI and KVA.

• KVI (Kantech Video Intellex format). Video data are stored in Intellex format (.img). A simple
double-click allows you to view the file using VideoPlayerIntellex.exe.
• KVA (Kantech Video AVI format). Video data are stored in AVI format (.avi). A double click
opens the video file using VideoPlayerWindow.exe.
• AVI format
• IMG format
• PS format

EntraPass users have two options when exporting videos:

• From the Video event list (without previewing the video)

• From the video playback window: in this case, the video is previewed before it is exported.

1. From the video event list, select the video event you want to export.
2. Click the Export button. The Enter a video file name window opens.

190 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 3. Enter a file name in the File name field. By default, the file is assigned the Kantech KVI
format. The file will be saved among EntraPass program files:\Kantech\Server SE\Video. Later
you can call this file simply by double-clicking it.
Note: Video files can be viewed in the Exported video window ( Video tab > Exported
video ). The video file is displayed with its name, date and time. Key frames (if any)
associated with a video clip can also be previewed in this window.
4. Click Save to close the Enter file name window. When you do this, the Description and
password window appear.

Protecting a Video with a Password

About this task:
You can protect exported videos using a password. Users must enter this password to view
exported videos.

Note: The password protection is applicable to KVI and KVA video formats only.

1. Select the video you want to export, then click the Export button.
2. Enter a description for the video segment, in the Enter Video file name window, then click
Save . The Description and password window appears.
3. Check the Use password box if you want to add more security to this video segment. Users
will have to enter this password in order to view the saved video segment.
4. Enter a password and confirm the password in the displayed field.
5. Click OK to close the Description and password window. Click OK to close the system
message confirming the export.

Video playback
Use the video playback feature to view recorded video of up to 16 cameras simultaneously. To do
so, you have to specify the period of time for the playback. A maximum of one hour is allowed.

• Select cameras in the left-hand pane.

• Drag them to the View playback area.

Viewing a Video Playback

1. From the Video playback window, specify the Start date and time and End date and time for
the video you want to view. The maximum allowed is 1 hour. Therefore you may stream video
events that occurred on the same date and for a maximum of one hour.
2. From the left-hand pane, select a camera then drop it into the right pane. It plays for the time
specified in the start and end time. Use the controls in the lower part of the Playback window
(right pane) to play, fast forward, rewind or stop the video playback.
Note: If the requested video is not available, a message appears in the lower part of
the window; the Snap and Export buttons remain disabled. If a video is available, the
message Requesting video is displayed.

- Snap : copy the displayed image and save it in the \tmp\image folder and use it
as a still image representing the video sequence. Later, the snapped image will
automatically appear in the View exported video when browsing the exported videos.
It is recommended to add a comment to the snapped image; the comment will
appears next to the image.
- Export : export the video clip for future usage

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 191

 3. To save a specific video image, click the Snap button.
4. Accept the default name or enter a specific name for the video recording. The video recording
is saved in: Program files\Kantech\Server_SE\Tmp\Image. The video image can then be
viewed using a Windows® image viewer such as Paint. Simply, double-click the video image
to view it.
Note: For the TVR II, the video sequence can only be played forward. That is why the
slider can be moved to the right side only. Also, a new button has been added to jump 30
seconds before the beginning of the current sequence.

Video server configuration

A video server is connected to EntraPass through a specific IP address. The video server captures,
stores and distributes video data to the EntraPass desktops for monitoring and surveillance
purposes. Video data can then be accessed by any EntraPass workstation (with appropriate
permission) through the network. To use the video feature in EntraPass, the video server must
be identified to EntraPass. To ensure that the video server is identified to EntraPass, complete the
following steps:

• Define the video server communication settings.

• Specify video parameters including the number of cameras connected to the server.
• Set communication delays.

Defining the video server communication settings

1. On the EntraPass workstation, click the Video tab, and click Video server.
2. From the Video server list, select the server that you want to configure, or to add a new
server, click the New icon on the toolbar.
3. In the English field, enter a descriptive name for the server. Enter a name in the other
language field if the application runs in two languages.
4. On the General tab, from the Video Server type list, select the digital video recorder (DVR)
type for the video server you are configuring.
Note: EntraPass supports the following integrations:

Table 36: American Dynamics models

Name Model Maximum number
Intellex DVMS8000 8 cameras
Intellex DVMS1600 16 cameras
Intellex IP 16 network video streams
Intellex Ultra 16 channels
Intellex LT-4 4 channels
Intellex LT-8 8 channels
Intellex LT-16 16 channels
AD-TVR-04 ADTVR04050 4 video channels
AD-TVR-04 ADTVR04100 4 video channels
AD-TVR-08 ADTVR08100 8 video channels
AD-TVR-08 ADTVR08200 8 video channels
AD-TVR-16 ADTVR16050 16 video channels

192 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Table 36: American Dynamics models
Name Model Maximum number
AD-TVR-16 ADTVR16100 16 video channels
AD-TVR-16 ADTVR16200 16 video channels
AD-TVR-16 ADTVR16400 16 video channels
AD-TVR-VS 4 video inputs
AD-HDVR-16 16 cameras
AD-HDVR-32 32 cameras

Table 37: Exacq models

Name Maximum number of IP cameras
Exacq-8 8
Exacq-16 16
Exacq-32 32
Exacq-48 48
Exacq-64 64
Exacq-256 256
5. To register the video server as online in EntraPass, select the Online check box.

- If the server is offline for long periods, for example for maintenance, clear the Online
check box. If you do not clear the check box, EntraPass continues to poll the video
server and this may cause the system to hang.

6. In the IP address field, enter the static IP address of the video server. Ensure that the video
server is set to a static IP address. For more information about the video server IP address,
contact your network administrator.
7. In the Domain name field, enter the video server domain address.
8. In the Web service port field, enter a port number for Video (Intellex only),
Communication (Intellex, HDVR and TVR II) , and Event (Intellex only). Ensure that the
port number matches the port used by the DVR.
Note: The video application uses transmission control protocol (TCP) port to
communicate with EntraPass. Options displayed in the TCP port section depend on
the device you are configuring. For details about ports and their settings, contact your
network administrator or refer to the documentation provided with your DVR.
9. The Secure Connection (HTTPS) check box is selected by default for the primary and
alternative IP addresses.

- If the server cannot support HTTPS protocol, clear the Secure Connection (HTTPS)
check box. A warning message appears: Using a non-HTTPS protocol will make your
system less secure. Are you sure?. Click Yes to change the protocol to HTTP.

Note: To use HTTPS protocol, you require an SSL certificate. For more information, see
Step 2 in the Security hardening guide.
10. On the Server Parameters tab, select the Bypass Ping for identification (Intellex only)
check box if you want to conserve bandwidth usage. If you do not select this option, the
workstation continually polls for server identification.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 193

 11. If you want users to enter their credentials to access the video server, select the Specify
video server login (Intellex only) check box. If this option is selected, the Login tab appears
in the Video Server window.
12. To cancel all the messages coming from Intellex, select the Bypass DVR Messages check box.
13. In the Video server parameters area, complete the following steps:

- In the Number of cameras field, enter the number of cameras that are connected
to the video server or click Import camera details. If you click the button, EntraPass
connects to the video server to retrieve the number of cameras and the default names
for the cameras.
- Specify the Polling frequency (mm:ss). The polling frequency refers to the delay
between two polls from the Kantech server to the video server. This operation is
processed by the Kantech video server interface.
- Specify the Polls before Communication failure. This refers to the number of
unsuccessful polls before the video server is declared as offline. For example, if you
enter 4 in this field, EntraPass attempts to connect to the video server four times
before the video server is declared as offline.
- Click the up and down arrows to specify the Time zone adjustment if the EntraPass
server and the DVR server are not in the same time zone. The time zone adjustment
refers to the time zone difference between the DVR server and the EntraPass server.
Adjusting the time zone enables workstations to retrieve events generated by the DVR
server at the EntraPass server’s time.
- Select the Time for clock synchronization (Intellex only) check box. The time
synchronization refers to the time of the day when the video server synchronizes
with the Kantech server for date and time. This operation is processed by the Kantech
video server interface.
Note: The EntraPass server is the reference time source. The video server
processes the time according to the EntraPass server’s time. For example, if the
EntraPass server’s time is 3:00 and the video server's time is 2:00, the timezone
adjustment data is -1 so that the video server can display the correct information
about an event that occurred at a specific time.

Enhancing the Security of Video Servers

1. If your Intellex video server uses Policy Manager, EntraPass operators must use a domain
name, a specific login and password to access the video server. On the General tab, select
the Specify Video server login check box.
Note: Login name and password are mandatory if a HDVR or a TVR II video server type is
used.
For details about the video server security parameters, contact the network
administrator.
2. If the Specify video server login option is checked, the Login tab is displayed.
3. Enter the login data in the displayed fields:

- Domain name : enter the domain name used by the Intellex Video server (not used
for HDVR and TVR II) .
- Login name : enter the login name used for accessing the video server.
- Password : enter the password specific to the domain controller.

194 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Password confirmation : the password for confirmation must be identical to the
password entered in the previous field. If you get an error message, make sure that
the Caps Lock key is not activated. For a HDVR or a TVR II, it corresponds to the DVR
server password.

Remote Video Connection

• IP address
• Domain name (from which the RemoteVideoProcess.exe will be executed)
• Communication port (port opened by the RemoteVideoProcess.exe application to monitor
incoming requests from the EntraPass server)
Note: The RemoteVideoProcess.exe is not accessible from the redundant server.
The Video Viewer option, accessible from the EntraPass installation process, must be
used for the RemoteVideoProcess function to work.

Installation of the Remote Video Connection will add 128 new video servers.

Defining the EntraPass Video Vault

About this task:

• For details about installing EntraPass Video Vault, see Adding System Components.
• For details about configuring the EntraPass Video Vault application, see .
• For details about using EntraPass Video Vault, see .

Result

Video triggers
Video triggers are system events that start or stop recording. Any event related to the selected
component type can trigger recording including exception events originating from a video server.
A source component must be specified for each type of triggering event. For example, the “door”
component must be specified for the “Door forced” event message. There is no limit to the number
of definable video triggers.

Defining Video Triggers

About this task:
The following information can be defined:

• A name in two languages

• The component type: type of component to be programmed for the trigger. Events are
related to system components: gateway, connection, controller, etc.

Based on an event that occurred on the selected system component, the trigger will start or stop
recording.

Note: The list of parameters depends on the video server type connected to EntraPass. It can
vary depending on server feature availability and decisions on subsequent implementation. All
EntraPass events can be associated with the video trigger function.

1. From the Video toolbar, select the Video trigger button. The Video trigger window appears.
2. Click the new button (or select an existing trigger if you want to modify one). Assign a
descriptive name to the trigger.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 195

 Note: An alert message appears when you attempt to save before selecting the
component type as well as the component for the trigger being defined.
3. From the Component type drop-down list, select the component that will trigger the
recording event. It may be a door controller, for example.
4. As a trigger source you can select Single , group or All components from the component
radio buttons.
5. Use the three-dots button to select a component.
6. From the Trigger schedule select a schedule for the trigger to be valid. If necessary, you can
define a specific schedule for this trigger ( Definition > Schedule ). If there is no schedule
selected for a trigger, the trigger will be disabled.
7. From the Event category selection , choose between the EntraPass or Intrusion groups of
events from the drop-down list.
Note: This field is available only when an intrusion panel has been configured in the
system.
8. Click on the Events tab and select events from the list.

Video Views Creation and Modification

Video presets and patterns enable users to perform automatic actions on domes. They are
configured for view in the desktop dedicated to Video viewing. They enable to optimize the time
dedicated to video viewing when displaying videos using pre-programmed views.
EntraPass enables users to define a wide variety of views, depending on their needs:

• Single camera
• Multiple cameras
• Multiple graphics and cameras
• Server-specific view: these are created by dragging a server into the display
• Multiple video servers: depending on their needs, EntraPass users can create views from
multiple video servers.

Modifying a Video View

1. From the Video view window, click the Modify Video view components button to edit or
create content for the Video view desktop.
2. From the left-hand panes, select a camera, a camera preset, or a camera pattern, then drag
it into a right-hand pane cell. A camera is identified by its name and corresponding button. A
preset is identified by the camera name and the preset name.
Note: A specific camera can appear in more than one cell; in this case, the Enable video
sequence option must be enabled. A graphic can appear only in one cell.
A Video view may only includes cameras of the same DVR type (HDVR, Intellex, TVR).

The maximum number of TVR available is 2 .

3. Select the camera layout you want by clicking on the corresponding button in the upper part
of the right pane to specify the number of images you want to display:

- Click 1 X 1 to display 1 image

- Click 2 X 2 to display 4 images
- Click 3 X 3 to display 9 images

196 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Click 4 X 4 to display 16 images.
Note: You can create a view by dragging a video server into the display. This view
will contain all cameras from this specific server.
The number of images displayed influence the speed of the network bandwidth.
For example, if you are displaying 4X4 images, the network bandwidth will be
slower than when you are displaying a 1X1 image.

4. Click the Test button to view the result of the selection. The displayed Video view appears in
the Video desktop for video monitoring and surveillance ( Desktops > Desktop dedicated to
video monitoring).

Note: To delete a camera from a cell, right-click it, then select Delete from the shortcut
menu.
5. Click the Close button (bottom left or the “X” top right) to close the Video test window.

Video views definition

After the video server is defined and its cameras are identified, operators can define video views
that are displayed in the video desktop for viewing and monitoring purposes. EntraPass operators
can then call previously configured presets and patterns.
EntraPass Devices (workstations, gateways, sites, controllers, etc.) can be associated with video
views. Later, the video view can be selected in the components definition to display the component
in the video view.

Defining video view general parameters

1. Click the Video tab and click Video view. The Video View window appears with the General
tab enabled.
2. In the Video view window, from the Video view list, select a video view (or click the New
icon to create one), and enter a name for the video view. If the system is running in two
languages, enter a name in each language.
3. From the Video server list, select a video server type (Intellex, HDVR or TVR).

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 197

 4. From the Default size on video list, select an appropriate size for the image to display. You
can select a smaller size if you have to display the cideo window with another window.

- Large: 1024x768
- Medium: 800x600
- Small: 640x480
- Tiny: 400x300
- Last used: displays the size that was previously displayed in the video desktop.

5. From the Default size on graphic list, select a size for the image to display on the system
graphics (Large, Medium, Small, Tiny, Last used).
6. Specify the Refresh rate percentage using the Up/down arrows.
Note: The Refresh Rate Percentage is related to the image compression/quality.
The image quality impacts the system performance: the higher the quality, the lower
the compression and the lower the system performance. If you set the Refresh
Rate to high (> 80), the compression is low. As result, the application uses a larger
network bandwidth. This may result in a slower process. The following table shows the
recommended options.

Table 38: Image quality options

Quality Description Result
80 and over Super Images are recorded at the highest image quality, using the lowest
quality level of compression. This setting requires the highest amount of
storage space and network bandwidth.
50 Normal, Images are recorded at normal image quality. This setting provides a
Default balance between compression and storage space requirements. The
smaller, more subtle changes between images are ignored.
40 Low quality Images are recorded at low image quality, using the highest level
of compression. This setting requires the lowest amount of storage
space and network bandwidth.
7. Select the Re-initialize video view delay (mm:ss) option if you want the system to refresh
the displayed image. If you select this option, the displayed image updates automatically
when the specified delay elapses. This feature is useful if the defined camera view includes
patterns or presets.
8. In the Video control section, select the appropriate options:

- Show overlay Intellex and HDVR only): select this option if you want the camera
identification (camera name and server) to appear in the video desktop.
- Show camera control: select this option for use with dome cameras. Selecting
this option allows operators to control a dome camera. It is not available with fixed
cameras.
- Show metrics (Intellex only): select this option to enable the system to display the
number of frames per second (Fps) and the number of bits per seconds (Bps) for the
selected camera. The information appears in the upper section of the video window
(and in the video desktop).
- Auto-hide text (Intellex only): if you select this option, the system does not display
the information related to a camera.

198 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Enable image zoom (Intellex only): select this option if you want to display the zoom
value for the selected camera.

9. Select the Enable video pattern check box to alternate video images in the video window. If
you have defined a 2X2 view, the video pattern is composed of four images alternating in the
video display according to the delay specified in the Camera display delay field. If you do not
select this option, the video view displays all the cameras simultaneously.
Note: The enable video pattern section is enabled once components are assigned to the
video view.
10. Select the Delay before launching sequence (m:ss) check box to specify the transition delay
before the images start alternating in the Video window.
11. Specify the Display delays for Cameras, Presets, Patterns and Graphics.
Note: These delays indicate the time interval during which a video or graphic appears
in the video display before it is replaced by another. See the following table for the
minimum or default delays. The maximum delay is 9:59 seconds.

Table 39: Display delays default times

Delay Minimum (seconds)
Delay before launching sequence 2 seconds
Camera display delay 3 seconds
Preset display delay 5 seconds
Pattern display delay 10 seconds
Graphic display delay 5 seconds
12. Click the Details tab to view data about the selected view: video servers, cameras, and when
applicable, camera presets and patterns.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 199

System
Use this section to create, define, and modify an operator’s security level. For more information,
see Security level definition. Before defining operators, a system administrator must grant or deny
operators access to system components. For more information, see Workspace Definition.
Use associations to logically group devices and use commissioning to perform a series of tests to
verify correct installation of each device. To define how EntraPass processes each event, see Event
Parameters Definition.

Database Structure Definition

Use the Database structure menu to browse the system database. It will display the entire structure
of the database including:

• The physical components (EntraPass applications, sites, controllers, doors, relays, inputs and
auxiliary outputs), and
• The logical components (cards, schedules, reports, instructions, groups, etc.).

Operators can edit or sort the system components from the Database structure window.

Viewing the Database Components

1. From the System toolbar, click on the Database structure button.
Note: If the Video feature is enabled in EntraPass, its components will appear in the
Database explorer.
2. To display only the Physical components , select the physical components button. When
selected, only the physical components of the database will be displayed.
Note: By default, physical components are always displayed.
3. To display Logical components , select the logical components button. When selected,
logical components of the database will be displayed along with the physical components.
4. You may use the Refresh button to refresh the display in order to obtain the most recent
information saved in the server database.
5. You may select the Full Expand button to fully expand the tree structure and view all sub-
components of a selected component. For example, if you use this button on a controller, the
system will display the controller components (doors, inputs, relays) on the right-hand side of
the window.
6. You may select the Full Collapse button to fully collapse the tree structure and hide all sub-
components of a selected component.
7. To edit a component, right-click it and select Edit from the contextual menu. The system will
display the corresponding definition window so you can modify its parameters.
8. To sort the component, right click the component, then select Sorted by from the contextual
menu. Sort the components listed in the right-hand pane of the window for an easier find.
You can sort by component or name .
Note: You can define how the component's physical address will be displayed. This
will also affect how components will be sorted. For more on this, see Security Level
Definition.

200 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Event Parameters Definition
Defining event parameters is one of the most powerful features of the system. For each event, you
can determine how it will be processed by the system. For example, you can:

• Direct events to output devices (such as Messages desktop and log printer),
• Define schedules that will allow, for example, to send alarms only at night,

There are more than 400 system events. The most common among them are:

• Access granted
• Input in alarm
• Card modified by operator, etc.

Events are associated with system components, such as doors, controllers, etc. Every event
message is associated with a system component and output devices or group of devices. For
example, an Access granted event can be defined for each individual door or by default it can be
defined for all doors. This flexibility allows for different actions or responses on a door-by-door
basis.

Defining events parameters

About this task:
The Event parameters dialog allows you to customize your system events. In fact, you can specify
events that will be printed automatically or acknowledged during a specific schedule. You can also
send instructions to inform an operator of an alarm through other media (i.e.: email, pager, etc.)
when alarms are generated. By default, all events are defined to be displayed on all the Message
desktops . You can customize your system events by manually associating events and components.
There are two types of associations: manual and default association.

• Default associations: Default associations are preset in the system. By default all events
messages occur on all components associated with them and are displayed in messages
desktops. You can keep the default settings.
Table 40: Default associations
Default associations
Component Workstation Comments
Default Default All events originating from all components are sent to all
workstations
Default (Specific) All events originating from all components are sent to
Workstation 2 only Workstation 2
Specific (Door 1) Default Only events originating from Door 1 are sent to all
workstations
• Manual associations: Manual associations are set up by the administrator and allow you to
send messages to message desktops for specific events. The following table shows the three
types of manual associations.
Note: Manual associations take priority over default associations. When you define
a manual association between an event message and a component, the default
association is ignored. It can be restored by deleting the manual association. Manual
associations should be used with caution.

1. Click the System tab, and click Event parameters.

2. From the Event list, select an event for which you want to define settings.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 201

 Note: By default, all events are defined to be sent to the Messages desktop with an
always valid schedule. It is recommended to keep default settings especially when these
settings apply to all events . However, you may decide to create manual associations if
you want a specific event to generate a specific message or alarm.
3. In the Display settings section, specify the display options: by default, all events are
programmed to be displayed in the Messages desktop window , and are assigned an Always
valid schedule.

4. From the Print pop-up menu, select a schedule to determine when the event will be printed.
When this schedule is valid, the selected event will be printed
5. From the colour drop-down list, select the colour that will be used to display the event in the
Message desktop. The default colours are set according to the following convention:

- Red for alarm events;

- Green for elements returning to a normal condition;
- Yellow for warnings and errors;
- Blue for other events.

6. In the Alarm Settings section, specify:

- Alarm (schedule )—When this schedule is valid, the event will be sent to the Alarms
Desktop and will require an acknowledgement from the operator.
- Instructions —Select the instruction that will be sent to the Instruction desktop with
the event to be acknowledged. Instructions will only be sent when the alarm schedule
is valid.

7. Assign the Priority level to the event using the slider. This determines the sequence in which
alarm messages will be displayed to the operator in the alarm queue. The priorities are
preset to the most common values (0 = higher, 9 = lower).

Viewing Default Parameters

1. From the component pane select a component .
2. Click on the View default parameters button in the toolbar to view the default parameters
message box. It will show if the event parameters were set by default or manually.
3. Click again on the View default parameters button to close the message box.

Deleting and Restoring Associations

1. In the Event parameters window, select the category and then the event you want to modify
from the Event drop-down list.

202 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Printing Event Parameters
About this task:
EntraPass allows you to print events parameters (alarm and display settings) for the selected
events.

1. From the Event parameters window, select the Printer button.

2. In the Select events pane, select the events to be included in your printout or click on the
Select all button to select all the events from the displayed list.
3. In the Select workstations pane select the EntraPass workstation to be included in your
printout or click on the Select all button to select all the EntraPass workstations from the
displayed list.

- Print empty fields : If selected, the system will print the fields that do not contain any
information. Only the field title will be printed.
- Print with default values : If selected, the system will print the default associations
as well as manual associations.
Note: If you do not select this field, only manual associations (not involving
defaults) will be displayed in the report. If you do not have manual associations
(component x with event y), the report will be empty.
- Print components reference : If selected, the system will print the component
physical address next to the component identification.
- Use the Font button to choose a different font (and font size) for your report.
- Select the Preview button before printing, if desired.

Instructions definition
This menu is used to define instructions that must be assigned to events. When an alarm
is generated, the instruction will display in the Instruction window (Desktop menu) for
acknowledgement. Usually, each line will contain a single directive; the response instructions will
be composed of several directives (lines). This allows for greater flexibility when modifications are
required.

Defining an Instruction
1. From the Definition main window, select the Instruction button.
2. To create a new instruction, click the New button. To modify an existing instruction, select
one from the Instruction drop-down list.
3. Enter the instruction name/identification in the language section.
4. If the Mandatory alarm comment checkbox selected, the operator will have to add a
comment in order to mark the alarm as “acknowledged”.
5. Select an appropriate language tab to enter the instruction. Instructions are entered in one
selected language.
Note: You may enter up to 511 characters (including spaces) per instruction.
6. To assign instructions to events, see Trigger and Alarm.

Message Filters Definition

The Message filter feature allows you to define filters for the Filtered Messages desktop. These
filters are used to view a specific selection of events. There are many pre-defined filters such as:

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 203

access events, controller events, etc. These filters can be accessed by all operators. You can select
or create filters directly from the “Filtered Messages” desktop or from the Message Filters menu.
Note: For more information, see Filtered Messages Desktop.

Defining Event for a Message Filter

1. In the System main window, select the Message Filter button. The Message filter window
appears.
2. From the Message filter drop-down list, select an event message type (for example: Door
events or Relay events) for which you want to define a filter. You may also click the New
button to create your own filter.
3. From the Event list , select the events that must appear in the selected filter. You may check
the Select all events option, if you do not want to select specific events. For example, for
a Door events type filter, you may decide to include all events or select the Access-denied
events.
4. Select the Door filters tab to filter doors that will send messages to the Filtered messages
desktop. Additionally, when “Access events” are filtered, the card holder’s picture can be
displayed with the event (if pictures are assigned to cardholders). You can select which doors
will display the cardholder picture when the event for this door is generated.
5. Check the All doors option or choose specific doors for which the cardholders picture will be
displayed an door event.
6. From the Door filter type, select the filter that will be used for filtering Door events:

- Door filter : Only events related to the selected doors will be sent to the Filtered
Message desktop
- Pictures filter : Cardholders pictures related to cards presented to the selected doors
will be sent to the Filtered Message desktop
- Filters for doors and pictures : Door events related to the selected doors as well as
cardholders pictures that triggered door events on the selected doors will be sent to
the Filtered Message desktop.

7. Select the Gateway and connection tab to filter gateways and sites events sent to the
Filtered Messages desktop.
8. Check the All events option to receive events originating from the components of the sites.
You may select the connection that will send events to be displayed.
Note: When you use filters, the system retrieves events that are already displayed in
your Message desktop and sorts these events according to the settings of the selected
filter.
9. Select the Special filter tab to filter events according to their type.

- Picture : all events associated with a card holder’s picture will be displayed in the
Filtered Message desktop.
- Fail-soft : all events generated by a controller in stand-alone mode following
a communication failure will be sent to the Filtered Message desktop. Fail-soft
messages are identified with a + sign in the Filtered Message desktop (and Message
Desktop) when this option is select when defining the Messages list properties (
Desktop > Message Desktop > right-click an event > Properties ).
- Video : all video record events will be sent to the Filtered Messages desktop.

204 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Note: When you use filters, the system retrieves events that are already
displayed in your Message desktop and filters these events according to the
settings of the selected filter.

Operators definition
Use the Operator menu to define system operators and to determine their security level and
privileges. An operator is responsible for issuing cards, carrying out manual operations on system
components, requesting reports, and arming the system. For security reasons, each operator
accessing the system database should have his/her profile defined to ensure that all the actions
performed in the system will be traceable. You need to create at least one operator account or
modify the pre-created accounts for the operator to use and operate EntraPass and to receive
event messages.
There is one default operator created in the system:
Installer: full access to view, modify, delete, and print components. The default username is
kantech. You must create a new password. For information about creating passwords, see
Password rules.
Note: You can define operators using the default operator or you can create new operators.
For information about operators’ security levels, see Security Level Definition.

Creating or editing an operator

1. Click the System tab, and click Operator.
Note: The upper right-hand corner shows the last time the operator logged on.
2. In the Operator window, enter the operator Name. The operator name can have a maximum
of 40 alphanumeric characters including spaces. The operator name displays in the desktop
message lists and the reports.
3. Optional: Enter the operator’s email.
4. Enter the operator Login name. This descriptive name can have 6 to 20 alphanumeric
characters including spaces.
Note: On login, operators must enter their login name and password to validate their
access. The login name is displayed in the events details when operator events are
generated, for example, manual operation, login, and logout.
5. In the Password field, enter a new password. For information about creating passwords, see
Password rules.
6. In the Password Confirmation field, re-enter the new password. If this password is not
identical to the one entered in the password field, an error message appears.
7. In the Language section, select the display language for this operator. If you change the
display language, it is effective only when the operator logs out and logs on again. When an
operator logs out and exits an application, the next operator who logs on to the application
sees the startup window in the language of the last operator.
8. In the Privileges section:

- Select the Auto acknowledge option. If this option is selected, the Manual button
is added to the Alarms desktop (see Alarms Desktop). The operator can decide to
manually or automatically acknowledge events. This is an operator privilege.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 205

 - Automatic video display: this option tells the system to automatically display video
clips on an alarm event for the operator who is logged on. If the Alarm desktop is
configured and open, the video displays automatically. If the alarm desktop is not
open, the system checks the video display settings for this workstation: Devices >
Messages 2 of 2, Disable autodisplay of video views, if this option is not selected,
the system checks the video view settings for this operator: Operator > Automatic
video display checkbox.
Note: The Override workstation workspace message option is a privilege
granted to operators. It allows them to receive all events regardless of which
workstation they are logged on to. If this option is selected and Apply operator
parameters for messages and Apply operator parameters for alarms options
of the Workstation definition are also selected, then the basic configuration
is ignored and events are filtered according to the security level of the operator
who is currently logged on to the workstation.
- Select Filter reports using workspace to issue all requested custom and in/out
reports according to the operator’s permissions as defined in their workspace.
Note: A selected component in the workspace must have its parent component
selected as well, otherwise it does not display in the report even if the Filter
reports using workspace option is selected.

9. Click the Security tab to set operator access parameters.

10. From the Login Schedule list, select the schedule when the operator can log on to the
system. You can create a specific schedule for an operator, Definition > Schedule, and then
assign the schedule to the operator.
Note: To allow an operator to log on to different EntraPass applications or to the
EntraPass Server, select Allow login on application and Allow login on server (System
> Security Level > Miscellaneous tab).
11. From the Security Level list, select a security level that determines which components
an operator has access to. A security level consists of menus through which an operator
can perform tasks such as modify the database, create components, and view system
components and events.
Note: You can define up to 250 custom security levels. EntraPass offers three built-
in security levels, Installer, Administrator and Guard. The default configuration for an
installer permits access to all system components. The installer must program other
security levels to limit operator access to menu commands or options.
12. From the Workspace list, select a workspace that determines which physical components,
including desktop display and card fields, the operator can access for day to day operations.
Note: EntraPass offers one built-in installer workspace when you install EntraPass for
the first time.
13. If you select the Disable synchronization check box, Single Sign On is disabled and Active
directory ceases to update any data. The operator still exists in EntraPass but is not updated
by the synchronization.
14. Click the Save icon.

Security level definition

Security level refers to the permissions granted to an operator to access EntraPass logical
components including desktops and card information, as well as to perform some actions on those
components.

206 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Note: You have to program the appropriate security levels if you want to limit operator access
to commands or options on the system menu.
You can customize an operator security level; the system allows you to create up to 250 security
levels. Each operator has a separate logon name, password, and a corresponding security level. The
password is case sensitive. There is one operator and security level pre-configured in EntraPass.
Installer

• Logon name: kantech.

• Password: You must create a new password. For information about creating new passwords,
see Password rules.
• Security level: By default, a user that is defined as an installer has full access to all the
system menus, can read and edit system components, and has unrestricted access to the
system.

Creating and modifying operator security levels

About this task:
Assigning security levels is critical to the system. If a security level is given full access to a system
menu, operators who are assigned this security level are able to modify system parameters. Ensure
that each operator is given the security level corresponding to their tasks.
Items in the security level window are presented in a root tree with all components available for
selection. This structure makes it possible to target specific components when granting security
levels for manual operations. Each security level is identified by a colour: full access (green),
read-only (yellow) and no access (red). The security manager or an operator with appropriate
permissions can easily change or assign a component to a lower security level by double clicking an
item until it changes to the desired colour code.

Note: Operators cannot see items that they have not been given access to.

1. On the System tab, click Security level.

2. In the Security level window, from the list, select the Security level you want to modify.

- To create a new security level, click the New icon and enter the necessary information
in the language section.

3. Select a system tab: Workstation, EntraPass Web, EntraPass Go or Smartlink API.

4. Double-click an item until it reaches the desired status: No access (red) , Read-only (yellow),
or Full access (green) . You can also check the appropriate items on the left to be more
specific about the allowed rights.
Note: A user with read-only rights cannot print components in EntraPass.

Defining Login Options for an Operator

About this task:
The Miscellaneous tab allows you to define operator login and system display options:

• Operator login options: you can allow or restrict an operator to log in an EntraPass
workstation.
• Active windows that can be kept on the desktop: EntraPass allows operators to keep two
active windows on the desktop.
• Component display options: components can be displayed with our without their physical
address. The physical address can appear on the left or right of the component name.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 207

 1. Select the Miscellaneous tab to define parameters for the security level being defined.
2. In the Login restrictions section, select the appropriate login options:

- Select Allow login on server to allow the operator to log in to the EntraPass server
(Primary or Redundant).
- Select Allow login on workstation to allow the operator to log in to any application in
the system. the system.

3. The Keep on application desktop section allows users to increase the number of active
windows on the desktop. In fact, operators can open two windows at the same time.
EntraPass windows are classified in two categories:

- Configuration screen : this group includes all the menus that allow an operator to
program the system. This group includes such menu items as: User menu (card,
Badging, card access group, access level, Definition menu; Group menu; Devices
menu; System menu; Custom and In/Out reports .
- Operation screen : this group includes all the Operation menu items and the Video
playback option.

4. In the Components physical address section, specify how the component's physical address
will be displayed. This will also affect how components will be sorted.

- Display on left —If selected, components will be sorted by their address (i.e. 01.01.01
Controller xyz).
- Display on right —If selected, components will be sorted by their component name
(i.e. Controller xyz 01.01.01).
- No display —If selected, the address will not be displayed (i.e. Controller xyz) and
components will be sorted by name.

5. In the Miscellaneous section:

- Hide card holder pin content: If selected, it offers you the ability to hide the card
holder pin content from the view.
- Hide Camera from video view: If you are using the Video feature, EntraPass enables
you to deny viewing permission to a specified security level.
Note: Checking the Hide camera from video view option tells the system to
verify access permission to cameras before loading a video view. For example,
if the selected operator’s security level has access to a video server but not to
all cameras defined in the video server and has access to the selected video
view, the system will hide the camera that has been un-selected when assigning
permission to the video server. For details, see Video Server Configuration.

Hiding Card Information

About this task:
EntraPass offers you the ability to hide card information fields from view. For example, you can
decide that a certain security level (Guard for example) can view or modify card information field.
To do so, select the security level, then under the Card database fields tab, check the box that
corresponds to the fields you want to hide.

208 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 1. Select the Card database fields tab to limit the number of card fields that are visible to the
operator who is assigned this security level.

2. Select the fields (either individually or in groups) that will be hidden to the selected security
level. Click on a field box repeatedly to scroll through the different status (Normal, Hide, or
Read only).

Assigning Video Custom Buttons

About this task:
EntraPass offers you the ability to customize five buttons for use in the Video interface. System
installers and administrators can customize buttons for use by operators in the Video desktop. For
example, a button customized for Playback with fixed delay with specific pre-record and record
delays and assigned to a specific Security level will enable operators to trigger the actions related
to the specific button. If you associate a custom button with a specific task (play back or generating
video events, additional buttons are added to the Video desktop (Desktops > Desktop dedicated to
video viewing)

1. From the Security level drop-down list, select the security level you want to define/edit.
2. Select the Video custom button tab to assign permission to this operator. The following
permission can be granted:

- Playback with fixed delay

- Playback with custom delay
- Generate recording event with fixed parameters
- Generate recording event with custom parameters.

3. Select the option you want to assign to the operator being modified.
Note: Pressing the button associated with Playback with fixed delay will start a play
back with the specified duration. This includes the pre-alarm recording time and the
maximum recording time.

Workspace Definition
Workspaces allow System Administrators to grant or deny operators access to system physical
components such as gateways, sites, relays, etc. Workspaces are defined according to the type of
tasks the operators will be allowed to perform in EntraPass; creating and editing items, viewing
components, printing lists or reports, etc. Operators who are assigned a given workspace will not
be able to see nor modify EntraPass components that are not selected in that workspace definition.
Workspaces can also be used by operators to discriminate the information they want to view on
screen. For example, a System Administrator who has access to all components of the EntraPass
system may want to view only specific components. In that case, the System Administrator can
define a specific workspace for that environment and work within those parameters.
Note: There is only one default Installer workspace created when you install EntraPass for the
first time.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 209

Workspace Filtering
• Hierarchical filter : items in a list will be displayed according to the item selected in the level
above. For example, when selecting a specific site (parent), the system will automatically
adjusts itself to display only the corresponding controllers (children). And if you select a
specific controller (parent), the system will adjust itself to display only the corresponding
doors (children), and so on.
Note: If a tab is empty, verify that you have selected components from it’s parent.
• Once you have selected the Hierarchical filtering mode, it will remain activated under all
tabs.

Defining Gateways and Sites

1. Move to the Gateway and Site tab to select the list of gateways and sites that will be
available to an operator who is assigned the workspace.

- Select All gateways and sites if you want all the displayed gateways and sites to be
available to the operator assigned to this workspace.
- You can also select individual gateways and sites from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining Schedules
1. Move to the Schedule tab to select the list of schedules that will be available to an operator.

- Select All schedules if you want all the displayed schedules to be available to the
operator who is assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual schedules from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining Controllers
1. Move to the Controller tab to select the list of controllers that will be available to an operator
who is assigned the workspace.

- Select All controllers if you want all the displayed controllers to be available to the
operator who is assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual controllers from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Note: When you select a controller, you also select all the components defined “under”
or related to the controller (i.e. doors, relays, inputs, outputs). Make sure that you have
also selected the gateway ( Gateway and Site tab) for which the selected controller is
defined. If the gateway is not selected, the controller will not be available even if it is
selected in the list.

210 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Defining Doors
1. Move to the Door tab to select the list of doors that will be available to an operator who is
assigned this workspace.

- Select All doors if you want all the displayed doors to be available to the operator who
is assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual doors from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining Relays
1. Move to the Relay tab to select the list of relays that will be available to an operator who is
assigned the workspace.

- Select All relays if you want all the displayed doors to be available to the operator
assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual relays from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining Inputs
1. Move to the Input tab to select the list of inputs that will be available to an operator who is
assigned the selected workspace.

- Select All inputs if you want all the displayed inputs to be available to the operator
assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual inputs from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining Access Levels

About this task:
Associating specific access levels to a workspace allows you to control the access levels that an
operator can define or modify. For example, a security guard may have the right to issue cards that
are valid for a given door or access level only.

1. Move to the Access level tab to select the list of access levels that will be available to an
operator who is assigned this workspace.

- Select All access levels if you want all the displayed access levels to be available to an
operator who is assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual access levels from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Note: Make sure that you have also selected the gateway for which the selected access
level is defined. If the gateway is not selected, the access level will not be available even
if it is selected in the list.

Defining Alarm Systems

About this task:

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 211

Associating alarm systems to a workspace allows you to control the alarm systems that an operator
can define or modify.

1. Move to the Alarm system tab to select the list of alarm systems that will be available to an
operator who is assigned this workspace.

- Select All alarm systems if you want all the alarm systems to be available to the
operator assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual alarm systems from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining Card Filters

About this task:
Associating card filters to a workspace allows you to control the card filters that an operator can
define or modify.

1. Move to the Card Filter tab to select the list of card filters that will be available to an operator
who is assigned this workspace.

- Select All cards filter if you want all the card filters to be available to the operator
assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual card filters from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining Reports
About this task:
This feature gives operators access to specific reports according to their workspace. For example,
a System Administrator may have access to all the reports that can be generated whereas the
Guards’ Supervisor may only have access to all Guard Tour related reports. The reports will be
generated from the Archived Message list on the workstation desktop. Once the reports have
been assigned to workspaces, operators will only have access to reports that correspond to their
workspace.

1. Move to the Report tab to select the list of reports that will be available to an operator who is
assigned this workspace.

- Select All reports if you want all the displayed reports to be available to the operator
who is assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual reports from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining Graphics
1. Move to the Graphic tab to select the list of graphics that will be available to an operator who
is assigned the workspace.

- Select All graphics if you want all the displayed graphics to be available to the
operator assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual graphics from the displayed list.

212 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 2. Save your modifications.

Defining Operators
About this task:
For security reasons, an operator can see and change another operator’s rights. Use the Operator
tab to limit the possibility for an operator to see, edit or delete another operator.

1. Move to the Operator tab to select the list of operators that will be available to an operator
who is assigned the workspace.

- Select All operators or individual operators from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining Badge Layouts

1. Use the Badge Layout tab to determine which badge layout will be available for a given
operator who is assigned the workspace.
2. Move to the Badge Layout tab.

- Select All badge layout or individual badge layouts from the displayed list.

3. Save your modifications.

Defining Workspaces
About this task:
This feature gives operators access to information that pertains to specific workspaces according to
other operators workspaces. For example, Guards in the system may have a workspace assigned to
them according to the area they are patrolling and the type of information they can view and edit in
EntraPass. The Guard’s Supervisor, however, must have access the information available to all the
Guards working in his department. In that case the list of workspaces for the Supervisor will contain
all the Guards’ workspaces defined in EntraPass.

1. Move to the Workspace tab to select the list of workspaces that will be available to an
operator who is assigned the selected workspace.

- Select All workspaces if you want all of them to be available to the operator who is
assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual workspaces from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Specifying Security Level

About this task:
The Security level tab in the workspace only limits the operators to select which security levels they
can assign when creating/modifying operators.

1. Move to the Security level tab to select the security level (s) that you want to assign that
workspace. If you must create a new security level, see Security Level Definition.

- Select All security levels if you want to assign them all to that workspace.
- You can also select individual security level from the displayed list.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 213

 2. Save your modifications.

Defining Video Servers

About this task:
The video server list allows you to assign or limit operator access to specific video servers and
cameras. For example, even if a workspace level allows access to a video server, you still have the
ability to restrict access to a specific camera for that workspace. This feature makes it easier to
define or modify permission for accessing a video server, a video view or other video menu items.

1. Move to the Video server tab to select the list of video servers that will be available to an
operator who is assigned the selected workspace.

- Select All video servers if you want all of them to be available to the operator who is
assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual video servers from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Note: To filter video views available to an operator, the operator’s workspace must
have access permission to the video server associated with this specific video view. For
example, if operators are granted access permission to a video view but their workspace
definition does not give them access to the video server where the video view is defined,
the video view will not be available to operators with this workspace.

Defining Cameras
1. Go to the Camera tab to select the list of cameras available to an operator who is assigned
the selected workspace.

- Select All cameras if you want all the cameras to be available to the operator who is
assigned this workspace.
- You can also select specific cameras from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining Video Views

1. Move to the Video views tab to select the list of video views that will be available to an
operator who is assigned the selected workspace.

- Select All video views if you want all of them to be available to the operator who is
assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual video views from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining Panels
About this task:
Associating panels to a workspace allows you to control the panels that an operator can define or
modify.

214 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 1. Move to the Panel tab to select the list of panels that will be available to an operator who is
assigned this workspace.

- Select All panels if you want all the panels to be available to the operator assigned
this workspace.
- You can also select individual panels from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining Panel Components

About this task:
Associating panel components to a workspace allows you to control the panel components that an
operator can define or modify.

1. Move to the Panel Component tab to select the list of panel components that will be
available to an operator who is assigned this workspace.

- Select All panel components if you want all the panel components to be available to
the operator assigned this workspace.
- You can also select individual panel components from the displayed list.

2. Save your modifications.

Defining events
About this task:
Use this feature to define the event messages that display to operators who are assigned the
selected workspace.

1. Click the Events tab to select the list of events that you want to display on an operator
workstation. These events display for operators who are assigend to the workspace.
2. Save your modifications.

Operators in Workspace
1. For security reasons, an operator can see and change another operator’s rights. An
additional tabulation was integrated under Workspace to limit the possibility for an operator
to see, edit or delete another operator.
2. From the System menu, select Workspace.
3. Select an operator from the drop down list.
4. Select the Operator tab. You will see a list of operators who can be seen by the selected
operator in the Workspace drop down.

Audit
About this task:
Use the Audit icon to view which operator made changes or deleted a component.

1. To open the Audit window, click the System function, and click Audit.
2. To select an operator, choose from the Operator list.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 215

 3. To select a component, choose from one of the following options in the Component list.

- All
- Create
- Modify
- Delete

4. In the Start date and time field, select a date and time to start the search.
5. In the End date and time field, select a date and time to end the search. Click Search.
The search results populate two tables, the first table contains the folowing component
information:

- Color coded colunm: indicates if the component was created, modified, or

deleted.

- Green: Create
- Blue: Modify
- Red:Delete

- Date and time: the date and time the card was created, modified, or deleted.
- Type: the menu that was changed.
- Component Type: the component that was changed.
- Count: the number of fields that were changed.
- Account column: indicates, which system account the change occurred.

The second table contains the following component information:

- Reference: the item the change references.
- Field name: the name of the GUI field.
- Old value: the value before the change occurred.
- New value: the value when the system saved the change.
- Field description: description of the field name.

To access the following column options, click the Hamburger icon in the
upper left table.
- Data type: the database data type:

- TimeStamp
- Integer
- Object
- Components

- Table name: the database table name.

Note: Define the results based on the amount of records, or by date. For more
information, see .

216 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 To access the context menu, select a table entry, and right-click. The following options
are available:

- CSV export selected: export the selected entry of the card audit trail to a CSV
format file.
- CSV export all: export the entire content of the card audit trail to a CSV format
file.
- View old value: view a window with the value before the change.
- View old value parent: view a window of the parent of the selected component
with the value before the change.
- View old value link: view a window representing a link to the component with
the value before the change.
- View new value: view a window with the value after the change.
- View new value parent: view a window of the parent of the selected component
with the value after change.
- View new value link: view a window representing a link to the component with
the value after the change.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 217

Reports
Use this section to view, and define reports, their formats, and schedules. You can use Quick Report
Definition to create a report for a set number of specific events. If you want to configure the system
to generate automatically a report on a specific recurring day, see Custom reports definition.
You can choose to customize the report with an event filter, and component filter. To view archived
reports saved in the system, use Archive viewing. The Card Use Report creates reports that lists
cardholders who did, or did not generate events for a specific period. To choose an output format,
see defining a report output format, and for report schedules, see Defining Automatic Report
Schedules.
You can use Requesting Reports to request pre-defined historical reports, or card use reports
that the system created using the Custom reports definition. To view the status of all requested
reports that are still pending, see Report state. The Report Log is a detailed list of all history reports
processed by the system. If you need to know who swiped their card at a reader or group of
readers within a certain period, use Roll Call Reports.

Archive viewing
The Archive feature enables users to view the reports that were defined and saved in the system.
Operators can use it to view reports in any format, or to customize a report before printing it.
Note: When you create a report (csv, db or dbf), the system automatically creates an
associated rdf file. This rdf file is the one that is listed in the Archive window. When you click
“Preview”, the system automatically launches the appropriate program to view the report.

Displaying a Report
1. Under the Report toolbar, click the Archive button. The system displays the default
destination folder. If the report was saved in a different folder, browse the disk, using the
scroll-down arrow (bottom of the window) to the report you want to display.
2. Select the report you want to view. If there is a printer installed, the Preview button is
enabled. It is used to preview the report before printing it.
Note: You must have a printer installed on your computer in order to preview or print
reports. To setup a printer, click on Start > Settings > Printers > Add Printer . For more
information, consult your system administrator.
3. Click the Details button to display information about the report. If you click the Details
button, the Report details window appears, displaying information related to the selected
report file such as the report file name, title, type, date, etc. The Workspace as report filter
field indicates whether the report has been filtered according to the requester’s workspace
restrictions.
4. Click the Details button again to close the Report details window.
5. Click the Preview button to view the report in the system displays the Report preview
window.

Previewing Reports
1. From the Archive window, select the report you want to view in the right-hand pane. If you
select a report generated by Sybase, the Report Options window will display allowing you to
customize your report before printing it.
Note: If you select a CSV type of report, the report will be generated in a WordPad
window, in text format.

218 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 2. Define the filter options: enter a text string in the Search description field. The report will be
sorted leaving only events containing the specified text string. You may refine your filter:

- Contains: All events which contain the specified text will be included in the report.
- Starts with: All events which start with the specified text will be included in the
report.
- Ends with: All events which end with the specified text will be included in the report.
- Exact words: All events containing the exact specified text will be included in the
report.

3. Click on the Preview button , select a printer from the drop-down list and click OK . The
system displays the result of the report. From that window, you can:

- Search text within the report

- Print a report
- Save a report in various formats such as PDF, RTF, HTML and TXT
- Load a report (in a.QRP format)

4. Click Properties to access the Reports details window where detailed information is
displayed:

- Report file name : Displays the whole path where the report was saved as well as its
name.
- Report title : Displays the title of the report.
- Start date : Reports are created for a selected time frame. This option specifies the
starting date of this time frame.
- End date : Reports are created for a selected time frame. This option specifies the
ending date of this time frame as well as the time.
- Requested : Displays the date and time at which the report was requested.
- Delivered : Displays the date and time at which the report was produced and
printed.
- Requested by : Displays the name of the operator that requested the report.
- Count : Displays the number of transactions (lines) in the report.
- Output process : Displays a list of the possible templates used for this report.

Previewing In/Out Reports

1. In the Archive window, select the report you want to view. If the selected report was defined
as a “Display In/Out Report” and “Sybase Database” as the output format, the following
window appears.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 219

 2. Select the display options:

- Group by— Select this option for easier management. The report data may be
grouped by card user names or by card numbers.
- Sort by—You may choose a sort order, by user names, or by card numbers.
- Report type—Select this option for easier management. You may choose to include
details with or without total.

3. Click Preview to display the result of the report. From that window, you can save the report
(in.QRP format) or print the report.

Card Use Report

About this task:
The card use report feature is used to create reports that will list cardholders who did, or did not,
generate events for a specific number of days or a specific date. For example, operators could
request a report including “access granted” events that were generated since a specific date. The
system displays five event types:

• Access denied (bad location, bad access level, bad card status, etc.)
• Access granted
• Database (events that have affected the database, such as card definition modified)
• In/Out events (entry, exit)
• Other events

1. In the Card use report window, select a report from the Report drop-down list. If you
are creating a new report, click the New button in the toolbar, then enter the necessary
information in the language section.
2. You may also check the Process separately option if you want the events to be processed
individually for each card. For example, if you want a report for “Access denied events” and
“Access granted events”, if you do not check the Process separately option, the report will
contain all these events. When the Process separately option is checked the report will
display Access granted events and Access denied events separately.
3. Specify the card use options (Not used since or Used since) and defined periods.
4. To define the target period, click the From radio button and select a date. You may select a
date in the calendar when you click the drop-down arrow. Alternatively, you may use the up/
down controls or enter the number of days back, starting from today’s date.
5. When you have finished defining the report, save it. You may request it using the Report
request button in the Report toolbar.

Automatic Report Schedule

Select the Automatic report schedule tab to define automatic settings for your reports so they can
be automatically generated when needed. Click here for more details.

Automatic Report Output

Select the Automatic report output tab to define automatic output settings for your reports. Click
here for more details.

220 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Custom reports definition
The custom report definition feature allows users to define customized reports with their
own automatic execution parameters. Reports that are defined with automatic settings are
automatically generated at the specified time. However, they can be requested manually when
needed.

Using the Default “All Events” Report

About this task:
You can generate a default report that will include all events. The default report is an historical
report type. EntraPass can send you an automatic report by email.

1. Under the Report toolbar, click the Custom report button. The Custom report window
appears.
2. You can only edit the language section for the All events report.

Defining a Custom Report

General parameters
1. Click the Report tab, and click Custom report. The Custom report window appears.
2. In the Custom report window, to create a new report, click the New icon and enter the
necessary information in the language section. To modify an existing report, select it from the
Report list.
3. You can use the default All events option or select a specific event type from the list. To
select particular events, go to Events Selection.
4. Choose an Events filter:

- Normal and abnormal events: select this option to include normal and abnormal
events in the report.
- Normal events: quick report can create reports based on normal events. In an access
report, normal events would be events such as access granted.
- Abnormal events: events such as access denied (bad access level, supervisor level
required), workstation server abnormal disconnection, gateway communication
failure, or all events related to a process that is not complete (a controller reload
failure, for example), are considered abnormal.
- Watchable events: These are preselected events that can be displayed on EntraPass
Web Watchlist. It can be used to issue a report of events related to EntraPass Web.

5. Check Bypass operator workspace to issue a report with no regards to the operator’s
workspace permissions. For more information, see Creating or editing an operator.
6. Origin Filter: This filter is used to define a report of events coming from one or more of the
selected sources only. If one or more sources (connection, gateway, site and application)
are seelcted in the Origin Filter, an Origin tab is added and this allows user to select one or
more components related to selected source
7. Component filter: Select a Filter mode for the components to be included. Use the
checkbox to display deleted components.
8. Specific time frame: Only events (event time) that are within this specific time frame are
included in your report.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 221

Events Selection
1. Select an event category from the drop-down list.
2. Select All events or select each event to include in the report individually.
3. If you have selected Select all events, you can also indicate which component status to
display (New, Modify or Delete). In reports, events will be precessed by the following signs:

- + (New)
- = (Modify)
- - (Delete)
Note: The checkboxes under Specific Database Event are displayed only when a
database event is selected.
The Events selection tab contains events based on the selected filters only.

Origin
From this tab, you can select components from the origin(s) selected in the General tab with the
Origin filter.

Components
About this task:
If you have selected a Step 7, the Components tab will appear only when the corresponding
events are checked. You must specify the components that may affect the report.

1. Move to the Component tab.

2. Select a component type to display its items in the right-hand pane. If you select Doors, all
the access system doors are displayed in the right-hand pane.

Cards
1. In the Custom report window, move to the Cards tab. It is displayed only when access events
are selected. It is used to add more filters to your report in order to target specific events.
2. Select the All Cards option to include all cards.
3. From the Filter mode drop-down list (None, Include, Exclude), specify if the system should
exclude or include the value range that you specify in the Upper/Lower boundary fields.
When a filter mode is selected (Exclude or Include), the “Boundary” fields are enabled.
4. Enter the value range in the Lower/Upper boundary fields according to the selection in the
Filter mode field. These may be, for example, alphabet letters (if the filter index is by names;
or numeric, if the filter index is by card number). You could, for instance, use the card user
name and specify A to F in the Lower/Upper boundary as the lower and upper boundaries.
As a result the system will include events in which the selected door is defined and events in
which the defined card numbers appear but only for card holders whose names begin with A
to F.
Note: Users can select more than one filter for the same report using the filter index.
Events are filtered in times depending on how many filter indexes are defined for the
report.

Automatic Report Schedules

About this task:
Use the Automatic report schedule tab to define automatic settings for your reports so they can
be automatically generated when needed. These settings indicate:

• The frequency: when the report should be generated: none, weekly, monthly, and once.

222 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • The time period covered .
• The output process: display, print, etc.
• The output type: Sybase, CSV, PDF.
• The language and the file name.
Note: Make sure that EntraPass is running at the time you have defined for the
automatic report generation. For example, if you have set the report schedule to daily, at
00:30, EntraPass must be running at that time to generate the report.

1. In the Custom report window, move to the Automatic report schedule tab.
2. From the Schedule mode drop-down list, select the frequency at which the report should be
executed:

- Select None if you want the report to be manually requested (see Report Request).
- Select Weekly if you want a report every week. You have to check the day on which the
report should be executed automatically.
- Select Monthly if the report is needed once a month. You have to specify the day (ex.
the second Friday of the month or the 15th day of the month) when the report will be
executed automatically.
- Select Once if you want the report to be executed automatically on a specified date.

3. In the Start at this time field, enter the time the system will start executing the report.
4. Specify the Scheduling parameters:
Note: These settings are ignored when the report is requested manually by an operator.

- Start this many days back: The report starts collecting events according to the
number of days specified in this field. It is based on the present date.
- Start at this time: When you specify the amount of days, specify the starting time
(i.e.: 7:00am). For example, if you enter 7:00, events that occurred at 6:00 will not be
included in the report.
- Stop this many days back: The report includes the specified number of days entered
in this field. It is based on the present date.
- Stop at this time: Once you specify the number of days, specify the ending time
(i.e.:5:00 pm), that is, the day on which the system will stop collecting data; you may
also specify the time at which it will stop. For example, if you enter 7:00 and an event
occurred at 8:00, then this event will not be included. To target events that occurred
during a specific time frame, you must use the Specific time frame option.
Note: The start and end time are only used for the first day and last day, for
example if you start collecting events on Monday at 8:00 and end on Friday at
17:00 all events between 8:00 Monday and 17:00 Friday will be included. The
system does not use the start and end time for each day but for the whole
period.

Automatic report output

1. Enter a Report Name. The default report name is YYY_MM_DD-HH_MM_SS, indicating the
year_month_day-hours, minutes_second. This name will also be used as the output file name.
The default output directory is \Users\Public\Documents\EntraPass.
2. From the Database output type, select the output format of the report. You may choose
Sybase, CSV, PDF, Excel, RTF, or text formats by selecting the icon.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 223

 3. From the Database output process drop-down list, select the report template. It will be
used with the requested report. For details on the output format, see Defining a Report
Output Format.
Note: From the Database output processdrop-down , you can select Email custom
report if you want this report to be automatically sent to specified recipients. When you
select the Email custom report the email options are displayed within the same page.
EntraPass enables you to protect the report by a password before emailing it. When
the email option is selected, the option to use any smartlink available is enabled. This
option will use any available SmartLink to send the report email.
The following table shows the difference between these database formats and their output file
formats.
Table 41: Database formats and output file types
Database Description
SyBase The EntraPass database.
CSV Save the report in a comma separated values format (yourfile.csv). A data format
in which each piece of data is separated by a comma. This is a popular format
for transferring data from one application to another; because most database
systems are able to import and export comma-delimited data.
Excel Microsoft Excel file type.
PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is an open standard for document exchange.
It can be opened with the free application Adobe Reader.
RTF The Rich Text Format (RTF) is a proprietary document file format with published
specification for cross-platform document interchange. Most word processors are
able to read and write some versions of RTF.
text A text file is a kind of file that is structured as a sequence of lines.Can be opened
by a large number of editing tools.
4. Select the report language.

Defining a Report Output Format

Historical and Card use reports
1. If you select Database only ( CSV and Sybase ): The report will include the following
information: event sequence, date and time, event message, description types (displays a
specific number that identifies a component in the system), description names (displays the
name of the component as defined in the system—name of description type number) as well
as the card number (for card-related events).
Note: A database only report is saved in the reports folder in the specified format. It will
not be printed nor displayed.
2. If you select Display custom report - Display card last transaction report (Sybase Only):
The report will automatically be displayed on your desktop when completed. You can
customize the report before you print it manually. For more information on how to customize
the report, see Previewing Reports. The report will include the following information:
event sequence, date and time, event message, card number (for card-related events) and
descriptions 1 to 4 which contain details on the event.
3. Report printed by sequence (Sybase Only): This report is sorted by event sequence number
(order in which they were generated by the system) and printed automatically at the printer.

224 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 4. Report printed by date and time (Sybase Only): This report is sorted by date and time and
printed automatically at the printer of the destination workstation.
Note: The printed reports (option three and four) will be saved in the reports folder in
the specified format. They will also be printed but not displayed.
5. Report printed by event ( Sybase Only ): This report is sorted by event message
(alphabetically) and printed automatically at the printer. The report is saved in the reports
folder in the specified format, but not displayed.

In/Out Reports
About this task:
In/Out reports will be saved in the reports folder, they are not printed nor displayed. User have to
manually retrieve the report to view it, they can also use the “Archive” menu.

1. Single file with all data (CSV only): The report is generated in one file containing the data
and the descriptions (date & time, transaction ID, card number, card user name and door
description).
2. Database with transactions (CSV): The report is generated with all the data and transactions
in one single file. It includes the date & time, the transaction ID, the card number and the
card user name.
3. Display In/Out report (Sybase only): The report will automatically be displayed on the desktop
when completed. You can customize the report before you print it manually. It contains: the
card number, card user name, entry time, exit time, contents of the card information field as
selected in report definition and total hours per cardholder. For more information on how to
customize the report, see Previewing In/Out Reports.
4. Two (2) databases with all data (Sybase): the report will be generated in two separate files:

- One file containing: date, time, event message (transaction type), pkcard, pkdoor,
pkdoorgroup.
- One file containing: pk description (explaining pkcard, pkdoor and pkdoorgroup), card
number, object and contents of card information field selected in the report definition
menu.
Note: PK refers to a component unique number within the system.

5. Single database with all data (Sybase): The report will be generated in one file containing the
data and the descriptions (date and time, transaction ID, card number, card user name, door
description and sequence).
6. CSV compilation In/Out (CSV Only): The report will be generated in two files. One file
containing a total, of hours for instance, by department, and the other file containing detailed
information. Depending on the number of days covered by the report, a “day” column will be
reserved for each day.

- File name—If you wish to overwrite the same report (for example—every week),
you can enter a file name here and when the report will be executed according to
specifications, the new report will replace the oldest report.
- Destination: this is where the report should be sent/printed automatically. You can
also use the Overwrite existing output option to specify a different destination file.
- Report language—This field is used to include additional information in your report.
Select from the displayed list.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 225

Defining Automatic Report Schedules
About this task:
Select the Automatic report schedule tab to define automatic settings for your reports so they can
be automatically generated when needed. These settings indicate:

• The frequency: when the report should be generated (none, weekly, monthly, once)
• The time period covered
• The output process (display, print, etc.)
• The output type (Sybase, CSV, PDF)
• The language and the file name
Note: Make sure that EntraPass is running at the time you have defined for the
automatic report generation. For example, if you have set the report schedule to daily, at
00:30, EntraPass must be running at that time to generate the report.

1. From the Schedule mode drop-down list, select the frequency at which the report should be
executed:

- Select None if you want the report to be manually requested (see Report Request).
- Select Weekly if you want a report every week. You have to check the day on which
the report should be executed automatically.
- Select Monthly if the report is needed once a month. You have to specify the day (ex.
the second Friday of the month or the 15th day of the month) when the report will be
executed automatically.
- Select Once if you want the report to be executed automatically on a specified date.

2. Select the Queue priority level. A report with a priority of 1 will be processed before a report
with a priority of 99.
3. In the Start report field, enter the time at which the system will start executing the report.
4. Specify the Scheduling parameters.
Note: These settings are ignored when the report is requested manually by an operator.

- Start this many days back: The report will start collecting events according to the
number of days specified in this field. It is based on the present date.
- Start at this time: Once you specify the amount of days, specify the starting time
(i.e.: 7:00am). For example, if you enter 7:00, events that occurred at 6:00 will not be
included in the report.
- Stop this many days back: The report will include the specified number of days
entered in this field. It is based on the present date.
- Stop at this time: Once you specify the number of days, specify the ending time
(i.e.:5:00 pm), that is, the day on which the system will stop collecting data; you may
also specify the time at which it will stop. For example, if you enter 7:00 and an event
occurred at 8:00, then this event will not be included. To target events that occurred
during a specific time frame, you have to use the Specific time frame option.
Note: The start and end time are only used for the first day and last day, for
example if you start collecting events on Monday at 8:00 and end on Friday at
17:00 all events between 8:00 Monday and 17:00 Friday will be included. The
system does not use the start and end time for each day but for the whole
period.

226 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Specifying additional options for automatic reports
1. Click the More button to configure additional settings for the automatic scheduled report.
When you click the More button, the Automatic report output definition window appears.
2. From the Database output type list, select the output format of the report. You can choose
Sybase, CSV, PDF, Excel, RTF, or text formats.
3. From the Database output process list, select the output type.
The following table describes the different database formats and their output file formats.

Table 42: Database formats and output file types

Database Description
SyBase The EntraPass database
CSV The report saves in a comma separated values format (yourfile.csv). In this
formate, each piece of data is separated by a comma. This is a popular format for
transferring data from one application to another because you can import and
export comma-delimited data into most database systems.
Excel Microsoft Excel file type
PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is an open standard for document exchange. It
can be opened with the free application Adobe Reader.
RTF The Rich Text Format (RTF) is a proprietary document file format with published
specification for cross-platform document interchange. Most word processors are
able to read and write some versions of RTF.
text A text file is structured as a sequence of lines. It can be opened by a large number
of editing tools.
4. You can select the Automatic file name (...) option. The default file name is YYY_MM_DD-
HH_MM_SS.X, indicating the year_ month_ day-hours, minutes_second.file extension.
5. Select the report language. For more information about the available languages, see System
Language Selection.
6. Select a destination.

In/Out reports definition

Use this feature to define customized In/Out reports with automatic execution parameters.
Note: Reports can be defined with automatic settings so they are generated when you need
them or can be requested manually using the In/Out report request button. When requested
manually, automatic settings are ignored.

Defining In/Out Reports

1. Under the Report toolbar, click the In/Out Report button.
2. If you select the Doors option, only the doors defined as “In/Out” doors (in the Door
definition menu) are displayed. Check the View deleted doors to add deleted doors to the
list. When you select the Door group option, the View deleted doors option is disabled. The
system displays the door groups of your system; then you may select one.
3. heck the Overwrite existing output file option if you want the system to replace the existing
file. If you leave this option unchecked, the system will create another output file.
4. Select Display Hours and Minutes to add them to the report.
5. Select the Card tab to add other filters for the report.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 227

 6. Select a filter index, then select a filter mode ( None , Include , Exclude ). If you have selected
a filter index, select the filter mode and enter the value range in the Upper/Lower boundary
fields. To include all the fields, leave the filter mode to None . For example, if you select Card
number as the Filter index, leave the filter mode to None so that all events triggered by cards
will appear in the report.
7. To add information in the sort criteria, select an item from the Additional information drop-
down list.
Note: Repeat these steps for all the card information fields that are listed in the filter
index field. You could use the card user name and specify A to F in the Upper/Lower
boundary fields for the system to include events in which the defined card numbers
appear but only for card users whose names begin with A to F (G and up will not be
included even if the card number is included in the range).
8. Select the Automatic report schedule tab to specify information for automatic reports. For
details, see Defining Automatic Report Schedules.
9. Select the Automatic report output tab to define automatic output settings for your reports.
Click here for more details.
10. Select the Rules tab to define the rules of In/Out in employee time reports. Rules can be
created to define periods of time as specific values. For example, all employee entries
between 7:50 AM and 8:15 AM can be defined as the value of 8:00 AM on reports.

- Select the Keep only the first entry (first IN) and the last exit (last OUT) option to
get the time lapsed between the first reading of the card on an entry reader and the
last reading of the card on an exit reader.

In/Out reports request

Use the Request In/Out reports feature to request the pre-defined In/Out reports that were
created using the In/Out report definition menu. This feature is useful when you want to override
automatic settings.
Note: If the report contains automatic settings, these are ignored.

Requesting a In/Out Report Manually

1. Under the Report toolbar, click the In/Out Request button. The In/Out Request report
window appears.
2. From the Report list display pane, select the In/Out report that you want to execute.
3. Specify Date and time as well as the Output parameters .
4. Select the Queue priority level. A report with a priority of 1 will be processed before a report
with a priority of 99.
5. Click Execute to trigger the report.

228 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Note: For the Sybase output type, the system displays a report preview window. For
other output formats, you will have to retrieve the report manually since it is not printed
or displayed. To view all the reports that have been generated, use the Archive button in
the Report toolbar. For information about reports output formats, see Defining a Report
Output Format.

Operations on In/Out
Use the Operation on In/Out feature to manually insert, add or delete In/Out transactions in the
database. This feature is useful for an organization using the In/Out feature for the payroll system,
for instance.

Adding a Transaction in the In/Out Database

1. Under the Report toolbar, click the In/Out Adjustment button.
2. Enter the Card number for which you want to modify the In/Out transactions, then click the
Load button. If you do not know the number, use the Find button.
Note: The card number field is mandatory to start loading.
3. Select the View deleted transactions option if you want to view the transactions that were
previously deleted. Deleted transactions are marked with an “X” in the Delete column.
4. Check the Find deleted cards option if you want to find the deleted cards. This does not
apply to entries that were added manually.
5. Specify the Start date , the day on which the system will start to collect the events, by clicking
the Calendar button and selecting a specific date. Only events that occurred on this date and
after are displayed.
Note: The Start date is mandatory to start loading.
6. Specify the End date , that is the day and time on which the system will stop collecting
events. Only events that occurred on the specified date and before are displayed. If you do
not specify an end date, the system will include all the data up to the present day time.
7. In the Connection drop-down list, select the appropriate connectionto view the In/Out doors.
Note: The gateway is mandatory to start loading.
8. You may check the All Doors option, then all the doors displayed under this field will be
selected. You may also select specific doors. All the In/Out events that were generated for the
selected doors will be displayed.
9. Check the View deleted doors option so that even doors that are no longer defined as In/Out
doors (but that have been defined as In/Out) will be displayed.
Note: Doors are mandatory to start loading.
10. Enter the necessary information in the transaction table. The transaction table displays the
transactions for the selected cardholder:

- The Delete column indicates transactions that have been deleted (if the View deleted
transactions option is checked). These are identified by an X.
- The Date column indicates the date on which the transaction occurred. Use this field
to specify the date when you manually insert a new transaction.
- The Time column indicates the time at which the cardholder entered or exited an
area. Use this field to specify the time (entry or exit) when manually inserting a new
transaction.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 229

 - The Transaction column indicates the transaction type. For every entry transaction,
there should be an exit transaction.

- Entry —indicates that this is an entry transaction generated when a

cardholder presented his/her card at a door defined as entry.
- Exit —Indicates that this is an exit transaction generated when a cardholder
presented his/her card at a door defined as “Exit”.
- Manual entry —Indicates that this is an entry transaction that was manually
inserted or added in the system. When you manually insert a transaction,
you have to specify if this transaction is an “Entry” transaction or an exit
transaction. For every entry, there should be an exit.
- Manual exit —Indicates that this is an “exit” transaction that was manually
inserted or added in the system. When you manually insert a transaction,
you have to specify if this transaction is an entry transaction or an exit
transaction. For every entry, there should be an exit.

- The Door column indicates which door was accessed by this user. When you manually
insert a transaction, you have to specify the door according to the transaction type
(Entry or Exit).
Note: If you are inserting an entry transaction, only doors defined as “Entry
doors” will be displayed in the list. If your are inserting an exit transaction, only
doors defined as “Exit doors” will be displayed in the list.

11. Click the Load button to load the transactions from the server for this cardholder. You have
to enter the card number, select the connection and door(s), then click the Load button. The
button is disabled once you have loaded the transactions.
12. Click the Add button to add a transaction to the existing transaction list. The new transaction
will be added at the end of the list.
13. Use the Insert button to insert a transaction between existing transactions or above any
transaction.
14. Click Cancel to cancel any insertion or modification that was made BEFORE saving.
Note: When you delete a transaction that was added manually, it is permanently deleted
from the list; as opposed to transactions that were generated by controllers. When they
are deleted, they are identified by an X in the Deleted column.

Previewing In/Out Reports

1. In the Archive window, select the report you want to view. If the selected report was defined
as a “Display In/Out Report” and “Sybase Database” as the output format, the following
window appears.

2. Select the display options:

- Group by— Select this option for easier management. The report data may be
grouped by card user names or by card numbers.

230 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Sort by—You may choose a sort order, by user names, or by card numbers.
- Report type—Select this option for easier management. You may choose to include
details with or without total.

3. Click Preview to display the result of the report. From that window, you can save the report
(in.QRP format) or print the report.

Previewing Reports
1. In the Archive window, select the report you want to view in the right-hand pane. If you
select a report generated by Sybase, the Report Options window will display allowing you to
customize your report before printing it.
Note: If you select a CSV type of report, the report will be generated in a WordPad
window, in text format.
2. Define the filter options: enter a text string in the Search description field. The report will be
sorted leaving only events containing the specified text string. You may refine your filter:

- Contains: All events which contain the specified text will be included in the report.
- Starts with: All events which start with the specified text will be included in the
report.
- Ends with: All events which end with the specified text will be included in the report.
- Exact words: All events containing the exact specified text will be included in the
report.

3. Click on the Preview button, select a Printer from the list and click OK. The system displays
the result of the report. From that window, you can:

- Search text within the report

- Print a report
- Save a report in various formats such as PDF, RTF, HTML and TXT
- Load a report (in a.QRP format)

4. Click Properties to access the Reports details window where detailed information is
displayed:

- Report file name : Displays the whole path where the report was saved as well as its
name.
- Report title : Displays the title of the report.
- Start date : Reports are created for a selected time frame. This option specifies the
starting date of this time frame.
- End date : Reports are created for a selected time frame. This option specifies the
ending date of this time frame as well as the time.
- Requested : Displays the date and time at which the report was requested.
- Delivered : Displays the date and time at which the report was produced and printed.
- Requested by : Displays the name of the operator that requested the report.
- Count : Displays the number of transactions (lines) in the report.
- Output process : Displays a list of the possible templates used for this report.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 231

Quick Report Definition
Use the Quick report to quickly create reports for certain types of events. For example, you can
create a report regarding all abnormal or normal access events in just a few seconds. Quick report
files may be viewed using the EntraPass Quick Viewer, a utility that allows users to display Quick
report files and all .QRP files. These include report files that are saved from a report preview. The
Quick Viewer is launched from Windows® Start menu, without the need to launch the software.

Defining a Quick Report

1. Under the Report toolbar, click the Quick report request button.
2. From the Event drop-down list, select the event type for the current report (access, controller,
door, relay, input, operator, manual operation events, and so on). If you have selected
“access events”, the Card tab appears in the window.
3. Among the Event type options, select the event type to be included in the report.

- Normal and abnormal—Select this option to include normal and abnormal events in
the report.
- Normal —Use Quick report to create reports based on normal events. In an access
report, normal events would be such events as “access granted” for instance.
- Abnormal—Such events as access denied (bad access level, supervisor level required),
workstation server abnormal disconnection, gateway communication failure, or
all events related to a process that is not complete (a controller reload failure, for
example), are considered abnormal.
- Watchable events—These are preselected events that can be displayed on EntraPass
Web Watchlist. Use to issue a report of events related to EntraPass Web.
- Custom events—Select this option to include your own events. The Custom events
become visible when the Custom events option is selected. This option allows the
operator to select the components that have generated the selected events according
to the setting in the “event” field.
Note: When you use the Event field, you have to specify which component(s)
should be used or not used. When you select an event (i.e. access), the system
displays all the doors. If you select Controllers, the system displays all the
controllers. Once you have selected an event (i.e. controller events), select the
controllers, that is the list of controllers to be included in the report.

4. If All Events has been selected, Specific Database Event is displayed. You can choose to
include New(+), Modify(=), and Delete(-) database events in the quick report.
5. Select the Card tab to specify filter details about the report. The Card tab appears only if a
card-related event is selected.
6. In the Card index drop-down list, specify the information that will be used as the filter. For
example, if you select “card number”, only access events in which the defined card numbers
appear will be selected.
Note: If you select Card number, the Lower and Upper boundary editable fields display
the default numerical values to be replaced by card numbers. If you select Card user
name , these fields are enabled to receive text data. For example, you can enter A in
the Lower boundary field and F in the Upper boundary fields for the system to include
events in which the selected door is defined and events in which the defined card
numbers appear but only for card users whose names begin with A to F. If you select All ,
the editable fields are disabled.

232 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 7. In the Start/end date field, enter the date and time on which the system will start to collect
the events. For example, if you enter 7:00 and an event occurred at 6:00, this event will not
be included. To target events that occurred during a specific time frame, use the Time frame
field.
8. In the Time frame field, check the Specific time frame option to include events that match
the specified time frame. Enter the target time for the report.
9. Define the output parameters:

- Database output type : Select the database output format by selecting the icon for
Sybase, CSV, PDF, Excel, RTF, or text.
- Report name : The default is the current date and time. This can be edited.
The report name is used to name to output file.
- Database output process —Select the appropriate output processes. A report
template is associated with each output.

- Database only : The report will be saved in the system database.

- Display (custom, detailed, summary or statistics) report: The report
appears on-screen.
- Report printed by (sequence, date & time or event) : The report is printed
according to the specified sort order.
- Email (custom, detailed, summary or statistics) report: When email is
selected a dedicated input box is launched to select which emails the report is
sent to.

10. Click on the Execute button to launch the report.

Report Log
About this task:
The Report Log window allows you to view a detailed list of all history reports processed by the
system.

1. To view the Report log, select the Report Log button from the Report menu.
2. Click the Text filter button to display the Text filter window. From that window, enter the
text string (i.e. Kantech), and the system will only display logs containing the specified string
text. To return to normal display, click text filter.
3. Click the Refresh button to update the displayed data.
4. Columns:

- Date requested: This is the normal incoming sequence, if you select another sorting
mode, you interrupt the normal sequence.
- Requested by : When selected, all columns will be sorted according to the Requested
by column in alphabetical order.
- Reportname : When selected, all columns will be sorted according to the Report
name column in alphabetical order.
- Date from : When selected, all columns will be sorted according to the Date from
column in alphabetical order.
- To (Date) : When selected, all columns will be sorted according to the To (Date)
column in alphabetical order.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 233

 5. You may also clear the window. To do this, right-click in the window, then select Delete All
from the shortcut menu.
6. Fields:

- Report Type : Show the type of report (quick, custom…).

- Process By : Show which application executed the report.
- Workspace applied : Show whether a workspace was applied.
- Destination : Where the report was delivered.
- Used Template : Show the dll that was used for the report.
- Items in report : The number of items in the report.
- Requested date : When the report was requested (date and time).
- Queued date : Show when the report was added to the application queue that
generated the report (Date and time and the total time elapsed).
- Process date : When the process was started (Date and time and the total time
elapsed).
- Delivery date : Show when the report was delivered to destination (Date and time
and the total time elapsed).
- Completion date : Show end date and time of report execution.
- Completion State : Show whether the report was completed successfully or aborted.

Report state
Use the Report state feature to view the statuses of all requested reports that are still pending. On
the Report tab, click Report state.

Report state fields

• Priority: Priority level for the treatment of messages (1 to 99). A a priority of 1 will be
processed before a priority of 99.
• CPU: Level of CPU usage to be allowed to process the report (Lower, Normal, Higher).
• Report: Name of the report in process.
• Destination: Displays the workstation or SmartLink name to which the report will be sent to.
• Progress: When the report is processed, it displays the date in treatment, from the start to
the end.
• Count: Indicate the number of records in the report.
Select a report and right click to display the contextual menu:

• Next to be processed: Indicates that this is the next report to proceed.

• Promote: Increases the priority level (above the next lower priority report).
• CPU: Allows you to change the CPU usage for the treatment of reports (Lower, Normal,
Higher).
• Help: Click to see the related help topic.

Contextual menu of in process reports

Select a report and right click to display the contextual menu:
• Abort with data: This function ends the process and the gathered informations are sent to
the recipient.

234 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • Abort without data: This function ends the process and the gathered informations are
erased.
• Priority: Allows you to change the CPU usage for the treatment of reports (Lower, Normal,
Higher).
• Help: Click to see the related help topic.
Note: A red dot indicates a pending report In/Out, and a green dot indicates a report in
process.

Requesting Reports
About this task:
With this feature operators can request pre-defined historical reports or Card use reports that were
created using the Custom Report menu. Operators can also email the report to one or multiple
recipients.

Note: If your report contains automatic settings, these are ignored. You must indicate new
settings.

1. In the Report window, click the Report request button.

2. In the Report request window, from one of the Report list display panes (Custom reports on
top or Card Use reports on bottom), select the report that you want to execute.
3. Select the Queue priority level. A report with a priority of 1 will be processed before a report
with a priority of 99.
4. You can define output parameters, including the database output type format (Sybase,
CSV, PDF, Excel, RTF or Text), the target folder, the output file name, etc. For more
information on how to select an output format, see Defining a Report Output Format.
Note: From the Database output process list, you can select Email custom report if
you want this report to be automatically sent to specified recipients. If you choose this
option, the email page is launched. EntraPass enables you to protect the report by a
password before emailing it.
If a Card use report is selected, the “Date and time” section is disabled.
5. Click Execute. A system message informs you that the report is being processed. The Report
options window appears and is then minimized to the task bar.
Figure 5: Historical request window

6. Select the Preview button to define the report and filter options. This will increase
the readability of the report by adding, for instance, alternating band colours, framing
events, buttons in the reports, etc., or by sorting events in the report (by event ID number,
alphabetical order or date and time).
7. Enter the description in the Search description field. The report is updated in real-time
when you enter a filter option.
8. Use Preview to preview the report or the Properties button to view details about the report.
When you click the Preview button, the system displays the result of the report. From that
window, you can save the report in various formats or print the report.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 235

Roll Call Reports
The Roll call report is used to take a snapshot of who has swiped a card at a reader or a group of
readers within a certain reset period. With the Roll call, one or many doors in EntraPass may be
configured as entry points for a certain perimeter and upon criteria later defined in this document.
Based on the last location a card holder has passed, operators will receive reports on who has
entered this perimeter.
Since EntraPass Special Edition does not function in services mode, the application must be active
on the PC at all times for the roll call report to be executed and produce accurate results.

Functionalities
• A maximum of 8 roll call reports can be configured through EntraPass.
• Doors must be assigned to a report number (1-8) in order to be considered for the roll call
report (see Doors Configuration for more information).
• At runtime, the Roll call report will list all individuals that have swiped a card at a pre-defined
reader. No other card holder will be shown in the report than the ones who have entered a
perimeter after the last perimeter reset.
• To create an “in-out” functionality, the operator must make sure that doors considered “out”
of a building or connection have a different roll call number. Any door that doesn’t have a
number assigned to it will have no effect on the location of the card holder for the roll call
report.
• A configurable reset of the report is available and the default value is 12:00PM (midnight)
every day. This function cleans the report. Reset can be performed for all reports in the roll
call report window.
• Upon manual request in Report –> Roll Call Report or on trigger of a pre-configured input, a
report can be generated up to 3 times to a pre-defined printer, workstation or email address.

Roll Call Report generation

1. Under the Report toolbar, click the Roll call report button:
2. Select the roll call sector. If the roll call sector you wish to select is not listed, click on the
button next to the drop-down arrow.
3. Specify the report destinations:

- Report Destination : Select a destination using the three-dots button.

- Output printer : Select the printer (s) from the list.
- E-mail recipient : Enter the name (s) of the recipient (s) to email the report to.

Example of a Roll Call Report

236 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Specifying additional options for automatic reports

1. Click the button to add more settings to the automatic scheduled report.
When you click this button, the Automatic report output definition window appears.
2. From the Database output type list, select the output format of the report. You can choose
Sybase, CSV, PDF, Excel, RTF or text formats.
3. From the Database output process list, select the report template. It will be used with the
requested report. For information about the output format, see Defining a Report Output
Format.
Note: From the Database output process list, you can select Email custom report if
you want this report to be automatically sent to specified recipients. If you choose this
option, select the Email tab to enter the recipients’ email addresses in the Send Email to
field. You can protect the report using a password before emailing it.
The following table describes the different database formats and their output file formats.

Table 43: Database formats and output file types

Database Description
SyBase The EntraPass database
CSV The report saves in a comma separated values format (yourfile.csv). In this
formate, each piece of data is separated by a comma. This is a popular format for
transferring data from one application to another because you can import and
export comma-delimited data into most database systems.
Excel Microsoft Excel file type
PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is an open standard for document exchange. It
can be opened with the free application Adobe Reader.
RTF The Rich Text Format (RTF) is a proprietary document file format with published
specification for cross-platform document interchange. Most word processors are
able to read and write some versions of RTF.
text A text file is structured as a sequence of lines. It can be opened by a large number
of editing tools.
4. You can select the Automatic file name (...) option. The default file name is YYY_MM_DD-
HH_MM_SS.X, indicating the year_ month_ day-hours, minutes_second.file extension.
5. Select the report language and the destination.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 237

Options
EntraPass supports many reader types, use Defining a card display format to define the system for
your particular card reader. You will also find Changing from a 24-bit to 32-bit Global Card Format.
To change their appearance, and when you want to integrate EntraPass with a third party device,
use Integration to select the hardware and register the DLL.

See Multimedia devices configuration to define alarm sounds, videos features, and video and
signature capture devices. For printing instructions for event logs, reports and badge printing use
Printers selection and configuration. For new system components, you must register them in the
system Registration section. Read the System date and time modification section to find out why
you should approach changing the system time with caution and the options available. If you want
to change the system language see System language selection, and choose from English, French,
Spanish, German, and Italian.
Use System parameters configuration to define the following components and features:

• Disk Space

• Logout and Idle

• Schedule

• Icon Status

• Password rules

• Firmware Parameters

• Image Parameters

• Picture and Badging

• Report Parameters

• Disk Space

• User Name Format

• Video Parameters

• Time Parameters

• Toolbar Buttons

• Integration

• User Name Format

238 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Backup Scheduler
A backup is a copy of the systems database which serves as a substitute or alternative in case
the computer fails. If your system computer fails, you may restore a backup copy onto another
computer .

• Back up your files regularly, at least once a week or more if many modifications were made to
the database.
• We recommend that you make two backups of all your database files. To be especially safe,
keep them in separate locations.
• To backup your files, you can use any of the following options:

- Menus of the Backup Tab

- Backup Scheduler to apply automatic schedules
- Mirror Database application
- Other third party software and hardware. Third party software is not recommended.
Note: By default, when you backup or restore files, the databases is temporarily
disabled (not available). The Workstation will not be able to modify the
databases.
The Backup Scheduler program is used to schedule automatic backups of your data, archives, and
In/Out databases. Define the default settings and the system will do the rest.

Scheduling Automatic Backups of the System Database

1. From the Backup toolbar, select the Backup button.
2. Select the tab corresponding to the information you want to backup: Data, Archive, In/Out or
Video event (In/Out) (In/Out is not available in EntraPass KTES Edition).
Note: By default, the system will automatically backup your files every Sunday at 4:00
AM for all new installations. Setting this feature at 4:00AM has an added benefit of not
interfering with the system processing time or other tasks scheduled around midnight.
3. Select the Automatic backup option to enable the options displayed in the window. The
options displayed depend on the tab that is enabled.
4. Select the Backup folder :

- Default folder : Will backup your files in a system default backup folder. By default,
the name of the backup sub-directory is generated automatically according to the
following convention: X_YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_SS (Where 'X' = Data or Archives or In/
Out (D, A or T), year, month, day, hour, minutes, and seconds.
Note: By default, the system backs up all the information originating from the
following directories: C:\Program files\Kantech\Server\Data or Archive or Time
on video or V . The information is sent to: C:\Program files\Kantech\Server
\Backup\X_YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_SS.
- Specific folder : Will backup your files in a sub-folder labeled according to the default
convention in the XXX folder.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 239

 5. Select the Backup type: The options that are displayed depend on the type of the data to be
saved.

- Under the Data tab only:

- Separate files : will backup the databases one by one.

- Self-extracting compressed file : will create an executable file (*.exe) that
will compress the information1 so as to reduce the amount of disk space
taken by the backup.

- Under the Archive, In/Out and Video Event tabs only:

- Separate files (full backup) : will backup all databases.

- Self-extracting compressed file (full backup) : will create an executable file
(*.exe) that will compress the information so as to reduce the amount of disk
space taken by the backup.
- Separate files (incremental) : will backup all databases. Only the information
that was modified since the last backup will be saved.
- Self-extracting compressed file (incremental) : will create an executable file
(*.exe) that will compress the information so as to reduce the amount of disk
space taken by the backup. Only the information that was modified since the
last backup will be saved.
Note: Restoring a self-extracting backup after an EntraPass upgrade
can only be done from the workstation where the original self-extracting
backup was done.
When you have selected “full backup”, each time a backup is done a new
sub-folder containing the data or the self-extracting file will be created.
If you are using the incremental backup type, only the information that
was modified since the last backup will be saved. If you want to restore
information, you will have to restore all the sub-folders one-by-one
(starting from the oldest).

6. Select the frequency of the backup,

- Weekly : the backup will be carried out once a week. Specify which day (example, the
backup will be executed every Thursday).
- Monthly: the backup will be carried out monthly, specify the day of the month
(example, the backup will be carried out every first day of the month).
- Daily : the backup will be carried out every day.

7. Enter the time at which the backup will start (24:00 format).
8. Select Now if you want to perform a backup immediately after saving the backup
parameters.
Note: This is not applicable to the Configure Automatic backup feature in the Mirror
Database and Redundant Server application.
9. Repeat steps 1 to 8 for all the remaining tabs.
10. Click OK to save.

240 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Dealer Information
About box details
1. To add dealer information in the About window, select Display details in About box.

2. Fill in the dealer information and add a picture logo if needed using the
button.
3. Fill the Site information data.
4. Click OK.

KAP reminder
A message displays reminding the user that the KAP period is ending. There are two different
notifications: a pop-up on the screen or an email containing the following information:
Figure 6: KAP expiry reminder

Pop-up message
A pop-up message is automatically generated by EntraPass to advise the user that their KAP is
expiring. Messages display at the following times:

• 60 days before expiration

• 30 days before expiration
• On expiration
• 30 days past expiration
The user must acknowledge the reminder message. It is logged in the events database, displays in
the message list, and appears in reports.

Email
In the Dealer Information window, you can configure the email reminder. You can add up to
4 recipients. Click theSend reminder now button to save the information and send a reminder
immediately.
A new event is logged in the desktop events list.
Each workstation also receives a 60-second notification pop-up message. See the following figure.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 241

Figure 7: KAP expiration message

Note: You can also access the KAP reminder feature in the About window.

Defining a card display format

About this task:
The EntraPass system can accommodate various reader types. Depending on the reader type, the
card display format may vary. The Display format dialog allows you to select the default format that
will be setup automatically when creating a new card.

1. Under the Options toolbar, click on the Display format button.

Note: The Card #2, Card #3, Card #4, Card # 5 sections will not appear unless the
Enhanced User Management option is activated.
2. Select a display format for Card #1 .

- Decimal : Refers to numbers in base 10.

- Octal : Each octal digit represents exactly three binary digits. An octal format refers to
the base-8 number system, which uses eight unique symbols (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7).
Programs often display data in octal format because this format is relatively easy for
humans to read and can easily be translated into a binary format, the format used in
computer programming.
- Hexadecimal : Each hexadecimal digit represents four binary digits. An hexadecimal
format refers to the base-16 number system, which consists of 16 unique symbols:
the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters A to F. For example, the decimal number 15 is
represented as F in the hexadecimal numbering system. The hexadecimal system is
useful because it can represent every byte (8 bits) as two consecutive hexadecimal
digits. It is easier for humans to read hexadecimal numbers than binary numbers.
- FIPS ( Federal Information Processing Standard): This card format can use more than
32 bits of data.

3. Check the Use multiple card format box if your environment contains multiple reader types
and you would like to have the capability to select a different reader, that is not the default
reader, when creating a new card.

242 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 4. Select one of the Duplicate PIN process in the scrolling box. This feature can be used for
example while loading cards in a batch. An operator may decide to set the PIN option to allow
duplication. Later, if desired, the duplicate PINs can be changed to prevent confusion.

- No duplication : An error appears on the workstation; the PIN field will be reset to
the default value (00000) and will be highlighted, inviting you to enter a new and valid
PIN. Only PIN 00000 will be duplicated regardless of the PIN setting option.
- Notify when duplication: the server verifies if this PIN already exists. If the PIN
exists, a message box appears, indicating that the PIN exists. A Details button will
allow operators to view a list of cardholders who were issued this PIN.
- Duplication: no test will be processed, the PIN will be accepted even if it is a duplicate.

5. Number of PIN digits (KT-400 only): This function allows using the Keypad Pin Digit option
with the new KT400 firmware. You can choose to have 4, 5 or 6 digits. For more information,
see Card options definition.
Note: The PIN number must be set up once and kept that way in order to avoid any in
duplication if truncated or filled by the system.
6. Under the Global display format for KT-100 , KT-300 and KT-400 , select the appropriate
option to coordinate with the selection in the upper section of the dialog.

- 24-bit Wiegand card, 5-digit PIN (KT-200 default) : for up to 24-bit for KT-100,
KT-200, KT-300 and KT-400.
- 32-bit card, 5-digit PIN : for up to 32-bit for KT-100, KT-300 and KT-400.
- 24-bit Wiegand card, 6-digit PIN : for up to 24-bit for KT-100, KT-300 and KT-400.
- Up to 16 characters ABA card , 6-digit PIN : for up to 16 for KT-100, KT-300 and
KT-400.
Note: KT-100, KT-300 and KT-400 controllers will do a hard reset on card format
change. Avoid alternating between different card formats because this may
result in lost card information.

Changing from a 24-bit to 32-bit Global Card Format

About this task:
Changing from 24-bit to 32-bit global card format extends the amount of cards you can configure
on EntraPass.
The ioProx 26-bit Wiegand reader does not support changing from a 24-bit to 32-bit global card
format. If you have a combination of ioProx XSF and ioProx 26-bit Wiegand readers, do not
manually change the format, or turn on the auto conversion feature. You first have to replace the
26-bit Wiegand readers with XSF readers.
To manually change from a 24-bit to 32-bit global card format, complete the following steps:

1. Click the Options tab, and select Display format from the menu.
2. In the Global card format area, choose the 32-bit card, 5-digit PIN option.
3. Click OK. If you made a change from a 24-bit Wiegand card, five or six digits, to a 32-bit card,
five digit PIN, a prompt displays to ask if you require the cards converted to 32-bit family
code.
The ability to change the global card format from 24-bit to 32-bit format is not available when
running from a redundant server.
EntraPass does not automatically backup data when you switch from 24-bit to 32-bit
card format.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 243

Result
In the workstation, EntraPass backs up the system prior to conversion.
After you change formats, the KT-100, KT-200, and KT-300 automatically do a hard reset. For the
KT-1 and KT-400 the change is seamless.

Auto conversion
When you select the Use Auto Conversion for legacy 24 bit cards check box in the Display
Format window, EntraPass automatically converts all card accounts to a 32-bit card format. The
default value is cleared. To enable the check box, you must set the Global Card Format to the 32-
bit card, 5 digit PIN option.
When you select the auto conversion feature, and have not converted the cards to a 32-bit format,
the system automatically modifies the card number and triggers a Card definition modified event.
The events have to be non-fail soft events. The feature is available in the multi-site gateway, the
global gateway, and the KT-NCC gateway.
Note: The Auto conversion feature is available when running the redundant server.

Integration
The Integration tab allows the user to select third party hardware that has been integrated to
EntraPass by Kantech.

• DLL registration: The available DLL in this menu will be used to specify which type of
hardware the customer will connect to EntraPass.

- Click on Add to integrate another DLL. For additional details, see Integrated Panel
Configuration.

• Virtual keypad: The Virtual keypad tab allows the user to customize the virtual keypad
screen display. Three different display modes can be selected: Floating, Modal or Stay on
top.

Multimedia devices configuration

The Multimedia devices utility allows you to set up your system multimedia objects:

• Alarm sound
• Video capture devices
• Signature capture devices
• Video feature devices

Selecting an Alarm Sound

1. From the Options main window, select the Multimedia devices button.
2. Check the Assign alarm sound option if you want an alarm sound notification.
3. Select a sound from the displayed list.
4. Select a Priority level for the selected sound so that it is played when an alarm defined with
this priority is sounded.
Note: The Priority level refers to the order in which alarm messages are displayed in
the Alarm desktop. In EntraPass, O is associated with the highest priority, and 9 to the
lowest. For more information, see Event Parameters Definition .
5. Click the Play button to listen to the selected sound. The system will play the selected sound.

244 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 6. Click the Add button to add a new sound from your personal files. Clicking on this button
displays a new window allowing you to add new alarm sounds.
Note: The Current selection section displays the sound currently selected (in use). You
can adjust the delay of the alarm sound in the Delay field.

Defining Video Options

1. From the Multimedia devices window, select the Video capture tab.
2. Check the Enable video capture box to enable the video capture options in your system.

- MCI device : Standard Windows® capture drivers.

- Twain device : Twain capture drivers. (Recommended).
- Use overlay : Option activated for image capture devices.
- Enable controls menu : Activates options (such as zoom, pan and tilt) on image
capture devices, if applicable.
- MCI device number : Select identification number of MCI device.
- Portrait : Enables portrait orientation of captured images.
- Landscape : Enables landscape orientation of captured images. (Default value).

3. Click the Test button to verify if the video camera is functional.

Setting Up the Signature Capture Device

1. From the Multimedia devices window, select the Signature tab.
2. Check the Enable Signature pad option to enable the use of a signature pad device.
3. From the displayed list of supported Signature pad devices, select the driver for the signature
pad you want to use.
4. Check the Remote application box if the signature device is setup as such.
5. Select a Pen width .
6. Use the Test button to check if the driver selected is functional. When you click the Test
button, the Signature Pad Test window appears. This window appears whenever you choose
the Signature pad option (Card definition windows).
7. Select the Video tab to set video options for use with the Video Integration feature. This
option allows you to choose between the windows or video format for Video playback (for
Intellex only).

- Disable DirectX option: DirectX is a Windows® technology that enables higher

performance in graphics and multimedia, including video and sound. By default,
DirectX is enabled with the Video feature. However, you may want to disable it; if for
example Video images are not correctly displayed or are not displayed at all, disabling
DirectX can be useful. However, when DirectX is disabled, the system will use more
system resources.
- The Video bandwidth control option allows you to reduce or increase the bandwidth
required to stream live video without compromising video storage quality and
computer performance. The range value is between 64 KB/s and 8192 KB/s.
Note: The video bandwidth control value cannot exceed the EntraPass Server
value (see page 476).

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 245

Printers selection and configuration
The Printer options window that can be accessed under the Options toolbar allows users to select
a log printer that will be used when printing events and to select a report or a badge printer.

Selecting and Setting Up a Log Printer

About this task:
When you define events (in the Events parameters definition menu), it is possible to determine
how and when events will be printed. For example, you can decide to dispatch events to an
EntraPass application, a printer, or to activate a relay. Your decision may be based on, for instance,
schedules that will send alarms to a remote terminal at a specific moment.

Note: You need to assign a “print” schedule to certain events to print them at a specified time.

1. From Printer options dialog select the Log printer tab.

2. Select a printing option in the Printer type section:

- No log printer— If you select this option, no event will be printed, even if a print
schedule is defined for the events.
- Use Network/Local Windows ® printer (page printer) —If you select this option,
all events sent to the printer will be buffered and printed when a full page is ready to
be printed. Events will be printed on the network/local printer - not on a specific log
printer.
- Use local dot matrix printer —If you select this option, all events sent to the printer
will be printed one-by-one and one under the other, or it will print one event per
page, depending on your printer type. Select the printer port that will be used in the
“printer” field. Specify if messages and alarms will be printed on this printer.

3. In the Printer selection section, specify whether you want to print message or alarms.

- Print messages log —If you select this option, all events that are assigned a “display”
schedule in the events parameters menu will be printed.
- Print alarms logs —If you select this option, all events that are assigned an “alarm”
schedule (and need to be acknowledged) in the events parameters menu will be
printed.

4. From the Printer drop-down list, select the specific printer that will be used as a log printer.

- If you have selected a dot matrix printer , select the Port on which the printer is
connected to communicate with the computer. The Port field appears when a dot
matrix printer is selected.
- If you are using a network/local printer , select the Font and the Font size . The font
and font size influence the number of events that will be printed on one page. Using a
smaller font increases the number of events printed on a page.

Selecting and Setting Up a Report Printer

About this task:
The Report printer will be defined to print reports.

1. From the Printer options window, select the Report printer tab.

246 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Selecting and Setting Up a Badge Printer
About this task:
The Badge printer will be defined to print badges that are created in EntraPass.

1. From the Printer option window, select the Badge printer tab.
2. Check the Badge printer option if a badge printer will be used; as a result, the Print badge
and Preview badge button will be displayed in the Card window.
3. From the Select badge printer drop-down list, select the appropriate badge printer.
4. If you want the picture on the reverse side of the badge to be inverted, click the Invert
Reverse Side box.
5. Check the Use bar code 39 as font when appropriate, and select the corresponding Font .

Registration
Use this menu to register new system components, including the KTES, For more information, see
System Registration .

Selecting and Setting Up a Badge Printer

About this task:
The Badge printer will be defined to print badges that are created in EntraPass.

1. From the Printer option window, select the Badge printer tab.
2. Check the Badge printer option if a badge printer will be used; as a result, the Print badge
and Preview badge button will be displayed in the Card window.
3. From the Select badge printer drop-down list, select the appropriate badge printer.
4. If you want the picture on the reverse side of the badge to be inverted, click the Invert
Reverse Side box.
5. Check the Use bar code 39 as font when appropriate, and select the corresponding Font .

System date and time modification

About this task:
Use the Change system option with caution and only when necessary; this function may affect
logical components of the access system (for example schedules).

1. From the Option main window, select the Date and Time button.
2. Enter the date in the Date field, or select a date from the calender. Connected components of
this application will also receive the date change notification.
3. Enter the time in the Time field. Connected components of this application will also receive
the time change notification.
4. Click OK to exit.
Note: If you want the system to automatically change the time when necessary, use the
Time adjustment tab of the Server Parameters definition menu. For more information,
see Time Parameters.
Important: Do not change the time using Windows settings. It is strongly recommended
to change the system time through the server parameter settings.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 247

System language selection
EntraPass allows you to run the software in the language of your choice. The basic languages are
English, French, Spanish, German, and Italian. Use the vocabulary editor utility to add other custom
languages.

Changing the System Language

1. From the EntraPass main window, select the Options toolbar , then click the Select
language button.
Note: When you modify the primary language, the database operation will be
suspended during the operation and the changes will be effective only when you
shutdown and then restart the system. The database language will be modified
according the ascii values of the characters in the primary language. Accents and special
characters of different languages may have an impact on your database.
2. From the Select primary language drop-down list, select the language you want to use as a
primary language. From the Select Secondary language drop-down list, select the language
you want to use as a secondary language.
3. Log out of EntraPass and login again.

System parameters configuration

The system parameters window allows the system administrator to modify parameters that
define the EntraPass system.Parameters have been grouped together under different labels
such asFirmware, Image, etc. If the video integration feature is enabled in your system,the
corresponding parameters will appear under the video label.

Server Parameters
On the Server tab, you can define disk free space threshold and button status.

E-mail Server
About this task:
EntraPass offers users the ability to send reports using email capabilities. This function can also be
used with SMTP servers asking for a user authentication.

Note: SSL connections are not supported.

1. In the Email server (SMTP or Exchange server) field, enter the IP address of the Email server
that will be used for sending emails.
2. In the Email Port field, enter the number of the port that will be used for sending emails
(usually 25).
3. Select the encryption method:

- Unsecured (No SSL/TLS)

- Gmail (SSL/TLS)
- Secured (SSL/TLS)
- Office 365 (STARTTLS)

4. Enter a valid Email address in the Email sender field. This email address will be used for
authenticating the email server.

248 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Disk Space
The Disk Space feature has been developed as a protection against system failures that may be
caused by the lack of disk space. This feature allows you to monitor the amount of free disk space
for optimal system operation or for generating reports. In fact, EntraPass offers the ability to have
the system abort the execution of a report if the free disk space has reached a specified threshold.

• Disk free space threshold (MB) : scroll-down list: specify a disk free space threshold that
indicates when you want the system to send a message when the amount of free space falls
below the value indicated. This value is in mega bytes. The range value is 2000 up to 99999
MB.
• Time between notifications (hh:mm) : enter the amount of time between notifications
when the disk free space has reached the quota specified in the Disk free space threshold
field. For example, if you enter 00:30 in the field, a system warning will be displayed every half
hour. The time range value is 00:10 to 24:00.

Logout and Idle

• Automatic logout on idle: the operator will have to re-inter his user name and password to
enable the server application again. The maximum allowed delay is (mm:ss): 9 minutes and
59 seconds.
• Send to tray on idle: the server application will be minimized and sent to the task bar
when the specified delay expires, if the operator who is currently logged in is inactive. The
maximum allowed delay is (mm:ss): 59 minutes and 59 seconds.
• Must login to close a Server application: if checked, this option obliges operators to
authenticate themselves by entering user name and password to close the Server application.
• Notify last log out: if checked, EntraPass will notify the last operator who is logging out.
• Display Login List: if checked, the five most recent operators to log into any EntraPass
application will be displayed in the login dialog. This feature allows for easier system access
for the operators who will simply select their user name and enter their password. It can
also be used for administrative follow up where a System Administrator can view the list of
operators who have recently logged on a specific application.
Note: Despite the advantages, it is recommended to disable the Display Login List
whenever system security is at stake.

Schedule
• System schedules: System schedules are applicable to system logical components such as:
operators login schedules, video triggers, etc. System schedules are not loaded in a particular
controller; they are applicable to all the system. You can program an unlimited number of
system schedules.
• Multi- site schedules: These are defined per connection. You can define 100 schedules per
Multi-site for such purposes as power supervision (controllers), door unlocking, REX trigger
(doors), activation mode (relay), input monitoring, etc.
• After checking the box and clicking OK, a warning will popup on screen indicating that the
action is reversible but with consequences.
• We strongly suggest that you perform a backup of your data before activating this option.

• Once the process has been completed, you will notice that the Schedule tab will have
disappeared from the System Parameter dialog.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 249

 • Enable schedule to bypass Rex: In order to enable the primary and secondary Rex Bypass
message schedule options for doors, The Enable schedule to bypass Rex option must be
selected. Please refer to Door Configuration for more details.

Icon Status
The Status time out delay (m:ss) parameter allows you to define a period of time before the
workstation queries the server for the latest button statuses. The higher the delay, the lower the
button refresh rate will be, therefore creating less traffic on the network. The maximum time out
delay is 1 min. 30 seconds.

Password rules
The purpose of this feature is to add more parameters to the operator’s password.

1. On the Options tab, click System parameters and click Server.

2. Click the Password rules tab and select Specific password rules. To create strong
passwords, for each field, select the following values:

- A minimum of 8 and a maximum of 20 characters.

- A minimum of 1 numerical character.
- A minimum of 1 special character.
- A minimum of 1 uppercase letter.

Note: Also, when you create passwords, remember the following rules:

- Passwords are case sensitive.

- Passwords cannot contain the word Kantech.

Result After you select this option, all newly created or modified operators must comply with the
password rules.

Firmware Parameters
This section contains all the information pertaining to controllers, gateways and IP communication
module, as well as the section to update you firmware.
Note: The KTES tab will be available only if a KTES controller have been previously defined in
the system. See Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) Configuration for more information.

KT-100
The KT-100 tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for KT-100 controllers.
The system will use this data to update the installed controllers (not available in EntraPass KTES
Edition).

KT-300
The KT-300 tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for KT-300 controllers.
The system will use this data to update the installed controllers (not available in EntraPass KTES
Edition).

250 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

KT-400
The KT-400 tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for KT-400 controllers.
The system will use this data to update the installed controllers (not available in EntraPass KTES
Edition) .

• When checked, the Enable TFTP KT-400 updater option will allow operators to upgrade the
KT-400 firmware from the Update firmware button from the Operation > Site dialog in
EntraPass.
• Enable automatic firmware update: Select to make an update of each KT-400 with a different
firmware version.
Note: The automatic firmware update function applies only to KT-400s that support it.
The multi-site Gateway must be restarted in order to enable the TFTP KT-400 updater.
• For security reasons, you may decide, as a System Administrator to disable this option and
not allow operators to update the firmware.

KT-1/KT-2
The KT-1/KT-2 tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for KT-1 and KT-2
controllers. The system will use this data to update the installed controllers (not available in
EntraPass KTES Edition).

• Select the Enable TFTP KT-1/KT-2 updater option to allow operators to upgrade the
controller firmware using the Update firmware button from the Operation > Site dialog in
EntraPass.
• Enable automatic firmware update: Select to make an update of each controller with a
different firmware version.
Note: The automatic firmware update function applies only to controllers that support it.
Restart the multi-site Gateway to enable the TFTP KT-1 updater.
• For security reasons, you may decide, as a System Administrator, to disable this option and
not allow operators to update the firmware.
• Select the Firmware flashing mode to apply.

KTES
The KTES tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for the KTES. The system
will use this data to update the installed KTES.

Kantech IP Link
The IP Link tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for the Kantech IP Link
module . The system will use this data to update the installed firmware (not available in EntraPass
KTES Edition) .
• When checked, the Enable TFTP IP Link updater option will allow operators to upgrade
the IP Link firmware from the Update firmware button from the Operation > Site dialog in
EntraPass.
Note: The Multi-site Gateway must be restarted in order to enable the TFTP IP Link
updater.
• For security reasons, you may decide, as a System Administrator to disable this option and
not allow operators to update the firmware.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 251

ioSmart reader
• The ioSmart reader tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for
ioSmart readers. The system will use this data to update the installed readers.

ioModules
The ioModule tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for the ioModules.
The system uses this data to update the installed ioModules.

KT-401
The KT-401 tab specifies the location of the folder containing the firmware for KT-401 controllers.
The system will use this data to update the installed controllers (not available in EntraPass KTES
Edition) .

• When checked, the Enable TFTP KT-401 updater option will allow operators to upgrade the
KT-401 firmware from the Update firmware button from the Operation > Site dialog in
EntraPass.
• Enable automatic firmware update: Select to make an update of each KT-401 with a different
firmware version.
Note: The automatic firmware update function applies only to KT-401s that support it.
The multi-site Gateway must be restarted in order to enable the TFTP KT-401 updater.
• For security reasons, you may decide, as a System Administrator to disable this option and
not allow operators to update the firmware.

Image Parameters
The Image section is where you will define parameters for the badging features. You will define
image quality for picture, signature and background images.

• If you are using the badging feature, it is recommended to leave the jpeg quality to default.
Reducing the image quality may affect the quality of the pictures imported from badges.
• If you are not using the badging feature, you may reduce the jpeg quality of your images
so that they will not occupy a large space in the database. You must take in consideration,
however, that reducing the quality of the saved images may affect the quality of the photos
imported into badges.
A parameter allows you to save cards and visitor card pictures, signatures and background graphics
to a file instead of directly to the database. We are offering this option for sites that have large
banks of pictures and graphics. The picture, signature and graphic database can currently contain
up to 2 Gb of data each. The parameter will be used in instances where a site may need more space
to save pictures, signatures and graphics.

Picture and Badging

The picture and badging feature allows you to adjust the image and signature quality for use with
the Badging feature (not available in EntraPass KTES Edition).
• Unchecking Use JPEG format for pictures, signatures and badges tells the system to save
pictures (or signatures) in a tiff format.
Note: Remember that this may affect the image quality. If you are not an advanced user,
leave these values to default.
• The User picture, Signature, Badge background and Badge picture indicate the quality
of the image that will be saved. If you choose 10, the saved image quality will be poor; 100
indicates an excellent quality.

252 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • Select the location of the Picture (Signature) transparent colour position for pictures and
signature. Four choices are available (top-right, top-left, bottom-right and bottom-left). By
default, the system chooses the bottom left-hand corner for the transparent background
colour. EntraPass allows operators to choose a more suitable colour.
• When checking the Save card pictures and signatures in a file box, the system will create
Picture and Signature directories under C:\Program Files\Kantech\Server_SE\Data where all
pictures and signatures will be saved instead of directly in the database.
• When checking the Save visitor pictures and signatures in a file box, the system will create
Picture and Signature directories under C:\Program Files\Kantech\Server_SE\Data where all
visitor pictures and signatures will be saved instead of directly in the database.
Note: When modifying an existing picture or signature, EntraPass will save it to the
appropriate file and delete the corresponding entry in the database.

Graphic
The graphic feature allows you to adjust the graphic quality for use with the EntraPass software.

• Unchecking Use JPEG format for graphics tells the system to save graphics in a tiff format.
Note: Remember that this may affect the image quality. If you are not an advanced user,
leave these values to default.
• The JPEG quality value for Graphic background ( picture ) indicates the quality of the image
that will be saved. If you choose 10, the saved image quality will be poor; 100 indicates an
excellent quality.
• When checking the Save graphics in a file box, the system will create a Graphic directory
under C:\Program Files\Kantech\Server_SE\Data where all graphics will be saved instead of
directly in the database.
Note: When modifying an existing graphics, EntraPass will save it to the appropriate file
and delete the corresponding entry in the database.

Report Parameters
The Report tab enables users to define the field separator for reports, disk free space threshold
and user name format.

CSV
Under the CSV tab, you can define the field separator for your reports.

• By default, the system uses a comma (,) as the Field separator . You can modify the comma
for another character. Other options are: Period, Equal, Semicolon, Colon, Space and tab.
• It is recommended to check the Date and time on separate fields option . When selected,
CSV (comma separated values) as the output process for your reports, by default, the system
includes the date and the time in a single field. When you select this option, the system will
separate the date and the time fields.

Disk Space
This feature is a protection when for instance a huge report has been requested. In this case, the
system will abort the execution of the report and displays an alert message indicating the reason of
the cancellation.
• Abort report if free space lower than (MB): scroll-down list allows you to specify the
minimum amount of free disk space required for the execution of reports. The range value is
2000 to 999,999 MB.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 253

 • Maximum event for email report scroll-down list allows you to specify the maximum
number of events that can be sent via an email report. The range value is 100 to 100,000
events.
• Maximum event for standard report scroll-down list allows you to specify the maximum
number of events that can be sent in a report. The range value is 1000 to 500,000 events.
• Simultaneous report process: specify the maximum number of reports that can be
generated simultaneously. Up to 10 reports can be executed simultaneously without
affecting the performance of the system.
Note: When the number of events for reports exceeds the maximum number, some
events will not be included in the report. This will create the event Report event quota
exceeded. This will be displayed in the desktop Messages and be added to the report.

User Name Format

Specifying the user name format will tell the system how card holder’s names will be displayed in
EntraPass (not available in EntraPass KTES Edition).

• Parse user name should be checked if you want to select a method of parsing the user’s
name in the system.
• User name format lets you select the parsing method. Options are: Begin with last name,
Begin with first name.
• Parse user name with lets you select the character that will be used to parse the user name
fields. Options are: Comma, Period, Equal, Semicolon, Colon, Space.
• Strict search on card field should be left empty unless you wish to keep the previous
method (EntraPass Version 3.17 and lower) of strict searching a card field for reports.
Note: Prior to version 3.18 of EntraPass, the system used a strict search method that
required Administrators to enter specific upper and lower boundaries to attain specific
results. For example, for generating a report that included all users whose last name
started with A, the lower boundary had to be A and the upper boundary had to be
AZZZZZ. Now, the system will display all user names that start with an A just by entering
A as a lower and upper boundary.

Video Parameters
The Video section will display only if the Video integration option is enabled in the EntraPass
system. You will define the time synchronization, remote video process and JPEG format for video
images.

Parameters
The Parameters tab allows you to define parameters for the video process.

• Disable manual time synchronization will keep the EntraPass server from updating the
video server date and time following a manual modification of time. This feature is useful
when, for example, you want to keep all recording events that occurred at the video server
regardless of the actual time at the EntraPass server.

254 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • The Remote video process control parameters section contains parameters that define
remote management of video processes between the EntraPass Server and the video servers
connected to EntraPass. It manages all the tasks (controls) related to: recordings, polls,
events, and presets and patterns.

- Preset and pattern control application field allows you to enter the number of
applications that will be simultaneously launched for processing presets and patterns.
The system is preset with a range value of 1 to 8 concurrent applications.
Note: A Preset and Pattern Control application is launched each time a video
recording is started following a trigger on a preset. If you set this number to 1
and if there are for instance more than 1 video servers with presets and patterns
defined, the control application will process presets on all video servers. If you
decide to increase the number of Preset and Pattern Control Applications, keep in
mind that running many concurrent applications takes a great amount of system
resources.

• Reset remote video process application will allow the system to terminate and
automatically restart the Remote Video Process application a few seconds later. This option
may be used in instances when the video events are not being displayed.
• Reset remote video process applications control will allow the system to terminate the
Control applications (recordings, polls, events and preset and patterns) and automatically
restart the Remote Video Process application.
• Log Video process error will allow the system to keep a log of all video process errors in the
EntraPass server files. Video process errors are logged in C:\Program files\Kantech\Server_SE
\Bin\Log. Each Remote Video Process Control application generates a log file:

- RVP_LOG_00.txt (errors generated by RVP0.exe)

- RVPPoll_LOG_01.txt (errors generated by RVPPOLL1.exe)
- RVPEvent_LOG_02.txt (errors generated by RVEVENT3.exe)
- RVPRecord_LOG_03.txt (errors generated by RVPRECORD3.exe).
- RVPControl_LOG_04.txt (errors generated by RVPCONTROL4.exe).The system will
generate as many log files as there are control applications running concurrently
(RVPControl_LOG_05 to 08). The number of error log files will be equal to the number
defined in the Preset and pattern control application field .
Snap:
The Snap option allows you to define the image quality that will display in the video thumbnails.

• The Video image snap indicates the quality of the image that will be saved as a thumbnail
for each video. If you choose 10, the saved image quality will be poor; 100 indicates an
excellent quality.

Intellex:

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 255

The Intellex options allow you to define the bandwidth allowed for the video process (for Intellex
only).

• Disable DirectX will disable DirectX, a Windows® technology that enables higher
performance when working or viewing graphics and other multimedia contents, including
video and sound. By default, DirectX is enabled with the Video feature. You may sometimes
need to disable it if, for example, video images are not correctly displayed or are not
displayed at all.
Note: The system will use more system resources when DirectX is disabled
• Limit video bandwidth allows you to reduce or increase the bandwidth required to stream
live video without compromising video storage quality and computer performance. The
range value is between 64 KB/s to 8192 KB/s. The value will apply to all workstations .
However, for any specific workstation, this value can be reduced locally from the Options
toolbar > Multimedia Devices > Video .
• Video vault save delay is used to indicate the time delay before the video vault recording
can be played back.

• Video vault save delay is used to indicate the time delay before the video vault recording
can be played back.

• Video vault save delay is used to indicate the time delay before the video vault recording
can be played back.

Time Parameters
• No time adjustment will disable the option.
• By Gateway will automatically synchronize the time of all computers with the Gateway
selected in the scrolling list.
• By Server will automatically synchronize the time of all computers at regular intervals. You
must also select the rate of Hours between refreshes in the adjacent selection box. The
range value is 1 to 9999 hours.

Workstation and Server

Toolbar Buttons
The toolbar buttons size can be increased up to 2.5 times the original size, in order to improve
visibility of the text below the button. Logout and log back in to apply the change to the toolbar.

Assign a New Connection to a Site

Note: Please refer to Connection Configuration for more details
To enable or disable the feature, select an option:
• Prompt: System will prompt the user to specify the site to be connected to (optional) when
creating a new connection.
• Mandatory: System will prompt the user to specify the site to be connected to (mandatory)
when creating a new connection.
• Disable (default)
Note: No reference will be made virtual sites unless at least one has been created
previously (see Site Configuration for details).

256 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Integration
The Integration tab allows the user to select third party hardware that has been integrated to
EntraPass by Kantech.
DLL registration: The available DLL in this menu will be used to specify which type of hardware the
customer will connect to EntraPass.

• Click on Add to integrate another DLL. For additional details, see Integrated Panel
Configuration.

Virtual keypad: The Virtual keypad tab allows the user to customize the virtual keypad screen
display. Three different display modes can be selected: Floating, Modal or Stay on top.

Web Interface
Web tab
Use the Web interface button to configure EntraPass Web parameters.

• Allow messages to EntraPass Web: Select to allow the operator to see messages in
EntraPass Web.
• Maximum web messages: Select a maximum from the counter.
• Signature pad pen width: Select a width value for the pen used with the signature pad.
• Maximum request simultaneously by session:Select the maximum number of report
requests that can be done simultaneously.
• Message filter for web messages: From the drop-down list, select a filter for the messages
to be displayed.
• Badge image ratio for web: Use the selector to increase the image printing quality (default
value is 2). Note that increasing the ratio value will also increase the file size.

Web Customization tab

• Custom color: Click to change the color used in the interface (menus perimeter lines for
example).
• Page logo: Click to insert (or change) a logo in the top left corner of the interface.

go Pass Tab
About this task:
If you register the go Pass mobile application, the go Pass tab appears. Use go Pass with a
smartphone or an Apple watch to lock or unlock a door. For convenience, you can control a door
from a remote location. For a higher level of security use an ioSmart reader with the door, ioSmart
readers use BLE technology. To cater for a range of security levels, select an option from the
Proximity Restriction list.

1. To display a cardholder’s encrypted personal profile on notification e-mails, select the

Display viable notification information check box. Cardholders use their personal profile
details or a link on the e-mail to gain access to the go Pass application.
2. To resend all go Pass notification e-mails to all valid cardholders, click the Resend go Pass
notification for all valid card holders button.
3. To control how and when SmartLink responds to invalid go Pass commands, define all three
settings in the Security area:

- To set how many invalid requests occur before SmartLink responds, enter a number in
the Notification debounce on wrong request field.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 257

 - To set the time to pass before SmartLink responds, enter a number in the Debounce
delay (ss) field.
- To prevent SmartLink responding to any go Pass requests for a certain amount of
time, enter a number in the Disable Go Pass when notification (m:ss) field.

For example, # of invalid requests within # seconds = # seconds before SmartLink

responds to go Pass requests + “Too many goPass failed request” event displays.
4. Select one of the following options from the Proximity Restriction list:

- None there is no restriction, the go Pass cardholder can lock, and unlock doors
remotely, and at the door. EntraPass ignores BLE technology.
- Strict (ioSmart BLE only) - if the go Pass cardholder presents go Pass at an ioSmart
reader, the go Pass cardholder has to be within range of the door.
- Hybrid (BLE when available) - use for go Pass cardholders who have access to
ioSmart readers and non-ioSmart readers. If the go Pass cardholder is at an ioSmart
door, the cardholder has to be within range, if it is a non-ioSmart door the cardholder
can control the door remotely

Note: If you fail to select the BLE checkbox in the reader template that the controller
uses, the Proximity Restriction selection is redundant.

User Name Format

• Parse user name should be checked if you want to select a method of parsing the user’s
name in the system.
• User name format lets you select the parsing method. Options are: Begin with last name,
Begin with first name.
• Parse user name with lets you select the character that will be used to parse the user name
fields. Options are: Comma, Period, Equal, Semicolon, Colon, Space.
• Strict search on card field should be left empty unless you wish to keep the previous
method (EntraPass Version 3.17 and lower) of strict searching a card field for reports.
Note: Prior to version 3.18 of EntraPass, the system used a strict search method that
required Administrators to enter specific upper and lower boundaries to attain specific
results. For example, for generating a report that included all users whose last name
started with A, the lower boundary had to be A and the upper boundary had to be
AZZZZZ. Now, the system will display all user names that start with an A just by entering
A as a lower and upper boundary.

258 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Backups
A backup is a copy of your system database which serves as a substitute or alternative in case the
computer fails. Backing up your files safeguards them against accidental loss when for example the
hard disk fails or when you accidentally overwrite or delete data. If your computer system fails, you
can restore a backup copy onto another computer, that has the EntraPass application installed .
The EntraPass Backup tab allows operators to perform manual backups of the system data (D),
archive (A), In/Out (T) and video (V) databases. It is also used to restore backup data.
Use the following safeguarding tips:

• Back up your files regularly, at least once a week or more if many modifications were made to
the database.
• We recommend that you make two backups of all your database files and keep them in
different locations.
• To backup your files, use any of the following options:

- The menu of the EntraPass backup utility.

- Other third party software and hardware.
Note: By default, when you backup or restore files, the EntraPass database is
temporarily disabled. In the EntraPass application main window, the second
colored square at the bottom left of the screen turns red when the database
is unavailable. Modifications made on the workstations are not applied to the
database until the database is available again.
All the system data can be found under the following path: C:\Program Files\Kantech\ Server_SE
\XXXX. If you are using a third party program to perform backups, it is recommended to backup
the whole Kantech directory and sub-directories. Each time a backup is done (even if it is done
automatically), a new sub-folder containing the data or the self-extracting file is created. If you are
using the “incremental” backup type and you want to restore information, you will have to restore
all the sub-folders one-by-one (starting with the oldest).

Creating Backups of Type D, A, T and V

About this task:
By default, the name of the sub-directory in which the data/archive/In-Out/Video databases will be
saved is generated automatically according to the following convention:X_YYYY_MM_DD-h_mm_ss,
where X is the data type (D for Data, A for archive, T for In/Out, V for video). The following steps
explain how to backup data. The same steps apply also when you backup archives or In/Out data.

1. Select the item you want to backup:

- Backup Data
- Backup Archive
- Backup In/Out
- Backup Video Events

Note: By default, EntraPass backs up all the information originating from the following
directory: C:\Program Files\Kantech\Server_SE\Data or Archive or In/Out to C:
\ProgramFiles\Kantech\Server_SE\Backup\ X_YYYY_MM_DD-h_mm_ss, where X is the
data type. The data type is followed by the year, month and day information as well as
the time of the backup.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 259

 2. Select the Backup type:

- Separate file: The system will back up the databases one by one (standard). This
backup type includes the Regdata.ini file containing the following identification data:
software used to create the backup, backup type (data, archive, In/Out), operator who
requested the backup, date and time of the backup as well as the software version.

3. From the Drives drop-down list, select the drive on which the backup will be performed. A list
of choices is available according to your computer settings. To save as default, leave as is.
4. You may click the New folder button if you want to specify a new destination folder.
5. Click OK to launch the backup procedure. The backup process can be viewed on the bottom
part of the window.
Note: You can use the “Backup Scheduler” to schedule or plan automatic backups. To
schedule automatic backups see Backup Scheduler. When you backup or restore files,
the Server databases are temporarily disabled. You cannot modify the databases when a
backup is in process.

Restores
About this task:
If you are restoring data, it is strongly recommended to perform a backup before you do so. If you
are using a third party program to restore the data, it is recommend to restore the whole Kantech
directory and sub-directories.

1. From the Backup tab, select the appropriate restore button: Data, Archive, In/Out, Video.
The system displays the Restore data window. It displays the path of the backup folder.
2. To change the destination folder, browse the Drives list. Click OK to launch the restore
process.
3. If you click the Complete button, the system restores all the information from the selected
directory.
Note: By default, the system restores all the information originating from the following
directory: C:\ProgramFiles\Kantech\Server_SE\Backup\ X_YYYY_MM_DD-h_mm_ss to C:
\Program Files\Kantech\Server_SE\Data or Archive or In/Out.
We recommend to reload the Gateway after restoring the data (Operation > Reload
data).

Log
About this task:
The log window contains all the login and logout events for all workstations defined in the system.
The logs are displayed with date and time, the workstation name, the operator name using the
workstation as well as the log type. The log window contains all the login and logout events for all
workstations defined in the system.

1. To view system logs, select the Log button from the Server menu.
2. Click the Text filter button. In the Text filter window, enter the text string, for example
Kantech, and the system will only display logs containing the specified string text. To return
to normal display, click Text filter.

260 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 3. Columns:

- Date and time: This is the normal incoming sequence, if you select another sorting
mode, you interrupt the normal sequence. Select date and time to restore the normal
sequence. To do this, you have also to use the Restart scroll button.
- Workstation: When selected, all columns are sorted according to the Workstation
column in alphabetical order.
- Operator name: When selected, all columns are sorted according to the Operator
name column in alphabetical order.
- Transaction: When selected, all columns are sorted according to the Transaction
column in alphabetical order.

4. To change the background color, right-click in the window and select Background color
from the displayed shortcut list. Pick a color from the standard Windows dialog.
5. To clear the window, right-click in the window and select Delete All from the shortcut menu.
6. Optional: To export the logs to a CSV file, right-click in the window and, from the shortcut
menu, select CSV Export.

Error Log
About this task:
The system errors are displayed with the date and time, the code number, the workstation name
where the error originated from, the error code and its description.

1. Select the Error Log button from the Server menu to view all the errors that occurred in the
system.
2. Click the Text filter button to display the Text filter window. From that window, enter the text
string (i.e.: Kantech), and the system will only display logs containing the specified string text.
To return to normal display, click on text filter.
3. Columns:

- Date and time: This is the normal incoming sequence, if you select another sorting
mode, you interrupt the normal sequence. Select date and time to restore the normal
sequence. To do this, you have also to use the Restart scroll button.
- Code : When selected, all columns will be sorted according to the Code column in
alphabetical order.
- Workstation : When selected, all columns will be sorted according to the
Workstation column in alphabetical order.
- Error Code : When selected, all columns will be sorted according to the Error Code
column in alphabetical order.
- Description : When selected, all columns will be sorted according to the Description
column in alphabetical order.

4. You may also use the right-click menu to change the window background or to clear all the
data displayed.
Note: You can export the logs to a CSV file. To do this, right-click in the window, then
select CSV Export from the shortcut menu.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 261

Utilities
Use utilities to manage, maintain and optimize EntraPass. The express setup feature provides a
quick and simple way to configure all the components of a new connection, use Express setup
program when configuring a KTES, system gateway, or controller. If you want to define operation
modes and schedules for relays, see Defining Relays. For input response times and monitoring
schedules, see Defining Inputs. To establish which, auxiliary output to use for your controller, see
Defining auxiliary outputs (LED and buzzer).
Use the Database utility program to verify manually the integrity of the database tables. Features
include verifying database index, links, and hierarchy, as well as updating database fields and
cleaning the database.
The is a video data storage and archive management tool. Use this section to install and launch
Video Vault, and to manage archived video segments.. To view EntraPass reports without starting
EntraPass use Quick report viewer from Windows Start menu.
Use the Vocabulary editor to change the Graphical User Interface (GUI) language, choose from
English, French, Spanish, Portuguese, German, Italian, Dutch, Turkish, and Simplified Chinese.

Database utility
The database utility program verifies the integrity of the database tables that are used to store
events, alarms, network alarms, and graphics. The system scans all the system database tables
and corrects errors (when they are found). Usually, the system verifies the database integrity
automatically at start-up (a system message is displayed). If an operator decides not to perform a
database check at startup, they can trigger the operation later, using the database utility program.
It may also be necessary to launch the database utility program when for instance the system
experiences problems frequently. This operation should be executed when the system is not used
since the system database is not available during operations on the databases. Some verifications
such as re-indexing the archive files, updating database fields, verifying archive files, or swapping
database languages require that the EntraPass applications be shutdown. Once all the EntraPass
applications that are running on the EntraPass Server computer are closed, you can start the
database utility. When an operation that requires the application to be shutdown is launched, the
operator is warned that the database access will be suspended during the operation.
Note: You must shut down the EntraPass workstation before you run the database utility.

Running the Database Utility

1. You can launch the Database Utility from the Windows® Start > All Programs > EntraPass
Special Edition > Database Utility.
Note: When you select the File > Workstation menu, the system displays only two
buttons, the Verify database integrity and the Update database fields buttons. The File >
Server menu offers more choices.

Verifying Database Integrity

1. Click the Verify database integrity button in the toolbar. You have the choice to perform a
quick or a complete check.

- Quick check : The system scans through the database tables, but does not display a
detailed report afterwards.
- Complete check : The system scans through the database tables and a detailed
report is displayed.

262 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Updating Database Fields
About this task:
This function is automatically executed when you perform a software is updated. If an operator
performs a database restore ( Server , Options toolbar, Restore ), the database fields are
automatically updated when the information is restored. Even when an operator performs a
database restore outside the Server (copies the databases from a third party backup program), this
function is automatically carried out when the Server is started up again.

1. From the EntraPass Database utility window, select the Update database field button.
Note: Use this function when, for instance, you experience problems when starting the
workstation. When the system does not start, this may imply that there are problems in
the database; that the source and the structure do not match.

Verifying Database Index

The Verify database Index program allows to entirely rebuild the database index by using the
information that was copied in the primary databases and grouping it to rebuild the Registry.DB
database. The latter is used to increase the system performance.
Note: This program can be used when a database is corrupted because it has not been backed
up.

Verifying Database Links

The Verify Database Links utility is used to rebuild all the links of the database. Moreover, this
program cleans the databases by deleting links that are no longer valid. For example, if a schedule
was assigned to a functionality and this schedule was deleted, the system will initialize the field
where it was assigned in the primary database. It will also remove the records that point to deleted
components. For example, if an access level is assigned to a gateway and this access level was
deleted, it will delete the record in the database. The Verify Database Links utility enables complete
management of the links between each component and ensures that the correct information is
displayed when:

• Viewing the structure of a component's links to all other components of the system,
• Removing all the traces of a component within the database when this component has been
deleted. For example, if a schedule is deleted, the system will use the link list to initialize all
the database fields that contains this schedule.
Note: It may be necessary to use this function when it is obvious that the database links
are incorrect. This features is useful when for example the system experiences abnormal
terminations.

Verifying Database Hierarchy

In EntraPass, the database is set up in a hierarchical way, which means that all components have a
parent and can have children components. The Verify database hierarchy utility is used to rebuild
the parent-child links within the database. The results of this program are limited if the damages of
the database are severe.
Note: When a user tries to access a controller by selecting a gateway and a connection and
when the result does not correspond to the reality, this means that the database hierarchy
is probably corrupted. In this case, the Verify database hierarchy feature can be used to
correct the problem. If the problem cannot be fixed, this could mean that the database is too
damaged to be fixed. It will be necessary to restore the database.

Verifying Database Archive Files

This function is used to verify archive files. It assigns a new unique sequential value to all primary
indexes of archive files.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 263

Verifying In/Out Files
This function is used to verify In/Out database files. It assigns a new unique sequential value to all
primary indexes of In/Out database files.

Swapping Descriptions
This function is used to interchange or to swap the database descriptions.

Cleaning the Database

This option is used to physically remove database records which have been identified by the system
as erased. Most of these records relate to cards and are kept in the Deleted Components section
of the database. Using this option will considerably reduce the space required by your database. It
will also improve system performance relating to searches for card information. It will not affect the
table Registry, nor will it have an impact on historical reports.
Note: It is strongly suggested to back-up the database before performing this operation.
Clean database will suspend operation of the database while cleaning is in effect.

Rebuilding Card Last Transaction Files

This function is used to rebuild the card last transaction files.

Express setup program

The express setup program offers a quick and simple way to configure all the components of a
system : type of readers used, number of connections, connection name, number of controllers on
a connection, etc. For example, users can modify a door’s name by automatically applying default
settings to all relays and inputs of controllers connected to the selected door.

Configuring a multi-site gateway connection using express setup

1. From the Windows® Start menu: Start > All Programs > EntraPass Global/Corporate/
Special Edition > Workstation/Server > Express Setup. You may also launch Express Setup
by clicking the Express Setup button from the registration window or gateway definition
window.

2. From Windows® Start menu: Start > All Programs > EntraPass Special Edition > Express
Setup. You may also launch the Express Setup by clicking the Express Setup button (rabbit)
from the various dialogs in the Devices toolbar.
3. Click the New connection button to create a new connection.
4. Enter the connection name in the connection description field, then select the reader type.
5. Select the Controller type for this connection.
Note: The KTES option is available for a Multi-site Gateway only.
There is no reader type or number of controllers to select when the controller type is a
KTES.
6. Select the Reader type .
7. Set the Number of controllers .
8. Specify the Connection type . This indicates how the connection communicates with the
computer. The connection types available will follow the controller type selection.

- Select Direct (RS-232 or USB) , if the connection is integrated to the gateway

computer and connected to it by an RS-232 serial port. If the connection type is direct,
then you have to specify the serial port (com:) as well as the controller connection
baud rate (usually set at either 9600 or 19200). The default value is 19200.

264 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 - Select Ethernet (polling) if the connection communicates with the gateway through
a terminal server device (Lantronix) using a port number. Then you have to specify
the terminal server’s IP Address and Port number . To configure the terminal server,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions or refer to the terminal server documentation.
- Select Dial-up (RS-232) modem if applicable.
- Select IP address (KT-400) if applicable. Complete the associated tabs.
- Select IP address (KTES) if applicable. Complete the associated tabs.
- Select IP address (IP Link) if applicable. Complete the associated tabs.

9. Click OK .
10. Specify the minimum configuration for the controllers or KTES defined in the site. This
includes assigning a name to the controller/KTES, specifying the passback option, and
entering the serial number.
Note: The serial number column appears only for the KT-100, KT-300, KT-400
controllers and the KTES. The passback type column only appears for the KT-300 and
the KT-400. The passback feature will not allow any card to re-enter unless it has been
used to exit. This requires that readers be used for both entry and exit.
11. For a new site with a KTES, go to Step 14.
12. Check the Same door 1 and 2 and Same door 3 and 4 option if a reader is installed on each
side of the door. The Same door 3 and 4 boxes are available only when you are using KT-400.
13. Select the appropriate Passback type (none, soft or hard). If a door is defined as an access
door, there is no anti-passback defined for this door. An entry or an exit door can be assigned
a passback option.
14. Go to Step 16.
15. Check the Door contact option.
16. Check the Postal lock option, if applicable, for a KTES only.
17. Enter the Serial number , if this column is displayed. The serial number (S/N) is on a sticker
and generally starts with Axxxxxxx .
18. Click OK . The components associated with the controller and to the site are created in the
server database. By default, the KT-200 and KT-300 are assigned two doors except for the
KT-400 which is assigned four doors, if the Same door option is not checked. The following
table summarizes default values that are assigned to controllers.
Note: When the system is updating the database, the second status flag turns red,
indicating that the system database is locked. When you try to access another system
menu while the database is locked, an error message appears. Simply wait until the
system database becomes available.
Result
The following are default values assigned to controllers by the Express Setup program.
Table 44: Express Setup controller default values
Controller or
KTES Door Relay Input zone Auxiliary output
KT-100 1 4 4 2
KT-200 2 2 16 4
KT-300 2 2 8 4
KT-400 4 4 16 16

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 265

Table 44: Express Setup controller default values
Controller or
KTES Door Relay Input zone Auxiliary output
KTES 1 3 4 2
KT-1 1 2 5 5
KT-2 2 2 8 5

The following table summarizes how input zones are used by the system for controllers.
Table 45: How the system uses input zones for controllers
Input zone System use Controllers
1 Door 1 contact KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-400, KT-1, and KT-2
2 Door 1 Rex
3 Door 2 contact KT-300
4 Door 2 Rex
5 Door 2 contact KT-400 and KT-2
6 Door 2 Rex
9 Door 2 contact KT-200
10 Door 2 Rex
9 Door 3 contact KT-400
10 Door 3 Rex
13 Door 4 contact
14 Door 4 Rex

The following table summarizes how input zones are used by the system for the KTES.
Table 46: How the system uses input zones for the KTES
Input zone System use Kantech Telephone Entry System
1 Door Contact KTES
2 Postal Lock
3 Door Rex
4 Future

The following table summarizes how output zones are used by the system.
Table 47: How the system uses output zones
Auxiliary output Use Controllers
1 LED (Door 1) KT-100, KT-200, KT-300 and KTES
2 Buzzer (Door 1)
3 LED (Door 2) KT-200 and KT-300
4 Buzzer (Door 2)

266 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Table 47: How the system uses output zones
Auxiliary output Use Controllers
1 OUT1 (Door 1) KT-400
2 OUT2 (Door 1)
3 LED (Door 1)
4 Buzzer (Door 1)
5 OUT1 (Door 2)
6 OUT2 (Door 2)
7 LED (Door 2)
8 Buzzer (Door 2)
9 OUT1 (Door 3)
10 OUT2 (Door 3)
11 LED (Door 3)
12 Buzzer (Door 3)
13 OUT1 (Door 4)
14 OUT2 (Door 4)
15 LED (Door 4)
16 Buzzer (Door 4)
1 OUT1 (Door 1) KT-1
2 OUT2 (Door 1)
3 LED (Door 1)
4 Buzzer (Door 1)
5 Unassignable
1 LED (Door 1) KT-2
2 Buzzer (Door 1)
3 LED (Door 2)
4 Buzzer (Door 2)
5 Unassignable

Note: The remaining components (relays and input zones) are undefined, that is, they have
been created but not yet defined. Components that are defined are grayed out. You cannot
select them or change their description. You can change their description in their respective
definition menu (Devices > Relays/Input zones).
By default, the system assumes that:

• The reader is ioProx Kantech XSF Format,

• The power supervision schedule is always valid,
• The failsoft delay is enabled for 45 seconds,
• The resistor type is none (KT-100, KT-300, KT-400 and KTES),
• The wait for second card delay is 30 seconds.

Configuring a Controller Using Express Setup

About this task:

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 267

When you select a connection type to a new site and immediately save , the system prompts you
to use the Express Setup tool to define the device. You may also launch this tool by selecting a
controller and clicking the Express Setup in the Controller dialog.

1. From the Controller window, select an undefined controller.

2. Under the General tab, select the Controller type .
3. Click on Save , a message box should display: Do you want to use the Express Setup
program to configure the associated devices. Click Yes to continue with the Express Setup .

- If you click on No , you can always return to the Express Setup by clicking on the
button.
Note: Please note that the KT-300 is a 2-door system while a KT-400 is a four-door
system.

4. Specify if Both readers are installed on the same door, if applicable (not for a KTES). When
two readers are installed on the same door, the REX contact option is disabled.
5. Click the Advanced button to define the other devices, such as doors, inputs, relays and
outputs.
Note: Components are listed in the left-hand pane. The related tabs are displayed in
the middle of the window. When you select a component, its default name, number
and default settings are displayed in the language section. Select a component to
enable its tab. Components that are assigned are gray and cannot be modified at this
stage. However, you may later modify any component description in its definition menu
( Devices > Controller/Door/Relay / Input / Output ).

Configuring a KTES Using Express Setup

About this task:
When you select a connection type to a new site and immediately save, the system prompts you to
use the Express Setup tool to define the device. You may also launch this tool by selecting a KTES
and clicking the Express Setup (rabbit button) in the KTES dialog.

1. From the Site window, click on New to define a new site. Assign it a name for both
languages.
2. Under the General tab, select the Controller type : Secure IP (KTES) .
3. Click on Save , a message box should display: Do you want to use the Express Setup
program to configure the associated devices. Click Yes to continue with the Express Setup .

- If you click on No , you can always return to the Express Setup by clicking on the
button.

4. Check the Door contact and the REX contact options.

5. Check the Postal lock option, if applicable.
6. Click the Advanced button to define the other devices, such as doors, inputs, relays and
outputs.
Note: Components are listed in the left-hand pane. The related tabs are displayed in
the middle of the window. When you select a component, its default name, number
and default settings are displayed in the language section. Select a component to
enable its tab. Components that are assigned are gray and cannot be modified at this
stage. However, you may later modify any component description in KTES dialog menu
( Devices > Kantech Telephone Entry System ).

268 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Defining Relays
About this task:
You may configure relays to define their operation mode, activation and deactivation schedules. If
you want to assign a name to the relay, you have to select it. When you use the Select All button,
the default names are kept.

1. Select the first relay if you want to modify its description. The relay tab is enabled. You have
to check the box beside the relay name in order to enable the language section.
2. Check the appropriate options for the Operating mode .
3. In the Automatic activation schedule drop-down list, choose the appropriate activation
schedule.
4. In the Disable relay action drop-down list, choose the appropriate action.

Defining Inputs
About this task:
By default, the response time for a REX is 250 ms; it is 500 ms for other input zones. The alarm
restore time is 500 ms by default. The Express Setup program allows you to define the Input
Normal State and Monitoring Schedule.

1. Select the first undefined input (its checkbox is not gray). Check its box to enable the
language fields, then assign names to it.
2. Choose the Input normal state option.
3. Select the Monitoring schedule from the drop-down list. If you want to assign a custom
schedule to the selected input, you have to define it in the Definition > Schedule .

Defining auxiliary outputs (LED and buzzer)

About this task:
When you define a controller or a KTES, you can also change the assignment of auxiliary outputs.
On the EntraPass workstation, click Devices and click Output.

1. Select the first undefined output; its check box is not gray. Select it to enable the language
fields, and then assign names to it.
2. Choose the Operating mode option.
3. Assign a door to the output from the Selected doors list.
Result
The following table summarizes how output zones are used by the system.

Table 48: How the system uses output zones

Auxiliary output Use Controllers
1 LED (Door 1) KT-100, KT-200, KT-300 and KTES
2 Buzzer (Door 1)
3 LED (Door 2) KT-200 & KT-300
4 Buzzer (Door 2)

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 269

Table 48: How the system uses output zones
Auxiliary output Use Controllers
3 LED (Door 1) KT-400
4 Buzzer (Door 1)
7 LED (Door 2)
8 Buzzer (Door 2)
11 LED (Door 3)
12 Buzzer (Door 3)
15 LED (Door 4)
16 Buzzer (Door 4)

Quick report viewer

About this task:
The Quick Report Viewer program allows operators to view previously saved reports without
having to start EntraPass. It is used to view, display and load reports that were previously saved (in
a.QRP format) during a print preview or Quick reports. For more information about requesting and
generating reports, see Requesting Reports. This program is useful when EntraPass is off-line and
when a report must be displayed for specific purposes.

1. From the Windows® task bar, click Start > All Programs > EntraPass > Quick Report Viewer.
2. Click the Open button to open a report. The system displays the Open window.
3. By default, when a report is saved in a QRP format, the system automatically saves it in My
Documents folder. If you have saved the report in another folder, browse to the folder to
select the report.
4. Click Open to preview the report.
5. Use the toolbar buttons to preview the report.
Table 49: Report toolbar icons
Icon Description
Use the Zoom out icon to zoom out the report view.

Use the Zoom In icon to display details.

Use Previous Page and Next Page icons to change pages.

Use the Open icon to open a report located in any folder on your computer.

Use the Print icon to print the report. There is no printer setup dialog box, the
report prints automatically. To cancel the printing, click Cancel.
Use the Quit icon to quit the application.

Vocabulary editor
Use the vocabulary editor to translate the display text of the software into the language of your
choice. EntraPass offers you the possibility of adding up to 99 languages for the purpose of
changing the text language in the graphic user interface. However, you can only run the software

270 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

in two languages at a time, a primary and a secondary language. If you want to use the software
in a language other than English, French, German, Italian or Spanish, you can have the database
dictionary translated in the language of your choice. You will then have to integrate the translated
dictionary in the software. The creation of a new display language is carried out in three stages:

1. Translating the source text

2. Integrating the newly created language to the EntraPass dictionary in the Server
3. Distributing the new custom language to all EntraPass application
Note: To be able to run a new language, your operating system (Windows ®) must
support the desired language. For example, your keyboard (characters) and window
(display) must support the specific characters of the desired language. The computers
where EntraPass applications are running must also support the language. For more
information on language support, contact your system administrator.

Installing the Vocabulary Editor

EntraPass Vocabulary Editor is a stand-alone program. You can install it and run it independently. If
you want to translate the system language, you just have to install the Vocabulary editor and then
to translate the vocabulary database.
Note: You do not need an additional license to install the Vocabulary Editor. You just have to
select it in the Setup window. For more information, see System Installation.

Translating the system language

About this task:
EntraPass Vocabulary Editor is a stand-alone program. You can run it independently, you do not
need to launch EntraPass software to run the Vocabulary editor. The Vocabulary Editor program will
assist you if you want to translate the software in a language, other than English, French, Spanish
Italian or German.

1. Start the Vocabulary editor from the Windows® Start menu: click Start > All Programs >
EntraPass Special Edition > Vocabulary Editor > Vocabulary Editor.
2. Select one of the available languages and click on New . The system displays the Select
language window.
3. Select the source language for the translation, then click OK . The newly selected language is
transferred to the right in the Custom Languages display list.
4. Click on the new Custom Language and then on the Edit custom language button to start
translating the software vocabulary. The system displays the dictionary database.
Note: You must make sure that the Customdictionnary directories are regularly backed
up (C:\ProgramFiles\Kantech\Vocabulary Editor\CustomDictionary\files.xxx.ath) or C:
\ProgramFiles\Kantech\”Application type”\CustomDictionary\files.xxx.0
Result
The following table shows the value of the Vocabulary Editor color codes.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 271

Table 50: Vocabulary editor color codes
Vocabulary editor color codes Value
Green Valid text string.
Blue/Green New text string.
Red Obsolete text string.

• The “Source language” column contains text based on the basic language that was selected
during the creation of the vocabulary. This column will serve as a “source” for the translation.
Software language columns cannot be modified by the user.
• Use the right-click to enable a contextual sub-menu or use the Language editor toolbar. A
hint appears when you position the mouse over a button.

Integrating the custom language in EntraPass

About this task:
After the translation is finished, integrate the new dictionary into the system dictionary so that
system operators can use it. The following table describes the icons in the vocabulary editor
window. You can also select these options from the Actions menu.
Table 51: Vocabulary editor icons
Icon Description
Apply changes to operational dictionary: Select this option when you want to
test your changes before you update the whole system.
Restore operational vocabulary: Select this option to restore the default
languages. It creates a self-extracting file which restores the original dictionary.
Scan dictionary for new entries: Select this option when the software was
updated.
Create self-extracting file for update: Select this option if you decide to
implement the new vocabulary. The system creates an Updatedictionary.exe
file, and prompts you to select a destination folder for the file.

1. Start the Vocabulary Editor. The Vocabulary Editor window toolbar displays five buttons.
Note: The Graphic User Interface appears only in one of five languages: English, French,
German, Italian or Spanish.
2. Select a newly translated vocabulary.

- You can choose to Apply changes to the Operational dictionary: this option is
useful when you want to test your changes before you update the whole system.
- Restore the operational vocabulary: this option allows the user to easily restore
the default languages. It creates a self-extracting file which restores the original
dictionary.
- Scan dictionary for new entries: this option is useful when the software was
updated for example.

3. If you decide to implement the new vocabulary, click the Actions menu and select Create
self-extracting file for update. The system creates the Updatedictionary.exe file, and
prompts you to select a destination folder for the file.
4. Select the destination folder for Updatedictionary.exe. By default, the self-extracting file
is stored in C:\Program Files\Kantech (application).

272 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 Note: Copy the Updatedictionary.exe file on a network folder if you want operators
to access the file to update their software application.

Distributing the New System Vocabulary

Before you run the file, make sure to exit the EntraPass software; otherwise the operation will not
work.

Updating the system vocabulary

1. Exit all EntraPass programs.
2. Start Windows Explorer® > Kantech > (EntraPass application), then copy the
Updatedictionary.exe on the server.
3. Double-click Updatedictionary.exe. The system displays the EntraPass applications that
are installed on the computer.
4. Select each application and click Update dictionary.
5. Add the Updatedictionary.exe to every computer where EntraPass is installed, and
double-click it to launch the language update. Exit all EntraPass applications before you run
the self-extracting file.
6. Select the applications you want to update, one at a time, and click Update dictionary. The
system automatically copies the vocabulary to the Custom Dictionary directory, and merges
the custom directory with the application dictionary.
Note: You must update all the applications in the system.
To restore the dictionary to original default values, follow the same procedures as for
updating the dictionary.
7. Click Options and click Select language.
8. In the Select the language window, select the primary language and the secondary
language. The newly integrated language is displayed in the list. It is important to select the
language at this stage, otherwise the operators of the system cannot use it.
Note: For example, if your primary language is English and your secondary language is
French, and you select the new language, for example Russian as primary, all operators
who have English as their display language in the Operator menu now see the Russian
language. However, if you change the secondary language to Russian, operators must
manually select Russian in the Operator definition menu to use it. To assign the desired
language to an operator, use the System definition menu, then select the Operator
definition menu.

Upgrading the System Vocabulary

When you upgrade your system, the new or modified strings are automatically inserted in the
system vocabulary and also in the custom dictionary. If you have added a custom language to your
system, you have to translate the new/modified strings following a system upgrade. Therefore,
you have to re-edit the vocabulary and create a new self-extracting file. When you re-open the
vocabulary table, new strings are indicated by a green point. Obsolete strings (no longer used) are
tagged red.
Note: For easier management, we recommend that you always edit your vocabulary from the
same computer and integrate it to the system using a self-extracting file.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 273

EntraPass icons
There are over 90 animated icons in EntraPass that indicate the status of a physical or logical
component.

Alarm Systems
Alarm system icons indicate the status of an alarm system within the Graphic desktop (Desktop >
Graphic desktop) or in the “Operation” window.

Alarm system is in alarm

This animated icon appears when the alarm system is in alarm. It is displayed in:

• the Alarm message box when an acknowledgement is required.

• the “Operation” window
• the Desktop > Graphic desktop.

Alarm system is armed

This animated icon appears when the alarm system is armed. It is displayed in:

• the Operation window

• the Desktop > Graphic desktop.

Alarm system is armed with input in alarm (forced arming)

This animated icon appears when arming the alarm system while a surveillance area is in alarm.
The system will allow you to arm the system (forced armed) and the icons will display the input in
alarm in:
• the Operation window
• the Desktop > Graphic desktop.

Alarm system is in arming request delay

This animated icon appears when the alarm system in the “arming request” delay (waiting for
confirmation with the arming request input button). It is displayed in:
• the “Operation” window

274 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • the Desktop > Graphic desktop.

Alarm system is disarmed

This animated icon appears when the alarm system is disarmed. It is displayed in:

• the “Operation” window.

• the Desktop > Graphic desktop.

Alarm system is in entry delay

This animated icon appears when the alarm system is in “entry” delay. It is displayed in:

• the “Operation” window.

• the Desktop > Graphic desktop.

Alarm system is in “Exit” delay

This animated icon appears when the alarm system is in “exit” delay. It is displayed in:

• the “Manual Operation” window.

• the Desktop > Graphic desktop.

Alarm system status is not yet known

This animated icon appears when the status of the alarm system is unknown. It is displayed in:

• the “Graphic” window (the Desktop > Graphic desktop) when the status of the alarm system
is unknown.

Alarm system is in “Postpone” mode

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 275

This animated icon appears when the alarm system is in “postpone” mode. Once this delay is over,
the system will initiate the exit delay and arm again (if the “no disarm” schedule is still valid). It is
displayed in:

• the Operation window.

• the “Graphic” window (the Desktop > Graphic desktop).

Controllers
Controller animated icons indicate the status of a door controller in the graphic window (Desktop >
Graphic desktop) or in the “Operation” window.

Status unknown

Appears when the EntraPass application has not received the component status after four (4)
attempts. It is displayed in:

• the Operation window (alarms, areas, guard tours, door, elevator door, relay, input, reload
data)
• or the Desktop > Graphic desktop.

Controller AC failure

Appears when the controller is in AC failure. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Controller Reset

Controller Polling Malfunction

Appears when the controller polling function is malfunctioning. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Controller

Controller AC failure and Tamper Switch in “alarm”

276 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Appears when the controller is in AC failure and the tamper switch is in alarm. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Controller Reset

Controller is not communicating

Appears when the controller is not communicating. It is displayed in:

• the “Operation” — “Area”, “Guard Tour” and “Controller Reset” windows. “Controller Reset”
windows. “Controller Reset” windows.
• the Desktop > Graphic desktop.

Controller communication is regular (no problem)

Appears when the controller is communicating and the communication is regular. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Controller Reset.

Controller is in “Reset” and AC failure

Appears when the controller is in “reset mode” and in “AC failure”. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Controller Reset.

Controller is in “Reset”, “AC failure” and “Tamper in alarm”

Appears when the controller is in “reset mode”, in “AC failure” and the tamper is in alarm. It is
displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Controller Reset

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 277

Controller is in reset and tamper in alarm

Appears when the controller is in “reset mode” and the tamper is in alarm. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Controller Reset.

Controller tamper in alarm

Appears when the controller tamper is in alarm. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Controller Reset when the controller tamper is in alarm.

Controller reloading firmware

Appears when the controller is reloading firmware. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Controller Reset.

KT-400 controller trouble

Appears when there is a KT-400 controller trouble. It is displayed in:

• the Desktop > Graphic desktop

• the Operation > Controller.

Doors
Icons representing a door state indicate the status of door within the graphic window (from the
desktop) or within the “Operation” window.

Door forced open

278 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and that no access granted nor request to
exit was permitted. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door, Elevator Door

Door forced open (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and that no access granted nor request to
exit was permitted and the reader is disabled. it is displayed in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic)

• the Operation > Door, Elevator Door

Door closed and locked

This animated icon appears when the door is closed and locked. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door

Door closed and locked (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door closed and locked and that the reader is disabled. It is
displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door.

Door open too long

This animated icon appears when the door is opened more than the permitted delay set in “open
time”. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door, Elevator door.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 279

Door open too long (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is opened more than the permitted delay set in “open
time” and that the reader is disabled. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door, Elevator door.

Door open and unlocked manually

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and it was unlocked by an operator. it is
displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.

Door open and unlocked manually (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and it was unlocked by an operator and the
reader is disabled. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.

Door is opened and unlocked by schedule

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and it was unlocked by a schedule. It is
displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.

Door is opened and unlocked by schedule (reader disabled)

280 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

This animated icon appears when the door is opened, and it was unlocked by a schedule and the
reader is disable. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.

Door pre-alarm on open too long

This animated icon appears when the door is opened more than half the time permitted delay set
in “open time”. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.

Door pre-alarm on open too long (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is opened more than half the time permitted delay set
in “open time” and the reader is disabled. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.

Door still opened schedule invalid

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and the unlock schedule is invalid. It is
displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door/Elevator door.

Door still opened schedule invalid (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is opened and the unlock schedule is invalid and the
reader is disabled. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Door/ Elevator door.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 281

Door unlocked by an operator

This animated icon appears when the door is unlocked by an operator (manually). It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door > Elevator door.

Door unlocked by an operator (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is unlocked by an operator (manually) and the reader is
disabled. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door/Elevator door.

Door unlocked by a schedule

This animated icon appears when the door is unlocked by a schedule. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door/Elevator door.

Door unlocked by a schedule (reader disabled)

This animated icon appears when the door is unlocked by a schedule and the reader is disabled.
It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door/Elevator door.

Elevator door unlocked and closed

282 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

This animated icon appears when the elevator door is closed and unlocked. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Door/Elevator door.

Wireless lock connected

This icon appears when the wireless lock is connected. It is displayed in:

• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)

• the Operation > Integrated Panel/Wireless Lock.

Wireless lock error

This icon appears when the wireless lock has an error associated with it. It is displayed in:
• the Graphic desktop (Desktop > Graphic desktop window)
• the Operation > Integrated Panel/Wireless Lock.

Relays
Relays icons indicate the status of a relay within the graphic window (from the desktop) or within
the “Operation” window.

Relay activated by alarm system in alarm

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) for a relay triggered by an alarm system in alarm.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is triggered by an alarm system in alarm.

Relay activated by alarm system function

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) for a relay triggered by a function of an alarm

system.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is triggered by a function of an alarm system.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 283

Relay activated by alarm system delay

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) for a relay triggered by the delay of an alarm
system.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is triggered by the delay of an alarm system.

Relay activated by an event

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is triggered by an event.

• the Operation > Relay when the relay is triggered by an event.

Relay temporarily activated by an event

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is temporarily activated by an
event.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is temporarily activated by an event.

Relay activated by an input

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is triggered by an input.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is triggered by an input.

Relay temporarily activated by an input

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is temporarily activated by an input.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is temporarily activated by an input.

284 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Relay activated by an operator

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is activated by an operator.

• the Operation > Relay when the relay is activated by an operator.

Relay temporarily activated by an operator

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) for a relay temporarily activated by an operator.

• the Operation > Relay when the relay is temporarily activated by an operator.

Relay temporarily activated by a schedule

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is activated by a schedule.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is activated by a schedule.

Relay deactivated

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the relay is not activated.
• the Operation > Relay when the relay is not activated.

Inputs
This section is used to indicate the status of an input within the graphic window (from the desktop)
or within the “Operation” window.

Input activated—Not supervised

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 285

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is activated and the monitoring
schedule is invalid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is activated and the monitoring schedule is invalid.

Input activated—Supervised

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is activated and the monitoring
schedule is valid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is activated and the monitoring schedule is valid.

Input activated—Not supervised manual operation

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is activated, manually operated
and the monitoring schedule is invalid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is activated, manually operated and the monitoring
schedule is invalid.

Input activated—Supervised manual operation

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is activated, manually operated
and the monitoring schedule is valid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is activated, manually operated and the monitoring
schedule is valid.

Input activated—Supervised temporarily manual operation

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is activated, manually operated
and the monitoring schedule is temporarily valid.

286 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 • the Operation > Input when the input is activated, manually operated and the monitoring
schedule is temporarily valid.

Input in alarm—Not supervised

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in alarm and the monitoring
schedule is invalid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is in alarm and the monitoring schedule is invalid.

Input in alarm—Shunted by operator

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in alarm and it is shunted by an
operator.
• the Operation > Input when the input is in alarm and it is shunted by an operator.

Input in alarm—Supervised

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in alarm and the monitoring
schedule is valid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is in alarm and the monitoring schedule is valid.

Input in alarm—Supervised by operator

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in alarm and it is supervised by
an operator (continuous supervision).
• the Operation > Input when the input is in alarm and it is supervised by an operator
(continuous supervision).

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 287

Input OK—Not supervised

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in normal condition and the
monitoring schedule is invalid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is in normal condition and the monitoring schedule is
invalid.

Input OK—Shunted by operator

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in normal condition and it is
shunted by an operator.
• the Operation > Input when the input is in normal condition and it is shunted by an operator.

Input OK—Supervised

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in normal condition and the
monitoring schedule is valid.
• the Operation > Input when the input is in normal condition and the monitoring schedule is
valid.

Input OK—Supervised by operator

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the input is in normal condition and it is
supervised by an operator (continuous supervision).
• the Operation > Input when the input is in normal condition and it is supervised by an
operator (continuous supervision).

Controller connection
These icons indicate the status of a connection, or gateway within the graphic window (from the
desktop) or within the “Operation” window.

288 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Connection status is not yet known

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the status of the controller connection is not
yet known.

Controller connection connected

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the connection is connected and

communication is OK.
• the Operation > Reload data when the connection is connected and communication is OK.

Controller connection connected and in “Reload Data”

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the connection is connected and is in “reload
data” state.
• the Operation > Reload data when the connection is connected and is in “reload data” state.

Controller connection—Communication Failure

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (Desktop—graphic) when the connection is disconnected and there is
a communication failure.
• the Operation > Reload data when the connection is disconnected and there is a
communication failure.

Gateways
Gateway—Communication Failure

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 289

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Operation” (door, elevator door, relay, input, reload gateway) window when the gateway
is in communication failure.
• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway is in communication failure.

Gateway in “Reload Data”

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (Desktop—graphic) when the gateway is being reloaded.

• the Operation > (door, elevator door, relay, input, reload gateway) when the gateway is being
reloaded.

Gateway—Communication Failure during Reload Data

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Operation” (reload data gateway) window when the gateway loses communication
during a reload data operation.
• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway loses communication during a
reload data operation.

Gateway communication is regular (no problem)

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway is communicating and the
communication is regular.
• the Operation > Reload data gateway, communication is regular.

Gateway Trouble

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway is not communicating.

• the Operation > Reload data gateway, the gateway is not communicating.

290 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

Gateway Trouble when Reloading

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway is not communicating.

• the Operation > Reload data gateway is not communicating with the gateway during a reload
data operation.

Gateway (Gateway Software Interface):

Gateway OK—communicating

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway is communicating.

• the Operation > Reload data when the gateway is communicating.

Gateway in “Reload Data”

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the gateway is being reloaded.
• the Operation > Reload data when the gateway is being reloaded.

Gateway—Communication Failure

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when gateway is not communicating.
• the Operation > Reload data when the gateway is not communicating.

Gateway—Reload KT-NCC Firmware

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the system is performing an automatic

upgrade of the KT-NCC firmware.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 291

 • the “Operation” when the system is performing an automatic upgrade of the KT-NCC
firmware.

EntraPass Application
Application status is not yet known

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the status of the application is not yet
known.

Application attempts communication

This animated icon appears in:

• the start-up window when the workstation attempts to communicate with the server.

Application—Communication Failure

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the workstation is in communication failure.

• the “Operation” window (alarm, area, guard tour, door, elevator door, relay, input, reload
gateway) when the workstation is in communication failure.

Others
Database Initialization

This animated icon appears in:

• the start-up window when the workstation initializes the database.

Data not available

292 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

This animated icon is used to indicate a transient stage. This could indicate that the requested
information is not currently available.

No status available

This animated icon is used to indicate a transient stage. This could indicate that the requested
component status is not currently available.

Output status is not yet known

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the status of the output is not yet known.

Status unknown

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Operation” (alarms, areas, guard tours, door, elevator door, relay, input, reload) window
when the workstation has not received the component status after four (4) attempts.
• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the workstation has not received the
component status after four (4) attempts.

Error in process

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Operation” (alarms, areas, guard tours, door, elevator door, relay, input, reload data)
window when a specific error is detected.
• the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when a specific error is detected.

Undefined Component

This animated icon appears in:

• the “Operation” window (alarm, areas, guard tour, door, elevator door, relay, input, reload
data gateway) when the component does not exist.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 293

 • the “Graphic” window (desktop—graphic) when the component does not exist.

294 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

EULA
TYCO INTERNATIONAL LTD
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT - READ THIS END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") CAREFULLY BEFORE OPENING
THE DISK PACKAGE, DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE OR INSTALLING, COPYING OR OTHERWISE
USING THE SOFTWARE.
THIS EULA IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND SENSORMATIC ELECTRONICS, LLC ("TYCO"),
AND GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE ACCOMPANYING THIS EULA WHICH SOFTWARE
INCLUDES COMPUTER SOFTWARE AND MAY INCLUDE MEDIA, PRINTED MATERIALS, AND "ON-LINE"
OR ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTATION (COLLECTIVELY, THE "SOFTWARE"). BY BREAKING THE SEAL ON
THIS PACKAGE, DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE OR INSTALLING, COPYING OR OTHERWISE USING
THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO
ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA, DO NOT OPEN, DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, COPY
OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE.

1. SCOPE OF LICENSE. The Software may include computer code, program files and any
associated media, hardware or software keys, printed material and electronic documentation.
The Software may be provided to you pre-installed on a storage device (the media) as part
of a computer system or other hardware or device ("System"). The Software is protected
by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property
laws and treaties. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the Software (including
but not limited to any images, photographs, and text incorporated into the Software), the
accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the Software, are owned by Tyco and/or
its suppliers. The Software is licensed, not sold. All rights not expressly granted under this
EULA are reserved by Tyco and its suppliers.
2. GRANT OF LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following rights on a non-exclusive basis:

a. General. This EULA permits you to use the Software for which you have purchased
this EULA. Once you have purchased licenses for the number of copies of the Software
that you require, you may use the Software and accompanying material provided
that you install and use no more than the licensed number of copies at one time.
The Software is only licensed for use with specified Licensor-supplied Systems. If the
Software is protected by a software or hardware key or other device, the Software
may be used on any computer on which the key is installed. If the key locks the
Software to a particular System, the Software may only be used on that System.
b. Locally Stored Components. The Software may include a software code component
that may be stored and operated locally on one or more devices. Once you have
paid the required license fees for these devices (as determined by Tyco in its sole
discretion), you may install and/or use one copy of such component of the Software
on each of the devices as licensed by Tyco. You may then use, access, display, run
or otherwise interact with ("use") such component of the Software in connection
with operating the device on which it is installed solely in the manner set forth in
any accompanying documentation or, in the absence of such, solely in the manner
contemplated by the nature of the Software.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 295

 c. Remotely Stored Components. The Software may also include a software code
component for operating one or more devices remotely. You may install and/or
use one copy of such component of the Software on a remote storage device on an
internal network with all of the devices and may operate such component with each
device over the internal network solely in the manner set forth in any accompanying
documentation or, in the absence of such, solely in the manner contemplated by the
nature of the Software; provided however, you must still acquire the required number
of licenses for each of the devices with which such component is to be operated.
d. Embedded Software/Firmware. The Software may also include a software code
component that is resident in a device as provided by Tyco for operating that device.
You may use such component of the Software solely in connection with the use of that
device, but may not retrieve, copy or otherwise transfer that software component to
any other media or device without Tyco's express prior written authorization.
e. Backup Copy. You may make a back-up copy of the Software (other than embedded
software) solely for archival purposes, which copy may only be used to replace
a component of the Software for which you have current valid license. Except as
expressly provided in this EULA, you may not otherwise make copies of the Software,
including the printed materials.

3. OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS. Your use of the Software is subject to the following
additional limitations. Failure to comply with any of these restrictions will result in automatic
termination of this EULA and will make available to Tyco other legal remedies.

a. Limitations on Reverse Engineering and Derivative Works. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software, and any attempt to do so shall
immediately terminate this EULA - except and only to the extent that such activity
may be expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation. You
may not make any changes or modifications to any portion of the Software, or create
any derivative works, without the written permission of an officer of Tyco (except as
provided in Section 3(f) of this EULA with respect to "open source" software). You
may not remove any proprietary notices, marks or labels from the Software. You shall
institute reasonable measures to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of
this EULA by your personnel and agents.
b. Copyright Notices. You must maintain all copyright notices on all copies of the
Software.
c. Transfer. You may only transfer your rights under this EULA (i) as part of a permanent
sale or transfer of all of the devices for which the Software is licensed as applicable;
(ii) if you transfer all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and
printed materials, any upgrades and this EULA); (iii) if you do not retain any copies
of any portion of the Software; (iv) if the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA;
and (v) if the Software is an upgrade, such transfer must also include all prior versions
of the Software. You agree that failure to meet all of these conditions renders such
transfer null and void.
d. Termination. Without prejudice to any other rights, Tyco may terminate this EULA
if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions herein. In such event, you must
immediately destroy all copies of the Software and all of its component parts. To
the extent the Software is embedded in hardware or firmware, you will provide
prompt access to Tyco or its representative to remove or lock Software features or
functionality as Tyco determines.

296 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 e. Subsequent EULA. Tyco may also supersede this EULA with a subsequent EULA
pursuant to providing you with any future component, release, upgrade or other
modification or addition to the Software. Similarly, to the extent that the terms of
this EULA conflict with any prior EULA or other agreement between you and Tyco
regarding the Software, the terms of this EULA shall prevail.
f. Incorporation of "Open Source" and other Third Party Software. Portions of the
Software may be subject to certain thirty party license agreements governing the
use, copying, modification, redistribution and warranty of those portions of the
Software, including what is commonly known as "open source" software. No warranty
is provided for open source software. By using the Software you are also agreeing to
be bound to the terms of such third party licenses. If provided for in the applicable
third party license, you may have a right to receive source code for such software for
use and distribution in any program that you create, so long as you in turn agree to
be bound to the terms of the applicable third party license, and your programs are
distributed under the terms of that license. If applicable, a copy of such source code
may be obtained free of charge by contacting your Tyco representative.
g. Trademarks. This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of Tyco, its affiliates or its suppliers.
h. Rental. You may not sub-license, rent, lease or lend the Software. You may not make it
available to others or post it on a server or web site or otherwise distribute it.
i. Software Keys. The hardware/software key, where applicable, is your proof of license
to exercise the rights granted herein and must be retained by you. Lost or stolen keys
will not be replaced.
j. Demonstration and Evaluation Copies. A demonstration or evaluation copy of the
Software is covered by this EULA; provided that the licenses contained herein shall
expire at the end of the demonstration or evaluation period.
k. Registration of Software. The Software may require registration with Tyco prior to use.
If you do not register the Software, this EULA is automatically terminated and you
may not use the Software.
l. Additional Restrictions. The Software may be subject to additional restrictions and
conditions on use as specified in the documentation accompanying such Software,
which additional restrictions and conditions are hereby incorporated into and made a
part of this EULA.
m. Upgrades and Updates. To the extent Tyco makes them available, Software upgrades
and updates may only be used to replace all or part of the original Software that you
are licensed to use. Software upgrades and updates do not increase the number of
copies licensed to you. If the Software is an upgrade of a component of a package
of Software programs that you licensed as a single product, the Software may be
used and transferred only as part of that single product package and may not be
separated for use on more than one computer or System. Software upgrades and
updates downloaded free of charge via a Tyco authorized World Wide Web or FTP site
may be used to upgrade multiple Systems provided that you are licensed to use the
original Software on those Systems.
n. Tools and Utilities. Software distributed via a Tyco-authorized World Wide Web or FTP
site (or similar Tyco-authorized distribution means) as a tool or utility may be copied
and installed without limitation provided that the Software is not distributed or sold
and the Software is only used for the intended purpose of the tool or utility and in
conjunction with Tyco products. All other terms and conditions of this EULA continue
to apply.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 297

 4. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You agree that you will not export, re-export or transfer any portion
of the Software, or any direct product thereof (the foregoing collectively referred to as the
"Restricted Components"), to IRAN, NORTH KOREA, SYRIA, CUBA and SUDAN, including any
entities or persons in those countries, either directly or indirectly ("Tyco's Position"). You
also agree that you will not export, re-export or transfer the Restricted Components to any
other countries except in full compliance with all applicable governmental requirements,
including but not limited to applicable economic sanctions and constraints administered by
the U.S. Treasury Department and applicable export control measures administered by the
U.S. Department of Commerce and U.S. Department of State, any other U.S. government
agencies, and measures administered by the European Union or the government agencies of
any other countries. Any violation by you of the applicable laws or regulations of the U.S. or
any other government, or where you breach Tyco's Position notwithstanding whether or not
this is contrary to any aforementioned applicable laws or regulations, will result in automatic
termination of this EULA.
5. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software is Commercial Computer Software
provided with "restricted rights" under Federal Acquisition Regulations and agency
supplements to them. Any use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject
to restrictions as set forth in sub-paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software clause at DFAR 255.227-7013 et. seq. or 252.211-7015, or sub-paragraphs
(a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19,
as applicable, or similar clauses in the NASA FAR Supplement. Contractor/manufacturer is
Sensormatic Electronics, LLC, 6 Technology Park Drive, Westford, MA 01886.
6. LIMITED WARRANTY.

a. Warranty. Tyco warrants that the recording medium on which the Software is
recorded, hardware key, and the documentation provided with it, will be free of
defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety
(90) days from the date of delivery to the first user. Tyco further warrants that
for the same period, the Software provided on the recording medium under this
license will substantially perform as described in the user documentation provided
with the product when used with specified hardware. THE FOREGOING EXPRESS
WARRANTY REPLACES AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS,
WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
ANY IMPLIED OR OTHER WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT OR NON-MISAPPROPRIATION
OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OF A THIRD PARTY, CUSTOM, TRADE, QUIET
ENJOYMENT, ACCURACY OF INFORMATIONAL CONTENT, OR SYSTEM INTEGRATION.
TYCO MAKES NO WARRANTY THAT ANY PORTION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE
ERROR-FREE, FREE OF ANY SECURITY DEFECTS OR IN AN UNINTERRUPTED MANNER.
TYCO SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROBLEMS CAUSED BY CHANGES IN THE
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS OF THE DEVICE(S) UPON WHICH THE SOFTWARE
IS OPERATING, OR FOR PROBLEMS IN THE INTERACTION OF THE SOFTWARE WITH
NON-TYCO SOFTWARE OR HARDWARE PRODUCTS. TYCO NEITHER ASSUMES NOR
AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON PURPORTING TO ACT ON ITS BEHALF TO MODIFY
OR TO CHANGE THIS WARRANTY, NOR TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER WARRANTY
OR LIABILITY CONCERNING THIS SOFTWARE. THE WARRANTY MADE BY TYCO MAY BE
VOIDED BY ABUSE OR MISUSE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL
RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS UNDER MANDATORY LAW THAT VARY FROM
STATE TO STATE AND COUNTRY TO COUNTRY.

298 EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide

 b. Exclusive Remedy. Tyco's entire liability and your exclusive remedy under the
warranty set forth in this Section 6 will be, at Tyco's option, to (i) attempt to correct
Software errors with efforts Tyco believes suitable to the problem, (ii) replace at no
cost the recording medium, Software or documentation with functional equivalents as
applicable, or (iii) refund a pro-rated portion of the license fee paid for such Software
(less depreciation based on a five-year life expectancy) and terminate this EULA,
provided, in each case, that Tyco is notified in writing of all warranty problems during
the applicable warranty period. Any replacement item will be warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period. No remedy is provided for failure of the
Software if such failure is the result of accident, abuse, alteration or misapplication
with respect to the Software or any hardware on which it is loaded. Warranty service
or assistance is provided at the original point of purchase.

7. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY & EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES.

a. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. IN NO EVENT WILL TYCO'S AGGREGATE LIABILITY

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LIABILITY FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY,
BREACH OF CONTRACT, MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER CONTRACT OR TORT
CLAIMS) ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THIS EULA, OR THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
EXCEED THE GREATER OF USD$5.00 OR THE AMOUNT OF FEES YOU PAID TO TYCO
OR ITS RESELLER FOR THE SOFTWARE THAT GIVES RISE TO SUCH LIABILITY. BECAUSE
AND TO THE EXTENT THAT SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSIONS
OR LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY ABOVE, THESE MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
b. EXCLUSION OF OTHER DAMAGES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TYCO OR
ANY OF ITS RESELLERS OR LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: (I)
THIRD PARTY CLAIMS; (II) LOSS OR DAMAGE TO ANY SYSTEMS, RECORDS OR DATA,
OR LIABILITIES RELATED TO A VIOLATION OF AN INDIVIDUAL'S PRIVACY RIGHTS; OR
(III) INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, RELIANCE, OR
COVER DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS AND LOST SAVINGS), IN EACH CASE
EVEN IF TYCO HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. YOU
ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE AND LIABLE FOR VERIFYING THE SECURITY, ACCURACY
AND ADEQUACY OF ANY OUTPUT FROM THE SOFTWARE, AND FOR ANY RELIANCE
THEREON. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR THE LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED
WARRANTY LASTS, SO SOME OF THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY APPLY TO YOU ONLY
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY THOSE LAWS.

8. GENERAL. If any provision of this EULA is found to be unlawful, void, or for any reason
unenforceable, then that provision shall be severed from this EULA and shall not affect the
validity and enforceability of the remaining provisions. You should retain proof of the license
fee paid, including model number, serial number and date of payment, and present such
proof of payment when seeking service or assistance covered by the warranty set forth in
this EULA. This EULA is governed by the laws of the State of New York, without regards to its
conflicts of law principles. The parties hereby irrevocably agree that they submit themselves
to the personal jurisdiction of the state and federal courts of New York for purposes of
resolving any and all disputes arising under or related to these terms and conditions. The
parties specifically exclude the application of the provisions of the United Nations Convention
on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods.

EntraPass Special Edition Administration Guide 299

© 2021 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. JOHNSON CONTROLS, TYCO, and KANTECH are trademarks of Johnson
Controls.